ValueJet 1614 SM Rev 1.4

Service manual
ValueJet 1614
Service manual ValueJet 1614
Important Notice
For Users in Europe
Important:
This is a Class A product approved for industrial environ-
ments. In a domestic environment this product may cause
radio interference in which case you may be required to take
adequate measures.
1
For Users in the United States
This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A digital
device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide
reasonable protection against harmful interference when operating the equipment in a
commercial environment.
This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed
and used in accordance with the instruction manual, may cause harmful interference to radio
communications. Operation of this equipment in a residential area is likely to cause harmful
interference in which case the user will be required to correct the interference at his own
expense.
Trademark Mentioned in this Manual
 Mutoh, ValueJet, VJ-1614 are registered trademarks or product names of Mutoh
Europe nv.
 Centronics and BiCentronics are registered trademarks or product names of
Centronics Data Computer Corporation.
 Windows95, Windows98, Windows98SE, Windows NT4.0, Windows2000, Windows
XP, and MS-DOS are registered trademarks or product names of Microsoft
Corporation.
 Intel and Pentium are trademarks or registered trademarks of Intel Corporation.
 Other company and product names may be registered trademarks or product names.
 No part of this product or publication may be reproduced, copied, or

transmitted in any form or by any means, except for personal use,
without the permission of Mutoh Europe nv
 The product and the contents of this publication may be changed
without prior notification.
 Mutoh Europe nv has made the best efforts to keep this publication
free from error, but if you find any uncertainties or misprints, please
call us or the shop where you bought this equipment.
 Mutoh Europe nv shall not be liable for any damages or troubles
resulting from the use of this equipment or this manual.
AP-74111 - Revision 1.4 3

Warranty Limitations
Mutoh Europe nv warrants part repair or replacement as a sole measure only if a failure is
found in the system or in the materials and workmanship of the product the seller produced.
However, if the cause of failure is uncertain, decide the action after due mutual consultation.
The warranty shall not apply to any direct or indirect loss, or compensation for the loss due to
the product that has been subject to misuse, neglect, or improper alternation.
About this Manual

 Purpose and Target Readers
This manual explains preparations needed before maintaining and checking operations for
Mutoh Full Colour Ink Jet Printer (VJ-1614).
This manual is prepared for the maintenance personnel of this printer.
Before using this printer, fully understand the contents and directions in this manual.
 Manual Configuration
Section Contents
Explains types of warnings, cautions and warnings labelled
1 Safety Instructions on the printer for the both operators of the printer and
maintenance personnel.
Explains the features, part names, and functions of the
2 Product Overview
printer.
3 Specifications Explains the specifications of the printer.
Explains the procedures of replacement and removal of the
4 Parts Replacement
service parts of the printer.
5 Self-Diagnostic Mode Explains the self-diagnostic functions of the printer.
6 Maintenance Mode Explains the maintenance mode of the printer.
7 Adjustment Explains the adjusting procedures of the printer parts.
8 Maintenance Explains daily maintenance of the printer.
Explains troubles that may occur when using the printer and
9 Troubleshooting
how to solve them.
Explains the maintenance information and the exploded
10 Appendix
views for this printer.
Use the built-in self-diagnostic program to locate a defective part and

adjust/check during maintenance.
4 AP-74111 - Revision 1.4

 Manual Notation
The following symbols are used in this manual for easier understanding of the information.
Symbol Meaning
DANGER Must be followed carefully to avoid death or serious bodily injury
Must be observed to avoid slight or moderate bodily injury or

CAUTION
damage to your equipment
Contains important information and useful tips on the operation of 1

NOTE the product
TIP Indicates useful tips for operating or understanding the equipment
Indicates reference pages in this manual
 Establishment Date of This Document

This document was established on May 1, 2008.
 Firmware version covered by this document
Firmware version: V.1.01
AP-74111 - Revision 1.4 5

6 AP-74111 - Revision 1.4

Table of contents
Chapter 1 Safety Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
1.1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
1.2 Warnings, Cautions and Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
1.3 Important Safety Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
1.4 Warning Labels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24

 Handling the Warning Labels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
 Locations and Types of Warning Labels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
Chapter 2 Product Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
2.1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
2.2 Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
2.3 Part Names and Functions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31

 Front Section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
 Rear Section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
 Winding Unit Section (Optional) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
 Operation Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
2.4 Printer Status. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38

 Normal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
 Setup Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
 Self-Diagnosis Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
 Maintenance Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
 Selecting Panel Language and Panel Temperature . . . . . . . . . . . 38
Chapter 3 Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
3.1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
AP-74111 - Revision 1.4 - 22/2/11 7

3.2 Product Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
3.3 Interface Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44

 Network Interface Specifications. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
3.4 Choosing a Place for the Printer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
Chapter 4 Parts Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
4.1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
4.2 Removing Covers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52

 Removing Panel Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
 Removing Maintenance Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
 Removing Maintenance Cover U . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
 Removing Side Maintenance Cover R . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
 Removing Side Maintenance Cover L . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
 Removing Side Top Cover R . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
 Removing Side Top Cover L . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
 Removing Rear Side Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
 Removing Cartridge Cover (Upper) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
 Removing Cartridge Cover (Middle) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
 Removing Cartridge Cover(Side) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
 Removing Cartridge Cover (Lower) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
 Removing Switch Cover R . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
 Removing Switch Cover L . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
 Removing Front Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
 Removing Rear Top Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
 Removing Top Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
 Removing Media Guide F (Upper) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
 Removing Media Guide R (Upper) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
 Removing Media Guide R (Lower) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
4.3 Replacing Covers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
AP-74111 - Revision 1.4 - 22/2/11 8

 Replacing Panel Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80

 Replacing Maintenance Cover Sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
 Replacing Front Cover Sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
 Replacing Front Cover Gear, Damper Gear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
4.4 Replacing Board Base (X Rail Section). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88

 Opening Board Box 64 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
 Replacing Power Board Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
 Replacing HEATER CONT Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
 Replacing HEATER RELAY Board. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
 Replacing Cooling Fan (24V) Assembly (for Main Board) . . . . . . 95
 Replacing Cooling Fan (24V) Assembly (in Media Guide F) . . . . 96
 Replacing MAIN Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
 Replacing Fuse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
 Replacing Inlet Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
4.5 Replacing Board Base Section (Y Rail Section). . . . . . . . . . 107

 Replacing Heater Junction Board Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
4.6 Replacing X Rail Section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109

 Replacing PF Speed Reduction Belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
 Replacing PF Motor Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
 Replacing PF Encoder Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
 Replacing PF_ENC Scale, PF Speed Reduction Pulley . . . . . . . 114
 Replacing P_REAR Sensor Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
 Replacing Lever Up Sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
 Replacing Heater, Thermistor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
 Replacing Suction Fan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124
 Replacing Platen Non-Reflective Tape . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
 Replacing Media Holder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
 Replacing Flushing Tray . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
AP-74111 - Revision 1.4 - 22/2/11 9

4.7 Replacing Y Rail Section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130

 Replacing Steel Belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
 Replacing CR Motor Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
 Replacing CR Drive Pulley Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
 Replacing T Fence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
 Replacing CR Origin Sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140
 Replacing CR Driven Pulley . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
 Replacing Steel Bearer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142
 Replacing CR_FFC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144
 Replacing Pressure Roller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146
 Replacing Ink Tube . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
4.8 Replacing Cursor Section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150

 Releasing Head Lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
 Removing CR Board Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151
 Replacing CR Board Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151
 Replacing CR Encoder Assembly. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154
 Replacing PG Origin Sensor Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
 Replacing Cursor Roller Arm Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
 Removing Print Head Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
 Replacing Valve Head Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158
 Replacing Print Head . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166
 Replacing Head FFC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168
 Replacing P_EDGE Sensor Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170
4.9 Replacing Maintenance Section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171

 Removing Maintenance Inner Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171
 Replacing Flushing Box Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171
 Replacing Cleaner Head . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173
 Replacing Maintenance Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174
4.10 Replacing IH Section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181

 Replacing Ink ID Board Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181
 Replacing Frame Assembly, Needle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185
10 AP-74111 - Revision 1.4 - 22/2/11

 Replacing Ink Cartridge Control Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190

 Replacing Cartridge Holder Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191
 Replacing Two-Way Valve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192
 Replacing Sub-Tank Lower Absorber Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194
 Replacing Sub-Tank Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195
4.11 Replacing Leg Section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197

 Replacing Waste Fluid Bottle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197
4.12 Replacing Roll Media Holder Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199

 Replacing Roll Media Holder Assembly on the VJ16_L Side . . . 199
 Replacing Roll Media Holder Assembly on the VJ16_R Side . . 200
Chapter 5 Self-Diagnosis Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201
5.1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204
5.2 Preparation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204

 Preparations on Machine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204
 Starting Up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205
5.3 Operations in Self-Diagnosis Mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206

 Operating Self-Diagnosis Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206
 Diagnosis Items in Self-Diagnosis Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208
5.4 Platen Adjustment Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210
5.5 Inspection Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211

 Memory Size Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213
 Version Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213
 Operation Panel Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214
 Sensor Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215
 Encoder Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217
 Fan Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217
 History Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218
 Head Waveform Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221
5.6 Ink Charging Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222
AP-74111 - Revision 1.4 - 22/2/11 11

5.7 Adjustment Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223

 Head Nozzle Check Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226
 Skew Check Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228
 Head Slant Check Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229
 Voltage Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234
 Uni-D/Bi-D Low/High Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236
 Side Margin Adjustment Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244
 Test Printing Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245
 HeadWash Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246
 HeadWash Menu 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247
 Software Counter Initialization Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247
 Feed Pitch Check Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248
 Solid Print Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249
5.8 Cleaning Menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250
5.9 Sample Printing Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251
5.10 Time Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255
5.11 Parameter Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256

 Parameter Initialization Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257
 Parameter Update Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260
5.12 Servo Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270
5.13 Endurance Running Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273

 CR Motor Endurance Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274
 PF Motor Endurance Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275
 Pump Endurance Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 276
 Print Head Endurance (Nozzle Print) Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277
 General Endurance Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 278
 Endurance Running Check Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279
5.14 Media Feed Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280
5.15 ExControl Menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281

 Version . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282
12 AP-74111 - Revision 1.4 - 22/2/11

 Sensor. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282
 Mist Fan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 286
 Heater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 286
 History . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287
5.16 PaperInitial Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288
5.17 Speed Mode Menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 289
Chapter 6 Maintenance Mode 2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 291
6.1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292
6.2 Operations in Maintenance Mode 2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292

 Starting Up the Maintenance Mode 2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292
 Operating Maintenance Mode 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292
6.3 Maintenance Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293

 Counter Display Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 294
 Counter Initialization Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 296
 Counter Print Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 297
 Media Feed Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 297
Chapter 7 Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 299
7.1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 302
7.2 Adjustment Item . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 302
7.3 Working with Mutoh Service Assistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305

 Parameter Backup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305
 Jigs and Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 306
 Required Environment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 306
 Date & Time Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 315
 Editing Media Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 317
 Downloading and Saving Error Log . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 319
 Updating Main Firmware . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 322
 Updating the Firmware of Heater Controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 323
AP-74111 - Revision 1.4 - 22/2/11 13

 Receiving Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 324

 Sending Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 327
 Using Diagnostic Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 330
 Downloading Individual Code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 334
 Uploading Authorization Code. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 336
 Referring Setup List Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 337
 Referring Adjust Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 340
 Version Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 342
 Quitting Application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 343
7.4 Steel Belt Tension Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 344

 Jigs and Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 344
 Adjustment Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 344
7.5 PF Speed Reduction Belt Tension Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . 347

 Jigs and Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 347
7.6 PF Encoder Assembly Position Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . 348

7.7 CR Speed Reduction Belt Tension Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . 349

 Jigs and Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 349
 Adjustment Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 349
7.8 Head Accuracy Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 352

 Head Alignment (Horizontal Height) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 352
 Head Alignment (Vertical Slant) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 354
7.9 PG Height Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 356

 Jigs and Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 356
7.10 P_EDGE Sensor Sensitivity Adjustment. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 358

 Jigs and Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 358
7.11 P_REAR Sensor Sensitivity Adjustment. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 361

 Jigs and Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 361
14 AP-74111 - Revision 1.4 - 22/2/11

Chapter 8 Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 363
8.1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 364
8.2 Periodical Services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 365

 Periodic Replacement Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 365
 Parts Which Require Inspection/Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 366
8.3 Part Life Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 367
8.4 Jigs and Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 368

 Required Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 368
8.5 Lubrication/Bonding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 369
8.6 Transportation of Printer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 372
Chapter 9 Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 373
9.1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 374
9.2 Troubleshooting with Error Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 374

 Operation Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 375
 Errors with Message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 378
 Errors Requiring Reboot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 384
 Error Messages During File Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 398
9.3 Troubleshooting Without Error Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 403

 Initial Operation Problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 403
 Media Feed Problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 413
 Printing Problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 415
 Noise Problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 434
 Online Function Problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 436
 Other Problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 438
 Problems in Using Mutoh Service Assistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 441
AP-74111 - Revision 1.4 - 22/2/11 15

Chapter 10 Appendix . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 443
10.1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 443
10.2 Electric Wiring Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 443
10.3 Exploded View. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 443
16 AP-74111 - Revision 1.4 - 22/2/11

Chapter 1 Safety Instructions

Introduction. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
Warnings, Cautions and Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18

1
Important Safety Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
Warning Labels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
 Handling the Warning Labels. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
 Locations and Types of Warning Labels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
 Main Body. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
AP-74111 - Revision 1.4 17

1.1 Introduction
This chapter explains the meaning of safety terms for personnel who installs, operates, or
maintains this equipment, important safety instructions, and the warning labels attached to
the equipment.
Caution
 Make sure to follow all instructions and warnings on this manual when
installing, operating, or maintaining the equipment.
1.2 Warnings, Cautions and Notes

Safety terms in this manual and the contents of warning labels attached to the printer are
categorized into the following three types depending on the degree of risk (or the scale of
accident).
Read the following explanations carefully, and follow the instructions in this manual.
Table 1-1 Safety Terms Descriptions
Safety terms Details
DANGER Must be followed carefully to avoid death or serious bodily injury
Must be observed to avoid slight or moderate bodily injury or damage to

CAUTION
whole or part of the product
Contains important information and useful tips on the operation of the
NOTE product
TIP Indicates useful tips for operating or understanding the printer
Indicates “prohibited” operations
Indicates required operations
Indicates reference page in this manual
18 AP-74111 - Revision 1.4

1.3 Important Safety Instructions

General safety instructions that must be observed to use the equipment safely are explained
below.
Do not install this printer in the following locations: Doing so may result in the printer tipping or
falling over and causing injury.


Unstable surfaces
Angled place
1
 Areas subject to vibration by other equipment
Do not stand on or place heavy objects on your printer. Doing so may result in the printer
tipping or falling over and causing injury.
Do not cover the ventilation hole of your printer with cloth, such as a blanket or table cloth.
Doing so may result in fire.
Do not place the printer in humid and dusty areas. Doing so may result in electrical shock or
fire.
Do not use damaged power supply cables. Doing so may cause electric shock or fires.
Do not connect or disconnect the power supply plug with wet hands. Doing so may cause
electric shock.
Make sure to perform the following before parts replacement.

 Power OFF the printer.
 Remove the power cable from the power outlet.
Not doing so may cause electric shock or damage to the electric circuit.
 Unplug the cables connected to the printer.
Failure to do so could result in damage to the printer.
Do not connect ground lines to the following locations.

 Gas piping
There will be a possibility of causing fires or exploding.
 Phone ground lines and lightning rods
A large current may flow if there is a lightning strike.
 Water piping and faucets
If a part of the piping is plastic, it will not serve as a ground.
During heater operation, do not place flammable objects on top of the platen. Doing so may
cause fires.
Do not spill flammable fluids on the platen. Doing may cause fires.
AP-74111 - Revision 1.4 19

Do not insert or drop metal objects or flammable objects inside the printer through openings
such as air holes. Doing so may cause electric shock or fires.
If foreign objects or fluids such as water enter the product internals, do not use the unit as is.
Doing so may cause electric shock or fires. Switch off the power supply switch immediately,
and disconnect the power plug from the power outlet.
Make sure to always use the provided power supply cable. If using a power supply cable other
than the one supplied, it may cause electric shock or fires.
Always use the specified power supply (AC100V-120V or AC220V-240V). If using a power
supply that is outside specifications, it may cause electric shock or fires.
Supply power directly from a power supply outlet (AC100V-120V or AC 220V-240V). Do not
use extensions or splitters. Doing so may cause electric shock or fires.
Always use the dedicated power plug with ground terminal, and make sure to connect the
ground to a ground line. If the ground line is not connected, it can cause electric shock or fires.
Waste fluid produced from the printer corresponds to waste oil (waste ink) in industrial waste
(out of the 19 business related items). A proper waste fluid processing is required by law
based on the industrial waste processing law and regulations of individual local governments.
Please contract a waste fluid processing company for disposal.
Assembling and disassembling of the printer are possible only for the parts that disassembling
procedures are shown in this manual. Do not disassemble any frame parts or parts that
disassembling procedures are not shown in this manual.
Doing so may cause trouble that cannot be restored, as the printer is originally assembled in
the factory with a high accuracy of 1/100 mm.
Do not touch the elements on the circuit board with bare hands.
Doing so may cause static electricity and break the elements.
Do not press the transparent film on the valve head assembly with your hands. Doing so may
discharge the ink filled inside the valve head assembly.
Be careful not to damage the transparent film on the valve head assembly.
Do not touch the nozzles of the print head. Make sure that the nozzles do not get any dust.
There are some remaining ink in the tubes. Be careful not to spill ink from the tube outlet onto
the printer or items close to the printer.
If you need to operate the printer with the cover removed for maintenance, be careful not to
get hurt by the driving parts.
Never lube the printer mechanism with lube other than that designated by Mutoh. Doing so
may damage the parts or shorten the lifetime.
20 AP-74111 - Revision 1.4

If the power board assembly needs to be removed, remove the power cable and wait for 5
minutes or more before taking it out; this will discharge the residual electrical charge of the
electrolytic capacitor.
When connecting or removing an FFC type cable on a MAIN board assembly connector, make
sure to connect or remove the cable perpendicular to the connector.
Connecting or removing at a slant angle may damage, break or short circuit the inner terminal
of the connector. That may damage the elements on the board.
When connecting or removing the FFC type cables (tape wire) on the main board assembly
connector, always insert or remove the cables perpendicularly into or from the connector.
1
Connecting or removing at a slant angle may damage, break or short circuit the inner terminal
of the connector. That may damage the elements on the board.
Make sure there is sufficient space around the printer when performing maintenance work.
Maintenance must be done by more than two person for the following work.
 When disassembling or reassembling the product and the dedicated stand
 When packing the printer for transportation
When handling power supply cables, be careful for the following:

 Do not modify the power supply cable.
 Do not place heavy objects on top of the power supply cable.
 Do not excessively bend, twist or pull on the power supply cable.
 Do not route the power supply cable near heater devices.
When handling the power supply plug, be careful for the following: If handled improperly, it will
be a cause for fires.
 Do not insert the power supply plug when it is dusty or when there are any foreign objects
attached to it.
 Insert the power supply plug all the way to the base of the pins.
When opening or closing the front cover and maintenance cover, be careful not to get fingers
caught.
When handling the ink cartridge, be careful so that the ink does not come into contact with
eyes or skin. If the ink comes into contact with skin or the eyes, wash off immediately with
water. If left alone, it can cause bloodshot eyes or light inflammations. If there is an abnormal
condition, consult a doctor immediately.
Do not disassemble the ink cartridge. If disassembled, there will be a danger of the ink coming
into contact with the eyes or skin.
During initialization operation of the product, do not operate the media set lever. The print
head section and pressure roller sections may interfere with one another, and lead to damage
of the unit.
Do not touch the media guide during printing. The media guide will be extremely hot, and may
cause burns.
AP-74111 - Revision 1.4 21

During operation of the winding unit, be careful not to get fingers caught in the drive section.
When cutting roll media, be careful for the following: If mishandled, there is a possibility of
cutting fingers or hands on the cutter blade.
 When holding the media, do not place fingers on top of the media cut groove.
 Move the cutter blade slowly along the media cut groove.
Excluding the locations specified below, do not use volatile chemicals such as jet wash fluid,
thinner, benzene, alcohol, etc. Doing so can cause damage to the unit.
 Inside of maintenance cover
 Print head surface
Be careful so that no moisture enters inside the product. If moisture enters the product,
electrical circuits inside the product may short.
When replacing the flushing box absorption material, take appropriate care so that the waste
fluid is not spilled. If the waste fluid adheres to the grid roller, the grid roller surface may be
intruded, and cause an adverse effect to media feeding.
When cleaning the cleaning wiper

 Do not touch the cleaning wiper and head cap unit.
Oil becoming attached may make it impossible to perform proper head cleaning.
 Always use a clean stick, and wipe off with a dry cloth.
If water, etc. comes into contact with the clean stick, it may cause the print head to become
clogged.
 Do not reuse the clean stick.
Any attached dust, etc. may damage the head.
When cleaning the outer perimeter of the print head

 Never touch the nozzle surface of the print head.
Doing so may damage the print head.
 Do not touch the tip of the clean stick.
Oil becoming attached may damage the print head.
 Never apply water, etc. on the tip of the clean stick.
Doing so may damage the print head.
 Do not reuse the clean stick.
Any attached dust, etc. may damage the print head.
Do not place the product on an incline, stand against another object, or flip upside down.
Doing so may spill the ink inside the product. Also, it will not be possible to guarantee proper
operation after moving.
When unpacking or moving the product, make sure to always work with 2 or more persons.
When taking the product out of the packaging box, always remove the vinyl bag, and hold the
side of the product. If lifted while still in the vinyl bag, there will be a danger of the product
slipping out of one's hands, and falling and becoming damaged.
22 AP-74111 - Revision 1.4

When not using the product for extended periods of time, always disconnect the power supply
plug from the wall outlet for safety.
Always connect the ground line to a ground line that satisfies the following specifications:
 Ground terminal of the power supply socket
 A ground line where a copper is buried over 650mm or more into the ground.
 A ground terminal for which class D grounding work has been performed.
Make sure to ventilate the work area. The odour may cause nausea, and may potentially 1
cause fires.
When performing the following work, make sure to always work with 2 or more persons.
 Setting the winding unit
Immediately after completing printing, the media guide and platen will be extremely hot.
Perform any work after the media guide and platen have adequately cooled.
When performing cleaning, make sure to turn the power supply OFF, and pull out the power
supply plug from the power outlet.
Make sure that the product maintains a horizontal position when moving.
Before performing installation work for various options, make sure to perform the following.
 Power OFF the printer.
 Pull out the power supply plug from the power outlet.
 Disconnect cables connected to the product.
If work is performed with these connected, damage to the product or computer may result.
 Touch the metallic sections of the product to remove any static electricity charged in
clothing or on one's body.
The electronic parts such as the memory, etc. are susceptible to damage by static
electricity.
When installing various options, make sure not to touch any elements on the circuit board.
Elements on the circuit board become very hot, and may cause burns.
AP-74111 - Revision 1.4 23

1.4 Warning Labels

The handling, attachment locations, and types of warning labels are explained below.
Warning labels are attached to areas where care should be taken. Read and understand the
positions and contents thoroughly before maintenance operation.
1.4.1 Handling the Warning Labels
Make sure to note the following when handling the warning labels.
Note
 Make sure that all warning labels can be recognized. If text or illustrations
cannot be seen clearly, clean or replace the label.
 When cleaning warning labels, use a cloth with water or neutral detergent. Do
not use a solvent or gasoline.
 If a warning label is damaged, lost, or cannot be recognized, replace the label.
24 AP-74111 - Revision 1.4

1.4.2 Locations and Types of Warning Labels
Main Body
The locations of warning labels on the main body are shown below.
5 4 3 2 1
6
1
6
AP-74111 - Revision 1.4 25

Table 1-2 List of Warning Labels

N° Warning label type
26 AP-74111 - Revision 1.4

Table 1-2 List of Warning Labels (Continued)

N° Warning label type
5
1
AP-74111 - Revision 1.4 27

28 AP-74111 - Revision 1.4

Chapter 2 Product Overview

Introduction. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
Features. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
 Fast Print . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
2
 Variety of Print Media . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
 Vivid Colour Reproduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
 Multi-Heater System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
 Effective Utilization of Media . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
Part Names and Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31

 Front Section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
 Rear Section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
 Winding Unit Section (Optional). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
 Operation Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
 Operation Keys. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
 LCD Monitor and Status Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
Printer Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
 Normal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
 Setup Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
 Self-Diagnosis Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
 Maintenance Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
 Selecting Panel Language and Panel Temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
AP-74111 - Revision 1.4 29

2.1 Introduction
This chapter explains the features, part names, and functions of the printer.
2.2 Features
The features of the printer are explained below.
Fast Print
This model uses the new head prints images faster.

Realizing printing width of 1615 mm in uni-direction printing mode.
Variety of Print Media
The height of the print head position can be set high/low, so that this model can print on the
media of which thickness is between 0.08 and 0.3 mm.
Vivid Colour Reproduction
For Vivid colour reproduction, this model has high-capacity (220 ml and 440ml) 4 colour ink
cartridges with exclusive smart IC chip on it. With the IC chip, you can manage the ink level of
the cartridges and can get better productivity.
Also, With variable dot mechanism, this model enhances the level of colour expression.
Multi-Heater System
The media-heating system which have been equipped to PJ series is changed to match the
solvent ink. There are 3 heaters on Pre / Platen / After positions and improved the ink fixability
and drying property.
Effective Utilization of Media
The JOG function for setting print start position on purpose is equipped. You can print on the
margin(s) of a media which is already printed.
30 AP-74111 - Revision 1.4

2.3 Part Names and Functions

Part names and functions are explained below.
Note
 For the directions described in this document, refer to the following figure.
Upper
2
Left Rear
Front Right
Lower
AP-74111 - Revision 1.4 31

2.3.1 Front Section

7 3 11 2
11
9
8
5
4 10 10 4
N° Description Function
Used for fixing or releasing the media
 Lower the lever to fix the media
 Lower the lever further to fix the media firmly
1 Media set lever  Used to improve the accuracy of media feeding
 The accuracy of media feeding may decline depending
on media.
 Raise the lever to release the media
Used to set operational conditions, the status of the printer,
2 Operation panel
and other functions
Keeps the operator safe from moving parts while operating.
3 Front cover Opened and closed when media is set or jammed. It is
normally closed.
4 Stand Used to set the printer on the level surface of the floor
Used to feed media smoothly when setting media and
5 Media guide printing. Inside the media guide, a heater (after-heater) is
installed to dry the ink.
6 Platen Installed inside the front cover
Installed inside the front cover. Used to press the media
7 Pressure roller
from above and hold it when printing
Installed inside of the front cover. Used to cut printed media
8 Media cut groove
straight
32 AP-74111 - Revision 1.4

Used to protect users from the mechanical parts inside the
printer in the following cases:
9 Maintenance cover - Cleaning the cleaning wiper
- Cleaning around the print head
This cover must usually be closed.
10 Adjuster Used to keep the printer level
11 Media holding plate

Installed inside the front cover. Attach the media holder
plates to both sides of the media to prevent media warp. 2
2.3.2 Rear Section
3 2 4
8
9
5 6 7 1
N° Name Function
Roll media Used to load the roll media. Include flanges to attach roll media,
1
holders and the levers that fix the roll media holders.
2 Media feed slot Insert media from here when feeding media
3 Ink cartridge slot Holds the ink cartridge
Used to feed the media smoothly. In the media guide, a heater
4 Media guide
(pre-heater) is installed to warm the media.
5 AC inlet Used for connecting the power cable
6 USB connector Not used for this printer
Network interface
7 Connector to connect a network interface cable
connector
8 Waste fluid tank Used to store waste ink discharged from print head
Opened/closed when discharging waste fluid from waste fluid
9 Waste fluid valve
tank. This cover must usually be closed.
AP-74111 - Revision 1.4 33

2.3.3 Winding Unit Section (Optional)
2 8
5
3
1 4 7
1 Winding unit Used to take up printed media
2 Absorbing roller Used to guide printed media to the scroller
3 Scroller receiver Set the scroller for the winding unit here
Used to poise the scroller when rotating the scroller
4 Scroller release lever
manually
5 Scroller Used to take up printed media
Scroller height
6 Adjusts the height of scroller receiver
adjustment screw
Scroller horizontal
7 position adjustment Adjusts the horizontal position of the scroller
screw
8 Power switch Power ON/OFF the printer
34 AP-74111 - Revision 1.4

2.3.4 Operation Panel
The operation panel is used to set operational conditions, display the status of the printer, and
set other functions.
The names and functions of the operation keys and status lamps are explained below.
8, 9 10
2
17
13
14 15
16
11
6
12
1
5
3 4 7 2
AP-74111 - Revision 1.4 35

Operation Keys
N° Name Normal Setup menu display

Changes the LCD monitor display Changes the setup menu display
1 Menu
to setup menu status. status to normal status.
 Selects the menu to be set and
shifts to the next hierarchy.
Enter -
 Determines and saves the
2 parameter value.
If held down for 2 seconds or
Cleaning more, starts cleaning the printer -
head.
 During plotting: Terminates  Returns to the previous menu
printing forcibly and deletes 1 hierarchy. Changed parameter
file of remaining data. values are disabled.
 During reception/analysis:  Changes the setup menu
Deletes the data that has been display status to normal status.
already received/analysed and
3 Cancel
ignores 1 file of data received
after that.
 During ink drying time wait
status: Releases the ink drying
time wait status and ejects the
media.
Sets the media type.  Changes the setting value in
<  The lamp for the type that is the following menu:
set lights on (green). Origin setting menu
4
If held down for 2 seconds or
Nozzle Check more, starts checking the printer -
nozzle.
Sets the cleaning mode.
5 >  The lamp for the cleaning Displays lower rank menu items.
mode lights on (green).
Feeds the media in the reverse
Backward -
direction.
 Changes the menu in forward
order.
6
 Changes the setting value in
+ -
forward order.
 Increases the value when
inputting setting value.
36 AP-74111 - Revision 1.4

N° Name Normal Setup menu display

Feeds the media in the forward
Forward ¯ -
direction.
 Changes the menu in the
7
reverse direction.
-
 Decreases the value when
inputting values.
8 Power Switch the printer on and off. Switch the printer on and off.
2
LCD Monitor and Status Lamps
N° Name Colour Status Function

On The printer is ON.
An error has occurred. The contents will be
1 Power lamp Green Blinking
displayed on the LCD monitor.
Off The printer is OFF.
 The printer is analysing received data.
On
 The printer is printing data.
2 Data lamp Orange Blinking The printer is receiving data.
The printer is not receiving, analysing or printing
Off
data.
On The print head height is set to High position.
3 High lamp Green
Off The print head height is set to Low position.
On The print head height is set to Low position.
4 Low lamp Green
Off The print head height is set to High position.
On The effect menu is set to Wave.
5 Wave lamp Red
Off The effect menu is set to either Fine or SuperFine.
Fine & S.Fine On The effect menu is set to either Fine or SuperFine.
6 Red
lamp Off The effect menu is set to Wave.
 The cleaning mode is set to Strong.
On  When the Normal lamp is also on, the cleaning
7 Strong lamp Green
mode is set to Economy.
Off  The cleaning mode is set to Normal.
 The cleaning mode is set to Normal.
On  When the Strong lamp is also on, the cleaning
8 Normal lamp Green
mode is set to Economy quality.
Off The cleaning mode is set to Strong.
This monitor displays the operation status and
9 LCD monitor - -
error messages of the printer.
AP-74111 - Revision 1.4 37

2.4 Printer Status

The status of the printer is explained below.
2.4.1 Normal
Indicates that the printer can print when media is loaded.

Each setup concerning printing can be operated by using operation panel.
2.4.2 Setup Menu
Each setup concerning printing can be operated by using operation panel.

The settings required for normal printing are usually made on the printer driver or application,
but can also be made using the operation panel.
2.4.3 Self-Diagnosis Function
Indicates that each settings concerning printing using the operation panel. Names and
functions of the operation panel keys are the same as those of setup menu display.
2.4.4 Maintenance Mode
Indicates that each setup concerning to the life counter on this printer can be operated by
using the operation panel. Names and functions of the operation panel keys are the same as
those of setup menu display.
2.4.5 Selecting Panel Language and Panel Temperature
This section describes how to select the language and temperature displayed.
Follow the steps below to select the language.
Note
 You can choose the following display.
 Language: English or Japanese.
 Temperature: Centigrade (C) or Fahrenheit (F)
38 AP-74111 - Revision 1.4

Step 1: Press Power while pressing Cancel.
2
Step 2: Press Setting/value + or Setting/
value to modify the value.
Step 3: To save the modified value, press

Enter.
AP-74111 - Revision 1.4 39

40 AP-74111 - Revision 1.4

Chapter 3 Specifications
Introduction. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
Product Specifications. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
 Main Unit Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
3
Interface Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
 Network Interface Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
Choosing a Place for the Printer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45

 Installation Environment Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
 Required Space . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
AP-74111 - Revision 1.4 41

3.1 Introduction
This chapter explains the specifications of the product, optional parts, and supplies.
Installation environment requirements are also explained.
3.2 Product Specifications

Main Unit Specifications
Item Specifications
Model name VJ-1614
Plotting method On-demand piezo drive
Motor driving method Firmware servo / DC motor drive
Media feeding method Multi-point pressure grid roller method
Media fixing method Pressurizing roller manual-down method
Media supply
Roll media Rear feeding / front ejection
and ejection
Roll media outer diameter 150 mm (5.9 in.) or less
Roll media weight 30 kg (66 lb.) or less
Maximum media length 50 m (164 ft.)
Maximum media width 1625 mm (63.9 in.)
Maximum media thickness 0.3 mm (0.01 in.)
Maximum plot width 1615 mm (63.6 in.)
Top: 15 mm, Bottom: 5 mm, Left: 5-25 mm, Right: 5-25
Plotting margins
mm
Media cutting method Horizontal manual cut
Head height adjustment 2 levels: Normal / High
The larger value either ± 0.25 mm or ± 0.1% of moving
distance
 Used media: Roll MF-3G
 Plot length: 1219 mm (4 ft.)
Distance accuracy
 Operating temperature: 22ºC to 30ºC (71.6ºF to 86ºF)
 Operating humidity: 40% to 60%
 PG: Low
 Plot mode: Graphics1
42 AP-74111 - Revision 1.4

Item Specifications
±0.1 mm or less against the moving distance (500.0 mm)
 Used media: Roll MF-3G
Right angle accuracy  Operating temperature: 22ºC to 30ºC (71.6ºF to 86ºF)
 Operating humidity: 40% to 60%
 Plot mode: Graphics1
CPU
Memory
64Bit RISC CPU
128MB 3
Command MH-RTL (RTL-PASS)
Interface Network Interface (Ethernet IEEE802.3)
Supply method Tube supply from four separate cartridges
Ink Black, cyan, magenta, yellow: 220 ml ± 5 ml and 440ml ±
Cartridge
5ml
Environmental conditions Temperature Humidity
20ºC (68ºF) to 32ºC
40% to 60%, with no
Operation environment (89.6ºF)
condensation
Strage life: six month
22ºC (71.6ºF) to 30ºC
(86ºF)
Plotting accuracy warranty 40% to 60%, with no
Strage life: four
range condensation
days(32ºC(89.6ºF) or
higher)
Rate of change 2ºC/hour or less 5%/hour or less
-20ºC (-4ºF) to 60ºC 20% to 80%, with no
Without ink
Storage (140ºF) condensation
environment -10ºC (14ºF) to 40ºC 20% to 80%, with no
With ink
(104ºF) condensation
Voltage AC 90V to 132V / AC198V to AC264V
Power source
Frequency 50Hz / 60Hz ± 1Hz
Power During Plotting 1200W (when heater is ON)
consumption During standby 40W or less (when standby heater is OFF)
Height 1332 mm (52.4 in.) * including dedicated stand
Outer
Width 2698 mm (106 in.)
dimensions
Depth 716 mm (28.2 in.)
Weight 173 kg (380.6 lb.) * including dedicated stand
AP-74111 - Revision 1.4 43

3.3 Interface Specifications

This section explains the specification of the interfaces Supported for this printer.
3.3.1 Network Interface Specifications
Item Specifications
Network type Ethernet IEEE802.3
10BASE-T / 100BASE-TX Auto-switching
Network I/F (RJ-45 connector twist pair cable)
MDI / MDI-X Auto-switching
Corresponding
TCP/IP
protocol
44 AP-74111 - Revision 1.4

3.4 Choosing a Place for the Printer
Important
 Do not place the printer on unstable surfaces, slanted areas or locations that are subject
to vibration from other products. Doing so may cause the product to fall, become
damaged, or cause injury.
 Do not stand on the printer or place any heavy objects on it.
Doing so may cause it to fall over, become damaged, or cause injury. 3
 Do not cover the ventilation hole of the printer with cloth, such as a blanket or table cloth.
Doing so could prevent the printer from ventilating and cause fire.
 Keep the printer away from humid and dusty areas. Failure to do so may result in
electrical shock or fire.
Installation Environment Requirements
Choose a place for printer installation following the requirements of the table below.
Floor loading capability 2940Pa (300kgf/m2) or over

Voltage AC 90 to 132 V / AC198V to AC264V
Electrical
Frequency 50/60Hz ± 1Hz
specifications
Capacity Main side: 8.5 A, Heater side: 8.5A
Environmental conditions Temperature Humidity
Operation 20ºC (68ºF) - 32ºC 40% - 60%, with no
environment (89.6ºF) condensation
Plotting accuracy 22ºC (71.6ºF) - 30ºC 40% - 60%, with no
warranty range (86ºF) condensation
Rate of change 2ºC/hour or less 5%/hour or less
20% - 80%
-20ºC (-4ºF) - 60ºC
Storage environment No condensation (when
(104ºF)
ink is not charged)
Note
 Avoid the following temperature and humidity conditions. Otherwise, Plotted images may
appear differently from what you expect.
 Places where sudden changes in temperature and humidity are expected, even
though the condition is within the range specified
 Places where direct sunlight or excessive lighting are expected
 Places where air conditioners blow directly
 Mutoh recommends that the printer should be installed where air conditioning can be
adjusted easily.
AP-74111 - Revision 1.4 45

Required Space
Install the printer on a flat surface that fulfils the following conditions.
 The place to install printer with the dedicated stand should have enough loading capacity.
Note
 For the printer and the dedicated stand, refer to Product Specifications.
a= 650 mm
b=1,000 mm
c=1,000 mm
d=1,000 mm
e=1,550 mm
f =3,800 mm
g=2,700 mm
e
a d
f b c
g
* Do not use VJ-1614 without stand.
46 AP-74111 - Revision 1.4

Chapter 4 Parts Replacement

Introduction. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
Removing Covers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
 Removing Panel Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
4
 Removing Maintenance Cover. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
 Removing Maintenance Cover U . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
 Removing Side Maintenance Cover R. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
 Removing Side Maintenance Cover L . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
 Removing Side Top Cover R . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
 Removing Side Top Cover L . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
 Removing Rear Side Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
 Removing Cartridge Cover (Upper) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
 Removing Cartridge Cover (Middle) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
 Removing Cartridge Cover(Side). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
 Removing Cartridge Cover (Lower) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
 Removing Switch Cover R . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
 Removing Switch Cover L . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
 Removing Front Cover. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
 Removing Rear Top Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
 Removing Top Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
 Removing Media Guide F (Upper) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
 Removing Media Guide R (Upper). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
 Removing Media Guide R (Lower). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
Replacing Covers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
 Replacing Panel Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
 Replacing Maintenance Cover Sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
 Replacing Maintenance Cover Sensor R . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
 Replacing Maintenance Cover Sensor L . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
 Replacing Front Cover Sensor. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
 R Side. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
AP-74111 - Revision 1.4 47

 L Side . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
 Replacing Front Cover Gear, Damper Gear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
 R Side. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
 L Side . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
Replacing Board Base (X Rail Section) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88

 Opening Board Box 64. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
 Replacing Power Board Assembly. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
 Replacing HEATER CONT Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
 Replacing HEATER RELAY Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
 Replacing Cooling Fan (24V) Assembly (for Main Board) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
 Replacing Cooling Fan (24V) Assembly (in Media Guide F) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
 Replacing MAIN Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
 Replacing SODIMM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
 Replacing Main Board Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
 Replacing Fuse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
 Replacing Inlet Assembly. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
 Replacing AC Inlet Small (Main Side) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
 Replacing AC Inlet Large (Heater Side) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
Replacing Board Base Section (Y Rail Section) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107

 Replacing Heater Junction Board Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
Replacing X Rail Section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109

 Replacing PF Speed Reduction Belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
 Replacing PF Motor Assembly. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
 Replacing PF Encoder Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
 Replacing PF_ENC Scale, PF Speed Reduction Pulley . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114
 Replacing P_REAR Sensor Assembly. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
 Replacing Lever Up Sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
 Replacing Heater, Thermistor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
 Replacing the Pre-heater, Pre-thermistor. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
 Replacing Platen Heater, Platen Thermistor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
 Replacing After-Heater, After-Thermistor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
 Replacing Suction Fan. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124
 Replacing Platen Non-Reflective Tape . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
48 AP-74111 - Revision 1.4

 Replacing Media Holder. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127

 Replacing Flushing Tray . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
 Replacing Flushing Tray R . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
 Replacing Flushing Tray L . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
Replacing Y Rail Section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130



Replacing Steel Belt. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
Replacing CR Motor Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
4
 Replacing CR Drive Pulley Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
 Replacing T Fence. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
 Replacing CR Origin Sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140
 Replacing CR Driven Pulley. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
 Replacing Steel Bearer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142
 Replacing CR_FFC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144
 Replacing Pressure Roller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146
 Replacing Ink Tube . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
Replacing Cursor Section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150

 Releasing Head Lock. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
 Removing CR Board Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151
 Replacing CR Board Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151
 Replacing CR Encoder Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154
 Replacing PG Origin Sensor Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
 Replacing Cursor Roller Arm Assembly. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
 Removing Print Head Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
 Replacing Valve Head Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158
 Filling Valve head with Cleaning Liquid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158
 Replacement of Valve Head Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161
 Replacing Print Head . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166
 Replacing Head FFC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168
 Replacing P_EDGE Sensor Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170
Replacing Maintenance Section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171

 Removing Maintenance Inner Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171
 Replacing Flushing Box Assembly. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171
 Replacing Cleaner Head . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173
AP-74111 - Revision 1.4 49

 Replacing Maintenance Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174
Replacing IH Section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181

 Replacing Ink ID Board Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181
 Replacing Frame Assembly, Needle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185
 Replacing Ink Cartridge Control Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190
 Replacing Cartridge Holder Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191
 Replacing Two-Way Valve. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192
 Replacing Sub-Tank Lower Absorber Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194
 Replacing Sub-Tank Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195
Replacing Leg Section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197

 Replacing Waste Fluid Bottle. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197
Replacing Roll Media Holder Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199

 Replacing Roll Media Holder Assembly on the VJ16_L Side . . . . . . . . . . . . 199
 Replacing Roll Media Holder Assembly on the VJ16_R Side . . . . . . . . . . . . 200
50 AP-74111 - Revision 1.4

4.1 Introduction
This chapter provides information on removal and replacement of service parts.
Important
 Before starting part replacement, always perform the following operations.
Switch off the machine power.
4

 Remove the power plug from the outlet.

Otherwise, you may suffer electric shock or the system circuit may be
damaged.
 Remove any cables connected to the printer.
Otherwise, the printer may be damaged.
Caution
 The components in the printer can be disassembled only if so instructed in this
manual. Do not disassemble the frame components and other components that
are not instructed to disassemble in the manual.
 The printer has been assembled in the Mutoh factory with extremely high
precision up to 1/100mm. If disassembled inappropriately, it may not restore its
normal functionality.
Note
 After replacing any service parts, perform necessary lubrication and bonding
following the instructions in section "Lubrication/Bonding"
AP-74111 - Revision 1.4 51

4.2 Removing Covers

This section describes the procedures to replace covers.
16
11 1 5 15
6
17
4
7
18
12 13
21 22 20 19
16
15
17
18
9
13
14
Table 4-1 Cover Component List

N° Part name
1 Panel cover
2 Maintenance cover R
52 AP-74111 - Revision 1.4

Table 4-1 Cover Component List (Continued)

N° Part name
3 Maintenance cover U_R
4 Side maintenance cover R
5 Side top cover R
6 Maintenance cover L
7 Maintenance cover U_L 4
8 Side top cover L
9 Side maintenance cover L
10 Front cover
11 Acrylic plate
12 Media guide F (upper)
13 Board box
14 Rear side cover
15 Cartridge cover (upper)
16 Cartridge cover (middle)
17 Cartridge cover (side)
18 Cartridge cover (lower)
19 Rear top cover
20 Top cover
21 Media guide R (upper)
22 Media guide R (lower)
AP-74111 - Revision 1.4 53

4.2.1 Removing Panel Cover
Step 1: Open the maintenance cover R.

Step 2: Remove the screws (2) that retain the panel cover.
1
2 2
N° Part name
1 Panel cover
2 Screws that retain the panel cover
Step 3: Remove the panel cover.

Step 4: To reassemble the unit, reverse the removal procedure.
54 AP-74111 - Revision 1.4

4.2.2 Removing Maintenance Cover
Note
 The procedure to remove the maintenance cover R is the same as the one for
the maintenance cover L.
Step 1: Open the maintenance cover.

Step 2:
Step 3:
Lift up the maintenance cover.
Remove the maintenance cover.
4
N° Part name
1 Maintenance cover
AP-74111 - Revision 1.4 55

4.2.3 Removing Maintenance Cover U
Note
 The procedure to remove the maintenance cover U_R is the same as for the
maintenance cover U_L.
Step 1: Remove the maintenance cover.

Refer to Removing Maintenance Cover
Step 2: Remove the screws (2) that retain the maintenance cover U.
N° Part name
1 Maintenance cover U
2 Screws that retain the maintenance cover U
Step 3: Remove the maintenance cover U.

56 AP-74111 - Revision 1.4

4.2.4 Removing Side Maintenance Cover R
Step 1: Remove the screws (2) that retain the side maintenance cover R.
1
N° Part name
1 Side maintenance cover R
2 Screws that retain the side maintenance cover R
Step 2: Lift up and remove the side maintenance cover R.

AP-74111 - Revision 1.4 57

4.2.5 Removing Side Maintenance Cover L
Step 1: Remove the screws (2) that retain the side maintenance cover L.
1
N° Part name
1 Side maintenance cover L
2 Screws that retain the side maintenance cover L
Step 2: Lift up and remove the side maintenance cover L.

4.2.6 Removing Side Top Cover R
Note
 Before removing the side top cover R, close the front cover.
Step 1: Remove the side maintenance cover R.

Refer to Removing Side Maintenance Cover R
Step 2: Remove the cartridge cover (upper).
Refer to Removing Cartridge Cover (Upper)
Step 3: Remove the cartridge cover (side).
Refer to Removing Cartridge Cover(Side)
58 AP-74111 - Revision 1.4

Step 4: Remove the screws (2) that retain the side top cover R.
Left Side 2 Right Side
1 1
N° Part name
1 Side top cover R
2 Screws that retain the side top cover R
Step 5: Remove the side top cover R to the direction shown in the picture below.
Step 6: Install the cartridge cover (upper).

AP-74111 - Revision 1.4 59

4.2.7 Removing Side Top Cover L
Note
 Before removing the side top cover L, close the front cover.
Step 1: Remove the side maintenance cover L.

Refer to Removing Side Maintenance Cover L
Step 2: Remove the screws (2) that retain the side top cover L.
2 1
N° Part name
1 Side top cover L
2 Screws that retain the side top cover L
Step 3: Remove the side top cover L to the direction shown in the picture below.
60 AP-74111 - Revision 1.4

4.2.8 Removing Rear Side Cover

Step 2: Remove the side top cover L.
Refer to Removing Side Top Cover L
Step 3: Remove the screws (2) that retain the rear side cover 3. 4
1 2
3 m
N° Part name
1 Rear side cover 3
2 Screws that retain the rear side cover 3
3 Rear side cover
Step 4: Remove the rear side cover 3.
AP-74111 - Revision 1.4 61

Step 5: Remove the screws (2) on the lower part of the rear side cover.
1
N° Part name
1 Rear side cover
2 Screws that retain the rear side cover
Step 6: Remove the screws (3) on the left and right side of the rear side cover.
Rear left view 1 Rear right view
2 1 2
N° Part name
1 Rear side cover
2 Screws that retain the rear side cover
62 AP-74111 - Revision 1.4

Step 7: Remove the rear side cover.

1
4
N° Part name
1 Rear side cover
AP-74111 - Revision 1.4 63

4.2.9 Removing Cartridge Cover (Upper)
Step 1: Remove the ink cartridge (4).

Step 2: Remove the screws (4) that retain the left and right part of the cartridge cover
(upper).
2 Left Side 1 1 Right Side 2
N° Part name
1 Cartridge cover (upper)
2 Screws that retain the cartridge cover (upper)

64 AP-74111 - Revision 1.4

4.2.10 Removing Cartridge Cover (Middle)

Step 2: Remove the side top cover R
Refer to Removing Side Top Cover R
Step 3: Remove the screws (2) that retain the cartridge cover (middle).
1
4
N° Part name
1 Cartridge cover (middle)
2 Screws that retain the cartridge cover (middle)
Step 4: Remove the cartridge cover (middle).

AP-74111 - Revision 1.4 65

4.2.11 Removing Cartridge Cover(Side)

Step 4: Remove the 4 screws that fix the lower side of cartridge cover (Side).
2 Left side 1 1 Right side 2
N° Part name
1 Cartridge cover (Side)
2 Screws that retain the cartridge cover (Side)
Step 5: Remove the cartridge cover (Side).

66 AP-74111 - Revision 1.4

4.2.12 Removing Cartridge Cover (Lower)

Step 2: Remove the screws (4) that retain the cartridge cover (lower).
2 Left Side 1 1 Right Side 2
N° Part name
1 Cartridge cover (lower)
2 Screws that retain the cartridge cover (lower)
Step 3: Remove the cartridge cover (lower).

AP-74111 - Revision 1.4 67

4.2.13 Removing Switch Cover R
Step 1: Remove the side top cover R.

Step 2: Remove the screws (3) that retain the switch cover R.
Rear view Right view 1
1 2 2
N° Part name
1 Switch cover R
2 Screws that retain the switch cover R
Step 3: Remove the switch cover R.

68 AP-74111 - Revision 1.4

4.2.14 Removing Switch Cover L

Refer to Removing Side Top Cover L.
Step 2: Remove the screws (3) that retain the switch cover L.
Rear view Left view 1
2 1 2
N° Part name
1 Switch cover L
2 Screws that retain the switch cover L
Step 3: Remove the switch cover L.

AP-74111 - Revision 1.4 69

4.2.15 Removing Front Cover
Caution
 Front cover removal must be done by two or more persons.
Step 1: Remove the screws that retain the left and right side of the front cover (4
respectively).
Left view 2 2 Right view
1 1
N° Part name
1 Front cover
2 Screws that retain the front cover
Step 2: Remove the front cover.

4.2.16 Removing Rear Top Cover
Caution
 Rear top cover removal must be done by 2 or more persons.

Refer to Removing Side Top Cover R.
Refer to Removing Rear Side Cover.
Refer to Removing Side Top Cover L.
70 AP-74111 - Revision 1.4

Step 5: Remove the screws (5) on the back of the rear top cover.
Step 6: Remove the screws (5) on the upper side of the rear top cover.
3
1 4
N° Part name
1 Rear top cover
2 Screws that retain the rear top cover
3 Screws that retain the rear top cover
Step 7: Remove the rear top cover.

AP-74111 - Revision 1.4 71

4.2.17 Removing Top Cover
Caution
 Top cover removal must be done by 2 or more persons.
Step 1: Remove the front cover.

Refer to Removing Front Cover
Refer to Removing Rear Top Cover
Step 3: Remove the screws (5) that retain the back of the top cover.
Rear view 1
N° Part name
1 Top cover
2 Screws that retain the top cover
72 AP-74111 - Revision 1.4

Step 4: Remove the screws (5) that retain the front of the top cover.
Front view 1
N° Part name
1 Top cover
2 Screws that retain the top cover
Step 5: Remove the top cover.

AP-74111 - Revision 1.4 73

4.2.18 Removing Media Guide F (Upper)
Caution
 Media guide F (upper) removal must be done by 2 or more persons.
Step 1: Remove the maintenance cover.

Step 2: Remove the screws (2) that retain the media guide FR.
1 Right upper view Lower view 2
N° Part name
1 Media guide FR
2 Screws that retain the media guide FR
Step 3: Remove the media guide FR.

Step 4: Remove the screws (2) that retain the media guide FL.
1 Left upper view Lower view 2
N° Part name
1 Media guide FL
2 Screws that retain the media guide FL
Step 5: Remove the media guide FL.
74 AP-74111 - Revision 1.4

Step 6: Remove the screws (5) that retain the bottom of the media guide F (upper).
N° Part name
2 Screws that retain the media guide F (upper)
Step 7: Remove the screws (5) that retain the media guide F (upper).
2
N° Part name
2 Screws that retain the media guide F (upper)
Step 8: Lift up the media guide F (upper).
AP-74111 - Revision 1.4 75

Step 9: Remove the two connectors to the after-heater and the two connectors to the
after-thermistor that are inside the media guide F (upper).
3 2
1 4
N° Part name
2 Media guide F (lower)
3 Connector to the after-thermistor
4 Connector to the after-heater
Step 10: Remove the media guide F (upper).

76 AP-74111 - Revision 1.4

4.2.19 Removing Media Guide R (Upper)
Caution
 Media guide R (upper) removal must be done by 2 or more persons.
Step 1: Remove media.

Step 2: Remove the screws (4) that retain the media guide R (upper). 4
1
N° Part name
2 Screws that retain the media guide R (upper)
Step 3: Push backward the media guide R (upper).
AP-74111 - Revision 1.4 77

Step 4: Remove the 2 connectors to the pre-heater and the 2 connectors to the
pre-thermistor that are inside the media guide R (upper).
1
3 4
N° Part name
1 Rear top cover
3 Connector to the pre-thermistor
4 Connector to the pre-heater
Step 5: Remove the media guide R (upper).

78 AP-74111 - Revision 1.4

4.2.20 Removing Media Guide R (Lower)
Caution
 Media guide R (lower) removal must be done by 2 or more persons.
Step 1: Remove the media guide R (upper).

Refer to Removing Media Guide R (Upper) 4
Note
 If the roll media holder overlaps the screw holes, displace the roll media holder.
Step 2: Remove the screws (8) that retain the media guide R (lower).
2 1
N° Part name
5 Media guide R (lower)
6 Screws that retain the media guide R (lower)
Step 3: Remove the media guide R (lower).

AP-74111 - Revision 1.4 79

4.3 Replacing Covers

This section describes the procedures to replace the covers.
4.3.1 Replacing Panel Unit
Caution
 When replacing the panel unit, first pull out the AC cable.
Power may be ON depending on how the cable is connected, and that may
damage the board.
 When connecting and removing the FFC type cables (panel tape wires), always
pull or push the cables perpendicularly.
Pulling or pushing them slantwise may damage/short/break the terminals in the
connectors, causing a breakdown of the on-board devices.
 The cables can be connected or removed up to 5 times.
Step 1: Remove the panel cover.

Refer to Removing Panel Cover
Step 2: Remove the panel to conversion board tape wire.
Step 3: Release the four panel unit back tabs (4) from the panel stay.
2 Front view 2 1 Rear view
1 3
2 4 2 3 2
N° Part name
1 Panel unit
2 Panel unit tab
3 Panel stay
4 Panel FFC
Step 4: Remove the panel unit.

Step 5: Replace the panel unit.
80 AP-74111 - Revision 1.4

4.3.2 Replacing Maintenance Cover Sensor
Replacing Maintenance Cover Sensor R

Refer to Removing Maintenance Cover U
Step 2: Detach the connector for the maintenance cover sensor assembly.
Step 3: Remove the screws (2) that retain the maintenance cover sensor assembly. 4
2
1 3
N° Part name
1 Maintenance cover sensor assembly
2 Screws that retain the maintenance cover sensor assembly
3 Connector for the maintenance cover sensor assembly
Step 4: Remove the maintenance cover sensor assembly.

Step 5: Replace the maintenance cover sensor assembly.
Note
 The maintenance cover sensor looks like the following.
Opened Closed
AP-74111 - Revision 1.4 81

Replacing Maintenance Cover Sensor L
The procedure to replace the maintenance cover sensor L is the same for the maintenance
cover sensor R.
4.3.3 Replacing Front Cover Sensor
R Side

Refer to Removing Switch Cover R
Step 3: Detach the connector to the front cover R sensor assembly from Main Board.
Step 4: Remove the screws (2pieces) that retain the front cover R sensor assembly.
Outside Inside
2
3
1
N° Part name
1 Front cover R sensor assembly
2 Screws that retain the front cover R sensor assembly
3 Nut plate
Step 5: Remove the front cover R sensor assembly.

Step 6: Replace the front cover R sensor assembly.
82 AP-74111 - Revision 1.4

Step 8: When the front cover was closed, make sure that the panel shows “close” with
self-diagnosis mode.
Note
 The cover sensor looks like the following.
Opened Closed
L Side

Refer to Removing Switch Cover L
Step 3: Detach the connector to the front cover L sensor assembly from main Board.
Step 4: Remove the screws (2) that retain the front cover L sensor assembly.
Outside Inside
2
1 3
N° Part name
1 Cover sensor (C) assembly_L
2 Screws that retain the front cover L sensor assembly
3 Nut plate
Step 5: Remove the front cover L sensor assembly.

AP-74111 - Revision 1.4 83

Step 7: When the front cover was closed, make sure that the panel shows “close” with
self-diagnosis mode.
Note
 The cover sensor looks like the following.
Opened Closed
4.3.4 Replacing Front Cover Gear, Damper Gear
R Side

Refer to Removing Switch Cover R
Step 2: Remove the screw (1) that retains the switch plate R.
2 1
N° Part name
1 Switch plate R
2 Screw that retains the switch plate R.
3 Front cover axis
Step 3: Remove the switch plate.
84 AP-74111 - Revision 1.4

Step 4: Remove the screws (3) that retain the damper cover R.
2
2 1
N° Part name
1 Damper cover R
2 Screws that retain the damper cover R
Step 5: Remove the damper cover R.

Step 6: Remove the front cover gear.
1
N° Part name
1 Front cover gear
2 Front cover axis
3 Damper gear
Step 7: Replace the front cover gear.

Step 8: Remove the damper gear.
Step 9: Replace the damper gear.
AP-74111 - Revision 1.4 85

L Side

Refer to Removing Switch Cover L
Step 2: Remove the screw (1) that retains the switch plate L.
1 2
N° Part name
1 Switch plate L
2 Screw that retains the switch plate L
3 Front cover axis
Step 3: Remove the switch plate.

Step 4: Remove the screws (3) that retain the damper cover L.
2
1 2
N° Part name
1 Damper cover L
2 Screws that retain the damper cover L
Step 5: Remove the damper cover L.
86 AP-74111 - Revision 1.4

Step 6: Remove the front cover gear.

1
2
4
N° Part name
1 Front cover gear
2 Front cover axis
3 Damper gear
Step 7: Replace the front cover gear.

Step 8: Remove the damper gear.
Step 9: Replace the damper gear.
AP-74111 - Revision 1.4 87

4.4 Replacing Board Base (X Rail Section)

This section describes the procedure to replace the power supply or the board in the X rail
section.
Boards overview
Inside view of media guide F Inside view of board box 64
1 2 3 4
N° Part name
1 HEATER RELAY board assembly
2 HEATER-CONT board assembly
3 Power board assembly
4 Main board assembly
88 AP-74111 - Revision 1.4

4.4.1 Opening Board Box 64
Step 1: Remove the AC inlet cables (2), and the other cables (LAN, USB).
Step 2: Remove the screws (5) that retain the board box 64.
Caution
 If you remove the screws that retain the board box 64, the box opens
downwards because of it's weight. Remove the last screw while holding the
box by hand, or you may be injured. 4
2 Left view Right view 2
1 1
Rear view
2
N° Part name
1 Board box 64
2 Screws that retain the board box 64
Step 3: Open the board box 64 downwards.

Step 4: To close the unit, reverse the opening procedure.
AP-74111 - Revision 1.4 89

4.4.2 Replacing Power Board Assembly
Caution
 If the power board assembly needs to be removed, remove the power cable and
wait for 5 minutes or more before dismount the assembly; this will discharge
the residual electrical charge of the electrolytic capacitor.
Touching the board before the capacitor discharges may cause electric shock.

Refer to Removing Media Guide F (Upper)
Step 2: Remove the connectors.
Step 3: Remove the screws (9) that retain power board assembly.
2
N° Part name
1 Power board assembly
2 Screws that retain the power board assembly
Step 4: Remove the power board assembly.

Step 5: Replace the power board assembly.
90 AP-74111 - Revision 1.4

4.4.3 Replacing HEATER CONT Board
Caution
 Before you replace a board assembly, remove the AC inlet cable.
You may suffer electric shock due to standby current.
 When you handle a circuit board, do not touch any elements on it with bare
hands.
Doing so may cause electrostatic discharge and damage the elements.
4
 When connecting and removing the FFC type cables to/from the MAIN board
assembly connectors, always pull or push the cables perpendicularly.
connectors, causing a breakdown of the on-board elements.

Step 2: Detach the connectors listed below from the HEATER CONT board.
N° Connector # of Color Connect to Remark

N° Pins
1 J1 8 Black Config CN Not in use
2 J2 - - - No preparation
6 J6 40 Black HEATER RELAY A (J3) FFC
8 J8 4 White DC IN [HEATER JUNCTION (J2)] -
Communication [HEATER
9 J9 8 Gray LAN
JUNCTION (J3)]
10 J10 8 Gray LVS [MAIN (143)] LAN
11 J11 5 White Debug Not in use
AP-74111 - Revision 1.4 91


N° Pins
19 J19 8 White DC IN -> [MAIN J46] -
22 J22 2 White AC-IN -> Terminal Stand -
EXT-AC-OUT -> HEATER RELAY
23 J23 2 White -
A (J1)
Step 3: Remove the screws (4) that retain the HEATER CONT board.
2 2
N° Part name
1 HEATER CONT board
2 Screws that retain the HEATER CONT board.
Step 4: Replace the HEATER CONT board.

Step 6: Install the latest firmware to the MAIN board.
Refer to Updating Main Firmware
Step 7: Install the latest firmware to the HEATER_CONT board.
Refer to Updating the Firmware of Heater Controller
92 AP-74111 - Revision 1.4

4.4.4 Replacing HEATER RELAY Board
Caution
 Before you replace a board assembly, remove the AC inlet cable to avoid
electric shocks.
 When you handle a circuit board, do not touch any parts on it with bare hands.

When connecting and removing the FFC type cables to/from the MAIN board
4

Step 2: Detach the connectors listed below from the heater relay board
N° Pins
1 J1 2 White EX-AC-OUT [HEATER CONT (J23)] -
2 J2 4 White Plt_Heat 1 -
3 J3 40 Black HEATER CONT (J6) FFC
4 J4 2 White - Not in use
5 J5 4 White Plt_Heat 2 -
6 J6 2 White Inlet (Large) -
7 J7 2 White Pre_Heat -
8 J8 2 White Pre_Heat -
9 J9 4 White Aft_Heat -
10 J10 2 Blue Cooling FAN -
11 J11 4 White Vacum FAN (#1, #2) -
12 J12 2 White Platen_Thrm 1 -
13 J13 2 Black Platen_Thrm 2 -
14 J14 4 Black Vacum FAN (#3, #4) -
15 J15 2 Red Pre_Thrm 1 -
16 J16 2 Yellow Pre_Thrm 2 -
17 J17 3 White Aft_Thrm 1 -
18 J18 3 Black Aft_Thrm 2 -
19 J19 3 Red Reserve 1 Thrm -
20 J20 3 Yellow Reserve 2 Thrm -
AP-74111 - Revision 1.4 93

Step 3: Remove the screws (6) that retain the heater relay board.
2
N° Part name
1 Heater relay board
2 Screws that retain the heater relay board
Step 4: Remove the heater relay board.

Step 5: Replace the heater relay board.
94 AP-74111 - Revision 1.4

4.4.5 Replacing Cooling Fan (24V) Assembly (for Main Board)
Step 1: Open the board box 64.

Refer to Opening Board Box 64
Step 2: Detach the connector to the cooling fan (24V) assembly.
Step 3: Remove the screws (2) that retain the cooling fan (24V) assembly.
1 Back of the leg holder base
4
3 2
N° Part name
1 Cooling fan (24V) assembly
2 Screws that retain the cooling fan (24V) assembly
3 Connector to the cooling fan (24V) assembly
Step 4: Replace the cooling fan (24V) assembly.

AP-74111 - Revision 1.4 95

4.4.6 Replacing Cooling Fan (24V) Assembly (in Media Guide F)

Step 2: Remove the connector to the cooling fan (24V) assembly.
2 Inside view of media guide F 1
3 4
N° Part name
2 Cooling fan mounting plate
3 Screws that retain the cooling fan mounting plate
4 Connector to the cooling fan (24V) assembly
Step 4: Remove the cooling fan mounting plate.
96 AP-74111 - Revision 1.4

1 Inside view of media guide F
N° Part name
2 Screws that retain the cooling fan (24V) assembly
Step 6: Remove the cooling fan (24V) assembly.

4.4.7 Replacing MAIN Board
Caution
hands.
Note
 Be sure to back up the parameters before replacing the MAIN board assembly.
Refer to Parameter Backup
As from serial number FO6E000351 the ValueJet 1614 series printers have a new set of
hardware; including a new type of mainboard, CR board and flatcable.
Printers manufactured before FO6E000351 do not need to be updated with this new
hardware.
Existing spare part numbers remain valid for these units.
AP-74111 - Revision 1.4 97

These new type of mainboards will only work with the new type of CR board and vice versa.
The new flatcables, which should be used to connect the new mainboard with the CR board
are now manufactured without conductive tape.
We strongly advice to use the latest firmware (FW Version 1.02) in combination with these
new boards.
Description Part number list price

Mainboard DG-41870 1059 €
CR board DG-41872 68 €
Flatcable
DG-41871 49 €
(To connect mainboard and CR board)
Replacing SODIMM

N° Part name
1 SODIMM
Step 2: Open the lock to both sides.

Step 3: Remove the SODIMM.
Step 4: Replace the SODIMM.
Note
 Push in the SODIMM following the notches until click sound occurs.
98 AP-74111 - Revision 1.4

Replacing Main Board Assembly
Note
 MAIN Board Assy has two types, but they do not have any compatibility with
each other. When replacing the MAIN Board Assy, check its Rev. label to install
the same type of MAIN Board Assy as the previous one.
 The MAIN Board has two types of Rev. label and their first three letters are shown
below.
4
 Maintenance part N° is DG-41870 and Maintenance part name is MAIN
Board Assy: First three letters are FPT.
 Maintenance part N° is DG-41870 and Maintenance part name is CR Board
Assy-2: First three letters are FQY.
 The Rev. label is on the heat sink in the MAIN Board Assy.
J14 J16 J12 J32 J5 J201

K_INK M_INK PF_ENC FAN1 PANEL TO CR
Rev. label
J15 J17 J42 J202
C_INK Y_INK P_REAR_SENS TO CR F6
J24 J33
J40
COVER_L
J36
FAN3 ON
J203
TO CR
F7 )4<
CR_ORG WEST_SENS R 2
1
J27 J35 SW3
WIPE_ORG WEST_SENS L
J36 128MB SODIMM
LEVER_SENS
PF_MOTER
DEBUG PORT
J20
J38
J41
COVER_R
SW4
CR_MOTER
J21
SERIAL REV
J3
J43
PUMP1
PUMP2
SDDIM CONNECTOR
J22
J23
R361 R371 R373

R385 BLOWER
BLOWER BLOWER
J25
J26
FAN1
FAN2
BLOWER
J28
J29
FAN4
FAN3
+
SW4
POWER SUPPLY
TO CONT_PS
RJ-45
TO MISC
J46
J45
USB IF
J1
BT1
J6
J13
MAIN BOARD DE-22158
 When replacing the MAIN Board Assy and CR Board Assy at a time, check the
Rev. label on the CR Board, and then replace both boards with the combination
as shown below.
 When the first alphabetic letters on the Rev.label for the MAIN Board Assy are
FPT, install the CR Board Assy which does not have three alphabetic letters as the
first letters.
 When the first alphabetic letters on the Rev.label for the MAIN Board Assy are
FQY, install the CR Board Assy which has three alphabetic letters ORE as the first
letters.
 For more details, refer to the section shown below.
Refer to Replacing CR Board Assembly
Step 1: Remove the board box 64.

AP-74111 - Revision 1.4 99

Step 2: Remove the SODIMM.

Refer to Replacing SODIMM
Step 3: Detach the connectors listed below from the MAIN board assembly.
Caution
connectors, causing a breakdown of the on-board devices.
N° Connector # of Colour Connect to Remark

N° Pins
1 J1 14 White P/S (CON301) -
2 J2 6 Black Config_CN Not in use
3 J3 144 Black SODIMM -
4 J4 6 Black CLKDV_JTAG Not in use
5 J5 28 Black PANEL_UNIT FFC
6 J6 8 Silver LAN -
9 J9 30 Black CR Board (J206) FFC
12 J12 4 White PF_ENC -
13 J13 - - USB Not in use
14 J14 8 Black Maint.Cover_Sensor -
15 J15 8 Blue Ink_Sensor_C Not in use
16 J16 8 Red Ink_Sensor_M Not in use
17 J17 8 Yellow Ink_Sensor_Y Not in use
18 J18 8 white REV_INK1 Not in use
20 J20 2 White PF_MT -
21 J21 3 White CR_MT -
22 J22 4 White PUMP_MT -
100 AP-74111 - Revision 1.4


N° Pins
24 J24 3 White CR_ORG -
25 J25 2 White Vacum_FAN_1 -
26 J26 2 White Vacum_FAN_1 -
27 J27 3 Black W_ORG -
28 J28 2 Red Vacum_FAN_3 - 4
29 J29 2 Yellow Vacum_FAN_4 -
30 J30 3 Blue LEVER_up -
32 J32 2 White COOLING_FAN_1 Not in use
33 J33 3 Red Waste_Fluid_Full_Sensor -
34 J34 2 White COOLING_FAN_2 Not in use
36 J36 2 Red COOLING_FAN_3 -
38 J38 3 Yellow F_Cover_R_Sensor -
40 J40 4 Blue F_Cover_L_Sensor -
41 J41 5 Black Debug CN Not in use
42 J42 4 Black P_REAR_R -
43 J43 8 Silver LDVS -> [HEATER CONT (J10)] LAN
44 J44 8 Black CPLD -
45 J45 - - - No prepatation
46 J46 4 White HEATER CONT (J19) -
AP-74111 - Revision 1.4 101

Step 4: Remove the screws (6) that retain the MAIN board assembly.
2
N° Part name
2 Screws that retain the MAIN board assembly
Step 5: Remove the MAIN board assembly.

Step 6: Replace the MAIN board assembly.
Step 8: Install the Main firmware.
Refer to Updating Main Firmware
Step 9: Install the parameters backup.
Refer to Parameter Backup
102 AP-74111 - Revision 1.4

4.4.8 Replacing Fuse
Caution
 Remove the AC inlet cable to replace the fuse before performing work.
 When replacing fuses, install the fuse which conforms to the specifications
(250V-15A, φ10.31 mm x 38.1 mm).
 The double pole/neutral line has a fuse.
4
Step 2: Replace the blown fuses.
 There are two fuses for one power supply (four fuses in total).
Caution
 Don’t touch the cap of a fuse with bare hands.
3 4
1 2
N° Part name
1 Fuse (main side)
2 Fuse (heater side)
3 Fuse holder (main side)
4 Fuse holder (heater side)
AP-74111 - Revision 1.4 103

Note
 The fuses are called F1, F2, F3, F4 from the left. Each functions as follows.
N° Function
F1 MAIN LIVE
F2 MAIN NEUTRAL
F3 HEATER LIVE
F4 HEATER NEUTRAL
4.4.9 Replacing Inlet Assembly
Caution
 Remove the AC inlet cable to replace the fuse before replacing the AC inlet.
Replacing AC Inlet Small (Main Side)

Step 2: Remove the connectors (3).
N° Part name
1 AC inlet small
2 Connector
104 AP-74111 - Revision 1.4

Step 3: Remove the screws (2) that retain the AC inlet small.
1
N° Part name
1 AC inlet small
2 Screws that retain the AC inlet small
Step 4: Remove the AC inlet small from outside.

Step 5: Replace the AC inlet small.
AP-74111 - Revision 1.4 105

Replacing AC Inlet Large (Heater Side)

Step 2: Remove the connectors (3).
N° Part name
1 AC inlet large
2 Connector
Step 3: Remove the screws (2) that retain the AC inlet large.
1
N° Part name
1 AC inlet large
2 Screws that retain the AC inlet large
Step 4: Remove the AC inlet large from inside.

Step 5: Replace the AC inlet large.
106 AP-74111 - Revision 1.4

4.5 Replacing Board Base Section (Y Rail Section)

This section describes the procedure to replace the boards in the Y rail section.
4.5.1 Replacing Heater Junction Board Assembly
Caution
4
hands.
Step 1: Move the carriage to the opposite side of the origin.

Refer to Releasing Head Lock
Step 4: Detach the connector to the heater junction board assembly.

N° Pins
1 J1 - - Config CN Not in use
2 J2 4 White DC IN -> HEATER CONT (J8) -
Communication -> HEATER CONT
3 J3 - LAN
(J9)
4 J4 10 - - -
5 J5 10 White INK SLOT1 -
9 J9 10 White INK SLOT5 Not in use
10 J10 10 White INK SLOT6 Not in use
11 J11 8 White SubTank1 -
AP-74111 - Revision 1.4 107


N° Pins
15 J15 8 White SubTank5 Not in use
16 J16 8 White SubTank6 Not in use
Step 5: Remove the screws (4) that retain the heater junction board assembly.
Rear view 2 Enlarged view 3
N° Part name
1 Heater junction board assembly
2 Screws that retain the heater junction board assembly
3 Y rail assembly
Note
 Use a ratchet to remove the screws that retain the heater junction board
assembly.
Step 6: Replace the heater junction board assembly.

108 AP-74111 - Revision 1.4

4.6 Replacing X Rail Section

This section describes the procedure to replace the X rail section.
4.6.1 Replacing PF Speed Reduction Belt
Caution 4
 Do not touch the motor right after starting-up the printer. Otherwise, you may
be burned.
Step 1: Open the maintenance cover L.

Refer to Removing Rear Side Cover
Step 4: Loosen the screws (2) that retain the PF motor assembly.
1 4
N° Part name
1 PF motor assembly
2 Screws that retain the PF motor assembly
3 PF speed reduction belt
4 PF drive mounting plate
Step 5: Confirm that the PF speed reduction belt has been loosened.
AP-74111 - Revision 1.4 109

Step 6: Remove the screws (2) that fix the PF speed reduction pulley to PF connection
shaft.
5 4
2 3 5
N° Part name
1 PF_ENC scale
2 ENC scale holder
3 PF speed reduction pulley
Screws that fix the PF speed reduction pulley to PF connection
4
shaft
5 Screws that fix the PF speed reduction pulley to PF_ENC scale
Step 7: Remove the screws (4) that fix the PF speed reduction pulley to PF_ENC scale.
Step 8: Remove the ENC scale holder.
Note
 When removing parts surrounding the PF_ENC scale, do not deform the
PF_ENC scale. Doing so may affect the print result.
Step 9: Detach the PF_ENC scale.

Step 10: Detach the PF speed reduction belt.
Step 11: Replace the PF speed reduction belt.
Step 12: Retain the PF motor assembly by pushing the motor backward.
Note
 When installing the PF motor assembly, ensure that the PF speed reduction
belt is evenly guided along the centre part of the PF motor assembly pulley by
moving the speed reduction pulley by hand.
Step 13: Confirm that the PF speed reduction belt is not loose.
Step 15: Follow the steps in PF Encoder Assembly Position Adjustment for adjustment.
110 AP-74111 - Revision 1.4

4.6.2 Replacing PF Motor Assembly
Caution
 Do not touch the motor right after starting-up the printer. Otherwise, you may
be burned.
Step 1: Initialize the PF motor assembly counter.

4
Refer to Parameter Initialization Menu
Refer to Removing Rear Side Cover
Step 5: Detach the PF speed reduction belt.
Refer to Replacing PF Speed Reduction Belt
Step 6: Detach the PF motor assembly cable from the motor connector.
1
3 2
N° Part name
1 PF motor assembly
2 PF motor assembly connector
3 PF motor assembly cable assembly
AP-74111 - Revision 1.4 111

Step 7: Remove the screws (2) that retain the PF motor assembly.
1 4
N° Part name
1 PF motor assembly
2 Screws that retain the PF motor assembly
3 PF speed reduction belt
4 PF drive mounting plate
Step 8: Remove the PF motor assembly.

Step 9: Replace the PF motor assembly.
Step 10: Lightly tighten the screws (2) that retain the PF motor assembly.
Step 11: Install the PF speed reduction belt.
Note
 When installing the PF motor assembly, ensure that the PF speed reduction
belt is evenly guided along the centre part of the PF motor assembly pulley by
moving the speed reduction pulley by hand.
Step 12: Retain the PF motor assembly by pushing the assembly backward.
Step 13: Confirm that the PF speed reduction belt is not loose.
112 AP-74111 - Revision 1.4

4.6.3 Replacing PF Encoder Assembly

Step 2: Remove the screws (2) that retain the PF encoder assembly.
2
1 4
N° Part name
1 PF encoder
2 Screws that retain the PF encoder
3 ENC scale holder
4 PF-ENC scale
Step 3: Remove the PF encoder assembly.

Step 4: Replace the PF encoder assembly.
Note
 When reassembling the PF_ENC assembly and the PF encoder bracket, make
sure the embossed notch is in the correct position.
Step 5: Adjust the PF_ENC scale.

Refer to PF Encoder Assembly Position Adjustment
AP-74111 - Revision 1.4 113

4.6.4 Replacing PF_ENC Scale, PF Speed Reduction Pulley
Note
 While replacing the PF scale assembly, make sure not to deform the PF scale. If
deformed, image quality may be affected.

Step 2: Loosen the PF speed reduction belt.
Step 3: Remove the screws (2) that retain the PF speed reduction pulley to the PF
connection axis.
5 4
2 3 5
N° Part name
1 PF_ENC scale
2 ENC scale holder
3 PF speed reduction pulley
4 Screws that retain the PF speed reduction pulley to the PF connection axis
5 Screws that retain the PF speed reduction pulley to the PF_ENC scale
Step 4: Remove the screws (4) that retain the PF speed reduction pulley to the PF_ENC
scale.
Step 5: Remove the ENC scale holder.
Step 6: Remove the PF_ENC scale.
Step 7: Remove the PF speed reduction belt.
Step 8: Remove the PF speed reduction pulley.
Step 9: Replace the PF speed reduction pulley.
Step 10: Replace the PF_ENC scale.
Step 11: Adjust the PF_ENC scale.
Refer to PF Encoder Assembly Position Adjustment
114 AP-74111 - Revision 1.4

4.6.5 Replacing P_REAR Sensor Assembly
Note
 The P_REAR sensor assembly is located near the centre of the X rail (joint part
of the grid roller).

Refer to Removing Media Guide R (Lower)
4
Step 3: Detach the connector (MAIN J42) to the P_REAR_R sensor assembly.
Note
 The P_REAR sensor assembly cable is a stranded wire of red, black, blue, and
orange.
Step 4: Remove the screws (2) that retain the P_REAR_R sensor assembly.
Rear view 1 Enlarged view
3 2
N° Part name
1 P_REAR_R sensor assembly
2 Screws that retain the P_REAR_R sensor assembly
3 R sensor bracket
Step 5: Remove the P_REAR_R sensor assembly.

Step 6: Replace the P_REAR_R sensor assembly.
AP-74111 - Revision 1.4 115

4.6.6 Replacing Lever Up Sensor

Step 1: Open the maintenance cover.
Step 3: Remove the lever up sensor cable assembly.
Step 4: Remove the lever up sensor assembly.
Rear view Enlarged view
3 1
N° Part name
1 Lever up sensor cable assembly
2 Lever up sensor assembly
3 Cover stay RR
Step 5: Replace the lever up sensor assembly.

Step 6: Apply adhesive material.
N° Part name
1 Lever up sensor assembly
2 Adhesive material application surface
116 AP-74111 - Revision 1.4

4.6.7 Replacing Heater, Thermistor
Note
 Set the heater to the original position without bending. The surface
temperature of the platen changes and printing quality becomes poor if the
heater assembly position is set insufficiently.
4
Replacing the Pre-heater, Pre-thermistor
Note
 Set the heater to the original position without bending. The surface
temperature of the platen changes and printing quality becomes poor if the
heater assembly position is set insufficiently.
Pre-heater overview.
2
N° Part name
1 Pre-heater 1
2 Pre-heater 2
Step 1: Lift up the media guide R (upper).

Refer to Removing Media Guide R (Upper)
AP-74111 - Revision 1.4 117

Step 2: Detach the connectors (2) to the pre-heater and the connectors (2) to the
pre-thermistor.
1 2
N° Part name
1 Connectors to the pre-heater thermistor
2 Connectors to the pre-heater
Step 3: Remove the pre-heater heat insulator from the part where the heater or the
thermistor is broken.
Note
 The pre-heater heat insulator and the pre-heater are affixed using double-faced
tape.
Step 4: Mark the location of the broken pre-heater.
Note
 Affix the pre-heater at the correct position. If not, the temperature of the media
guide R cannot be appropriate and image quality may be affected.
118 AP-74111 - Revision 1.4

Step 5: Remove the broken pre-heater.

3 Rear view of media guide R
4
1 2
N° Part name
2 Pre-heater
3 Pre-heater heat insulator
Step 6: Replace the pre-heater.

Step 7: Remove the thermistor film.
Step 8: Remove the pre-thermistor.
Note
 The pre-thermistor is fixed using thermistor film.
4 Rear view of media guide R (Upper) 3
1 2
N° Part name
2 Pre-thermistor
3 Pre-heater heat insulator
4 Thermistor film
AP-74111 - Revision 1.4 119

Step 9: Remove the pre-thermistor.

Step 10: Replace the pre-thermistor.
Replacing Platen Heater, Platen Thermistor
Platen heater overview.

2
N° Part name
1 Platen heater 1
2 Platen heater 2
Step 1: Open the front cover.

Step 2: Remove the screws (16) that retain the platen.
1 2
N° Part name
1 Platen
2 Screws that retain the platen
120 AP-74111 - Revision 1.4

Step 3: Lift up the platen.

Step 4: Remove the connectors (2) to the platen heater and the connectors (2) to the platen
thermistor.
1 Rear view of platen 4
N° Part name
1 Heat insulator platen
2 Connectors to the platen heater
3 Connectors to the platen thermistor
4 Heat insulator thermistor
Step 5: Remove the heat insulator heater or the heat insulator thermistor from the part
where the heater or the thermistor is broken.
Note
 The heat insulator platen, the heat insulator thermistor and the platen
heater are affixed using double-faced tape.
Step 6: Mark the location of the broken platen heater.
Note
 Affix the platen heater at the correct position. If not, the temperature of the
platen cannot be appropriate and image quality may be affected.
Step 7: Remove the broken platen heater.

Step 8: Replace the platen heater.
Step 9: Remove the screw (1) that retains the platen thermistor holder.
Step 10: Detach the platen thermistor holder.
Step 11: Replace the platen thermistor.
AP-74111 - Revision 1.4 121

Replacing After-Heater, After-Thermistor
After-heater overview.
2
N° Part name
1 After-heater 1
2 After-heater 2
Step 1: Lift up the media guide F (upper).

Step 2: Detach the connectors (2) to the after-heater and the connectors (2) to the
after-thermistor inside the media guide F (upper).
3 Rear view of media guide F 1
N° Part name
1 After-heater heat insulator
2 Connectors to the after-thermistor
3 Connectors to the after-heater
122 AP-74111 - Revision 1.4


Step 4: Remove the after-heater heat insulator from the part where the heater or the
thermistor is broken.
Note
 The after-heater heat insulator and the after-heater are affixed using
double-faced tape.
Step 5: Mark the part where the after-heater is broken. 4

Note
 Affix the after-heater at the correct position. If not, the temperature of the media
guide F (upper) cannot be appropriate and image quality may be affected.
Step 6: Remove the broken after-heater.

1 Rear view of media guide F
2 3
N° Part name
2 After-heater
Step 7: Replace the after-heater.
AP-74111 - Revision 1.4 123

Step 8: Remove the after-thermistor.

Rear view of media guide F 3
1 2
N° Part name
2 After-heater thermistor
Step 9: Remove the after-thermistor.

Step 10: Replace the after-thermistor.
4.6.8 Replacing Suction Fan
Suction fan overview.

4
N° Part name
1 Suction fan 1
2 Suction fan 2
3 Suction fan 3
4 Suction fan 4
Step 1: Remove the platen.
124 AP-74111 - Revision 1.4

Refer to Replacing Platen Heater, Platen Thermistor

Step 2: Remove the connector to the suction fan.
Step 3: Remove the screws (2) that retain the suction fan.
1
2 3
N° Part name
1 Suction fan
2 Screws that retain the suction fan
3 Connector to the suction fan
Step 4: Remove the suction fan.

Step 5: Replace the suction fan.
AP-74111 - Revision 1.4 125

4.6.9 Replacing Platen Non-Reflective Tape

Step 2: Strip the platen non-reflective tape.
1
N° Part name
1 Platen
2 Platen non-reflective tape
Note
 Once stripping the platen non-reflective tape, it must not be reused.
Step 3: Replace the platen non-reflective tape.
126 AP-74111 - Revision 1.4

4.6.10 Replacing Media Holder

Step 3: Remove the screws (2) that retain the media holder stopper.
2
4
N° Part name
1 Media holder stopper
2 Screws that retain the media holder stopper
Step 4: Remove the media holder stopper.

Step 5: Pull out the media holder from the left side (the opposite side of the origin).
1
N° Part name
1 Media holder
2 Platen
Step 6: Replace the media holder.

AP-74111 - Revision 1.4 127

4.6.11 Replacing Flushing Tray
Flushing tray overview.

2 1
N° Part name
1 Flushing tray R
2 Flushing tray L
Caution
 When replacing the flushing tray, wear rubber gloves
Replacing Flushing Tray R

Step 3: Lift up the flushing frame hook.
1
2 3
N° Part name
1 Flushing tray
2 Flushing frame
3 Flushing frame hook
Step 4: Remove the flushing frame.
128 AP-74111 - Revision 1.4

Step 5: Detach the flushing tray by pushing it from behind the flushing frame.
2
4
1
N° Part name
1 Flushing tray
2 Flushing frame
Step 6: Replace the flushing tray.

Replacing Flushing Tray L

Step 2: Lift up the flushing frame hook.
1
2 3
N° Part name
1 Flushing tray
2 Flushing frame
3 Flushing frame hook
Step 3: Remove the flushing frame.

Step 4: Detach the flushing tray by pushing it from behind the flushing frame.
Step 5: Replace the flushing tray.
AP-74111 - Revision 1.4 129

4.7 Replacing Y Rail Section

This section describes the procedure to replace the Y rail section.
4.7.1 Replacing Steel Belt
Caution
 When replacing the steel belt, be careful not to cut your hand with the steel
belt.
 Steel belt replacement must be done by 2 or more persons.
Note
 Pay close attention in handling the steel belt. Bending or dust on the steel belt
may cause steel belt breakage.

Step 6: Move the carriage to the left side (opposite side of the origin).
130 AP-74111 - Revision 1.4

Step 7: Loosen the steel belt adjustment screws (2).

1 5
3 2
4
4 5
N° Part name
1 CR driven pulley
2 Steel belt adjustment screws
3 Steel belt
4 Return pulley mounting plate
5 Screw cap
Step 8: Remove the screws (2) that retain the belt.

3 Left view 1 1 Right view 3
2 2
N° Part name
1 Head cover
2 Steel belt
3 Screws that retain the belt
Step 9: Pull off the steel belt.

Step 10: Remove the CR driven pulley assembly.
Step 11: Insert the measure through the hole of the Y drive base to the inside of Y rail.
AP-74111 - Revision 1.4 131

Step 12: Pull out the measure from the hole of the return pulley mounting plate.
View of origin side 2 3 View of opposite side to origin
1 1
N° Part name
1 Measure
2 Y drive base
Step 13: Affix the steel belt to the tip of the measure using tape.
3
2 1
N° Part name
1 Measure
2 Steel belt
3 Tape
Step 14: Wind up the measure with the steel belt affixed to it.
Step 15: Detach the steel belt from the measure after the tip of the measure comes out from
the hole of the Y drive base.
Step 16: Affix one side of the steel belt to the right side of the carriage.
Step 17: Install the CR driven pulley assembly.
132 AP-74111 - Revision 1.4

Step 18: Affix the other side of the steel belt to the left side of the carriage.
Step 19: Adjust the steel belt tension.
Refer to Steel Belt Tension Adjustment
4.7.2 Replacing CR Motor Assembly

4
Caution
 Do not touch the motor after continuous operation. You may get burned by the
motor heated up.

Step 3: Remove the CR motor cable assembly.
Note
 Connect the white cable of the CR motor cable assembly to the side of the CR
motor assembly where the red label is fixed.
The polarity of the CR motor assembly and CR motor cable assembly is as
follows.
 Red label: +
 White cable: +
 Black cable: -
AP-74111 - Revision 1.4 133

Step 4: Loosen the hexagon socket screws (4) that retain the CR motor assembly.
1 3
2 2
N° Part name
1 CR motor assembly
2 CR motor spacer
3 Hexagon socket screws
4 CR motor cable assembly
Step 5: Confirm that the CR speed reduction belt is loose.

3
2 4
N° Part name
1 CR motor assembly
2 CR speed reduction belt
3 Y drive base
4 CR drive pulley
Step 6: Remove the CR speed reduction belt.
134 AP-74111 - Revision 1.4

Step 7: Remove the hexagon socket screws (4) that retain the CR motor assembly.
Step 8: Remove the CR motor assembly.
Step 9: Replace the CR motor assembly.
Note
 When installing the CR motor assembly, ensure that the steel belt is evenly
guided along the centre part of the CR motor assembly pulley by moving the
carriage by hand.
Step 10: Adjust the CR speed reduction belt tension.

4
Refer to CR Speed Reduction Belt Tension Adjustment
4.7.3 Replacing CR Drive Pulley Assembly

Step 3: Loosen the hexagon socket screws (4) that retain the CR motor assembly to loosen
the CR speed reduction belt.
1 3
2 2
N° Part name
1 CR motor assembly
2 Hexagon socket screws
3 CR motor cable assembly
AP-74111 - Revision 1.4 135

Step 4: Confirm that the CR speed reduction belt is loose.

3
2 4
N° Part name
1 CR motor assembly
2 CR speed reduction belt
3 Y drive base
4 CR drive pulley
Step 5: Loosen the steel belt adjustment screws (2).

1 5
3 2
4 5
z
N° Part name
1 CR driven pulley
2 Steel belt adjustment screws
3 Steel belt
5 Screw cap
Step 6: Remove the CR drive pulley.

Step 7: Remove the CR speed reduction belt.
136 AP-74111 - Revision 1.4

Step 8: Replace the CR drive pulley assembly.
Note
 The parts accompanied when removing the CR drive pulley are collectively
called CR drive pulley assembly.
 When replacing the CR speed reduction belt, reuse the CR drive pulley
assembly that is currently used.

Step 10: Adjust the CR speed reduction belt tension.
4
Refer to CR Speed Reduction Belt Tension Adjustment
4.7.4 Replacing T Fence

Step 6: Move the carriage to the left side (opposite side of the origin)
Releasing Head Lock
Step 7: Detach the T fence spring from the T fence spring hook in the left side of the Y rail
(opposite side of the origin).
AP-74111 - Revision 1.4 137

Step 8: Detach the T fence from the T fence spring.

1
2 3
N° Part name
1 T fence spring
2 T fence spring hook
3 T fence
Step 9: Detach the T fence from the T fence guide plate (3).
1
N° Part name
1 T fence guide plate
2 T fence
138 AP-74111 - Revision 1.4

Step 10: Detach the T fence from the hook of the T fence clamping plate.
1
N° Part name
1 T fence clamping plate
2 T fence
Step 11: Replace the T fence.
Note
 When assembling the T fence, make sure to follow the instructions below.
 If the T fence is coated with protective film, remove the film and attach the T fence
correctly.
 Correctly attach the T fence to the hook on the T fence bracket referring to the
figure for step 8.
 Allow a margin between the T fence and the hook of the clamping plate.
 When retaining the clamping plate with screws, allow a margin so that the T fence
can slightly move.
 Referring to the following figures, insert the T fence in the T fence guide plate
and CR_ENC assembly.
2 1 4 3
AP-74111 - Revision 1.4 139

N° Part name
1 T fence guide plate
2 T fence
3 CR_ENC assembly
4 Carriage
4.7.5 Replacing CR Origin Sensor

Step 3: Move the carriage to the left side (opposite side of the origin)
Step 4: Remove the CR_ORG cable assembly.
Step 5: Remove the CR origin sensor.
3
1 2
N° Part name
1 CR origin sensor
2 CR_ORG cable assembly
3 Y rail
Step 6: Replace the CR origin sensor.
140 AP-74111 - Revision 1.4

4
1
N° Part name
1 Adhesive material application surface
4.7.6 Replacing CR Driven Pulley
Note
 After installing the CR driven pulley, always ensure that the steel belt is evenly
guided along the centre part of the CR motor assembly pulley by moving the
carriage left and right by hand.

Step 3: Remove the steel belt adjustment screws (2).
1 5
3 2
4 5
AP-74111 - Revision 1.4 141

N° Part name
1 CR driven pulley
2 Adjustment screws
3 Steel belt
5 Screw cap
Step 4: Confirm that the steel belt is loose.

Step 5: Remove the CR driven pulley.
Step 6: Remove the screw caps (2).
Step 7: Replace the CR driven pulley assembly.
Note
 Seven parts are accompanied when removing the CR drive pulley. They are
collectively called CR driven pulley assembly except for the screw caps.

4.7.7 Replacing Steel Bearer

Step 3: Remove the screws (4) that retain the steel bearer.
2 1
142 AP-74111 - Revision 1.4

N° Part name
1 Steel bearer
2 Screws that retain the steel bearer
Step 4: Remove the film FFC retainers (6).

2 1
N° Part name
1 Steel bearer
2 Film FFC retainer
Step 5: Remove the screws (3 each) that retain the cable guides (2).
2 2
1 2
N° Part name
1 Cable guide
2 Screws that retain the cable guide
Step 6: Remove the cable guide.

Step 7: Remove the steel bearer.
AP-74111 - Revision 1.4 143

Step 8: Replace the steel bearer.

4.7.8 Replacing CR_FFC
Caution
 When replacing the board or connecting and removing FFC, first remove the
power plug and leave it for a while. Overcurrent may occur and damage the
board.
 When connecting and removing the FFC type cables to/from the CR board
assembly connectors, always pull or push the cables perpendicularly to the
connector.
connectors, resulting in a breakdown of the on-board elements.
Note
 There are two types of CR FFC maintenance part. Select a proper one
depending on the CR board assembly to connect.
 CR_FFC and the corresponding CR board assembly are as follows.
Table 4-2 CR_FFC and the corresponding CR board assembly
CR_FFC Corresponding CR board assembly

Maintenance part N°: Maintenance part N°: No alphabet at
A conductive
DG-40352 DG-41872 the heading
fabric tape is
Maintenance part name: Maintenance part name: letter on the
attached.
VJ16_CR_FFC_Assy CR board assembly Rev. label.
The first three

Maintenance part N°: Maintenance part N°:
A conductive letters at the
DG-41871 DG-41872
fabric tape is heading of the
Maintenance part name: Maintenance part name:
not attached. Rev. label are
VJ16_CR_FFC_Assy-2 CR board assembly-2
“ORE.”
 Refer to Replacing CR Board Assembly to tell the CR board type

Step 1: Remove the CR cover.
Refer to Removing CR Board Cover
Step 2: Remove the steel bearer.
Refer to Replacing Steel Bearer
Step 3: Remove the board box cover 64.
144 AP-74111 - Revision 1.4

Step 4: Detach CR-FFC (3) from the CR board assembly (J201 - J203).
Step 5: Detach CR-FFC (3) from the MAIN board assembly (J9 - J11).
Step 6: Remove the screws (2) that retain the FFC guide (1).
Step 7: Remove the FFC guide.
Step 8: Remove the FT guide material (2).
2
1 3
N° Part name
1 FFC guide
2 Screws that retain the FFC guide
3 FT guide material
Step 9: Pull out the CR_FFC from the hole on the origin side of the cable guide.
Step 10: Pull out the CR_FFC from the hole on the leg holder base (64).
2 Cable guide 1 3 Back of leg holder base 64 1
the
N° Part name
1 CR_FFC
2 Cable guide
3 Leg holder base (64)
AP-74111 - Revision 1.4 145

Step 11: Replace the CR_FFC.
Note
 Fold the CR_FFC as follows.
A: valley fold
335 mm Face the printed
side front side
60 mm A CR board side
MAIN board 330 mm Fix the ferritic core with cable holder
side
Step 12: Connect the CR_FFC (3) to the CR board assembly (J201 - J203).
Step 13: Draw the CR_FFC through the same path as above.
Step 14: Connect the CR_FFC to the MAIN board assembly (J9 - J11).
4.7.9 Replacing Pressure Roller

Step 2: Lift up one end of the pressure arm slightly with a finger and hold it.
Step 3: Pull down the other end of the pressure roller.
2 1
N° Part name
1 Pressure roller
2 Pressure arm
Step 4: Confirm that one end of the pressure roller is detached.

Step 5: Pull down the other end of the pressure roller.
Step 6: Remove the pressure roller.
Step 7: Replace the pressure roller.
146 AP-74111 - Revision 1.4

4.7.10 Replacing Ink Tube
Step 1: Perform ink discharge operation to discharge ink entirely from the ink paths.
Refer to HeadWash Menu
Step 3: Remove the cartridge cable cover plate. 4
Refer to Replacing Ink ID Board Assembly
Step 4: Remove the screws (4 each) that retain the tube guide plate.
2 2
1 1
2 2
N° Part name
1 Cable guide plate
2 Screws that retain the cable guide plate
Step 5: Remove the tube guide plates (2).

Step 6: Remove the FFC guides (6).
AP-74111 - Revision 1.4 147

Step 7: Remove the tube clamps (6).

2
N° Part name
1 Ink tube
2 Film FFC guide
3 Tube clamp
Step 8: Remove the screws (2) that retain the tube guide plate.
Upper view 1 Lower view 3
N° Part name
1 Tube guide plate
2 Screws that retain the tube guide plate
3 Ink tube
Step 9: Remove the tube guide plate.

Step 10: Detach the ink tube from the three-way joint.
148 AP-74111 - Revision 1.4

Step 11: Pull out the ink tube from inside the carriage.
2
4
1
N° Part name
1 Three-way joint
2 Ink tube
Step 12: Loosen the joint screw on the tip of the sub tank.
Step 13: Detach the ink tube from the joint tube.
3 1
N° Part name
1 Ink tube
2 Joint tube
3 Joint screw
Step 14: Remove the ink tube.

Step 15: Replace the ink tube.
Step 17: Charge ink.
Refer to Ink Charging Menu
AP-74111 - Revision 1.4 149

4.8 Replacing Cursor Section

This section describes the procedure to replace the cursor section.
4.8.1 Releasing Head Lock
When releasing the head lock on the software, the carriage moves to the origin position after
the power is OFF. This section describes the procedure to release head lock with the power
OFF.
Step 2: Push down the cap on the left side of carriage.
1
N° Part name
1 Cap
Step 3: Move the carriage to the opposite side to the origin while holding down the cap.
Note
 For enabling head lock again, the cap does not need to be pushed down. Move
back the carriage to the position where the carriage is fixed with a sound.
150 AP-74111 - Revision 1.4

4.8.2 Removing CR Board Cover

Step 2: Remove the screws (3) that retain the CR board cover.
1
N° Part name
1 CR board cover
2 Screws that retain the CR board cover
Step 3: Remove the CR board cover.
4.8.3 Replacing CR Board Assembly
Caution
 When replacing the board or connecting and removing FFC, first remove the
power plug and leave it for a while. Overcurrent may occur and damage the
board.
 When connecting and removing the FFC type cables to/from the CR board
assembly connectors, always pull or push the cables perpendicularly to the
connector.
connectors, resulting in a breakdown of the on-board elements.
AP-74111 - Revision 1.4 151

Note
 CR Board Assy has two types, but they do not have any compatibility with each
other. When replacing the MAIN Board Assy, check its Rev. label to install the
same type of CR Board Assy as the previous one.
 The CR Board has two types of Rev. label and their first three letters are shown
below.
Assy: The CR Board Assy has no alphabetic letters on its Rev.label.
Assy-2: First three letters are FPT.
 The Rev.label is on the heat sink in the CR Board Assy.
TO CR
TO CR
TO CR
J201
J202
J203
CUTER SOLENOID
CR ENCORDER PAPER EDGE
J206
J208
)37
Rev. label
J205
to HEAD CN2
J209
J207
PG ORIGIN
J204
to HEAD CN1
RJ-350
CR BOARD
DE-36547
 When replacing the CR Board Assy and MAIN Board Assy at a time, check the
Rev. label on the MAIN Board Assy, and then replace both boards with the
combination as shown below.
 When the Rev.label for the CR Board Assy does not have the three alphabetic
letters as the first letters, install the MAIN Board Assy which has three alphabetic
letters FQY as the first letters.
 When the first alphabetical characters on the Rev.label for the CR Board Assy are
ORE, install the MAIN Board Assy which has three alphabetical characters FQY
as the first letters.
For more details, refer to the section shown below.
Refer to Replacing MAIN Board

Step 2: Remove the head FFC (2).
152 AP-74111 - Revision 1.4

Step 3: Remove the CR_FFC (3).

6 4 3 5
2 1
4
5 6
N° Part name
1 CR board assembly
2 Head FFC
3 CR_FFC
4 Connector
5 Screws that retain the CR board assembly 1
6 Hexagon spacer
Step 4: Detach the connectors to the CR board assembly listed below.
N° Connector N° # of Pins Color Connect to Remark

1 J201 30 Black MAIN (J11) FFC
4 J204 30 Black HEAD (J1) FFC
5 J205 30 Black HEAD (J2) FFC
6 J206 2 White CUTTER_SOL
7 J207 4 White CR_ENC
8 J208 4 Black P_EDGE
9 J209 3 White PG_ORIGIN
10 J210 2 Black HEAD_FAN_1
11 J211 2 Red HEAD_FAN_2
Step 5: Remove the screws (2) that retain the CR board assembly and the hexagon spacer
(2).
AP-74111 - Revision 1.4 153

Step 6: Remove the CR board assembly.

Step 7: Replace the CR board assembly.
4.8.4 Replacing CR Encoder Assembly
Note
 When removing the CR_ENC assembly, pay attention to avoid nicking the T
fence.

Step 3: Open the rear side cover.
Step 4: Detach the connector to the CR encoder assembly.
Step 5: Remove the screws (2) that retain the CR encoder assembly.
1 Rear view of carriage 4 Section view 1
2 3 5
N° Part name
1 CR encoder assembly
2 Screws that retain the CR encoder assembly
3 Y rail assembly
4 CR board mounting base
5 T fence
Step 6: Remove the CR encoder assembly.

Step 7: Replace the CR encoder assembly.
154 AP-74111 - Revision 1.4

4.8.5 Replacing PG Origin Sensor Assembly

Step 2: Open the side top cover R.
Step 3: Remove the PG origin sensor relay assembly.
Step 4: Remove the PG origin sensor assembly.
2 1
4
N° Part name
1 PG origin sensor relay assembly
2 PG origin sensor assembly
Step 5: Replace the PG origin sensor assembly.

4.8.6 Replacing Cursor Roller Arm Assembly
Step 1: Remove the head cover.

Refer to Replacing Cursor Roller Arm Assembly
Step 2: Lift up the cursor roller arm assembly to the direction shown below, and lift up the
cursor arm spring.
Note
 Note that the tension of the cursor arm spring is high.
Step 3: Confirm that the bearing is detached from the cursor guide.
AP-74111 - Revision 1.4 155

Step 4: Pull off the cursor roller arm to the direction shown below with the cursor arm spring
being lifted up.
ձ ձ
ղ ղ
1 1
N° Part name
1 Cursor roller arm
2 Cursor arm spring
Step 5: Replace the cursor roller arm assembly.
Note
 Five parts are accompanied when removing the cursor roller arm. They are
collectively called cursor roller arm assembly except for the cursor arm spring.
156 AP-74111 - Revision 1.4

4.8.7 Removing Print Head Cover

Removing Side Top Cover R
Step 3: Detach the connectors (2) to the head fan assembly from the head fan relay
assembly.
2 3
4
N° Part name
1 Connector to the head fan assembly
2 Head fan relay assembly
3 CR board cover
Step 4: Remove the screws (2) that retain the print head cover.
2 2
N° Part name
1 Print head cover
2 Screws that retain the print head cover
Step 5: Remove the print head cover.
AP-74111 - Revision 1.4 157

4.8.8 Replacing Valve Head Assembly
This section shows the procedure for replacing valve head assembly (Part N°:DG-41543
Maintenance part name: Valve Head Assembly). Follow the steps shown below.
(1)Fill the new valve head Assy with the cleaning liquid and make sure that the liquid spreads
into the Assy.
(2) Replace the valve head Assy which has a problem.
Filling Valve head with Cleaning Liquid
For a test and quality maintenance, the valve head Assy for VJ 1614 is filled with water-based
cleaning liquid when shipping.
Caution
 Make sure you fill the new valve head Assy with the cleaning liquid. When the
valve head is not filled with the cleaning liquid, do not fill the Assy with the ink
because the Assy may break.
 For the cleaning liquid, make sure you avoid contact with your eyes. If this
happens, wash your eyes immediately with running water and see a doctor at
once.
These are the necessary tools for filling the valve head Assy with the cleaning liquid.
 Tools for cleaning the valve head (Part N°: DG-41787 Maintenance part name: kit for
cleaning the valve head <VJ inks>) * The exploded view is with the leg Assy.
 Cleaning liquid (for the eco solvent inks)
 In the steps below, the cleaning tool consists out of two parts. The Valve Head
Cleaning Tool 1 and the Valve Head Cleaning Tool 2 in these steps.
2
1
N° Part name
1 Valve Head Cleaning Tool 1
2 Valve Head Cleaning Tool 2
158 AP-74111 - Revision 1.4

Step 1: Attach the valve head cleaning tools to the new valve head Assy. Make sure you
connect the valve head Assy filters (silver parts) to the valve head cleaning tool.
2
to valve head cleaning tool 1
4
4
1
3
to valve head cleaning tool 2
.
N° Part name
1 Valve head Assy
2 Valve head cleaning tool 1
4 Filters
Step 2: Attach the cleaning cartridge for the eco solvent inks to the top of the valve head
cleaning tool 1.
N° Part name
1 Cleaning liquid cartridge
3 Syringe
AP-74111 - Revision 1.4 159

Step 3: Fill the syringe cylinder with the cleaning liquid by pulling the syringe pump to the
level of 3 cc.
Note
 The 3 cc mentioned above does not include any air. Make sure you fill the
syringe cylinder with the cleaning liquid by pulling the syringe pump to the
level of 3 cc without any air.
Step 4: Make sure that the liquid spreads into the Assy by shaking the Assy only slightly.
Caution
 Do not press the transparent film on the sides of the valve head Assy because
the cleaning liquid in the valve head Assy will flow into the tubes.
 Do not damage the transparent film on the sides of the valve head Assy.
Step 5: Remove the cleaning cartridge from the valve head cleaning tool 1.
Step 6: Remove the cleaning liquid from the valve head Assy by pulling the syringe pump.
Note
 Step 6 above is to avoid leakage. You do not need to empty the valve head Assy
completely.
Step 7: Remove the valve head cleaning tools from the valve head Assy.
Caution
 When you remove the valve head cleaning tools, cover them with the Poly-knit
wiper to avoid the liquid splashing towards you from the tubes when the valve
head cleaning tools are removed. Do not use a dirty wiper because the dust
and dirt may cause trouble to the print head. Use a clean one.
 For the cleaning liquid, make sure you avoid contact with your eyes. If this
happens, wash your eyes immediately with running water and see a doctor at
once.
160 AP-74111 - Revision 1.4

Replacement of Valve Head Assembly
 To replace the valve head assembly, replace the following parts all together.
2 1
4
3
N° Part name
1 Valve head Assy
2 Connector Valve Head
3 O Ring (M6)
Step 1: Perform the ink discharging operation to discharge the ink from all of the ink
channels.
Note
 After the ink discharging operation, check if the ink cartridge is ejected.
Caution
 To insert and remove a FFC type of cable (Head FFC), make sure to insert and
remove the cable perpendicular to the connector. Inserting or removing cable
aslant may damage/short/bread the terminalsin the connector, and may cause
the breakdown of the on-board elements. The cable can be inserted or removed
up to 5 times.
Step 2: Slide the carriage to left side (origin side).

Step 3: Remove the side top cover L
Step 4: Remove the print head cover.
Refer to Removing Print Head Cover
AP-74111 - Revision 1.4 161

Step 5: Remove the 2 screws that fix the valve head holder 2.
1
N° Part name
1 Valve head holder 2
2 Screw that fix the valve head holding plate
Step 6: Remove the valve headholder 2.

Step 7: Pull the valve head Assembly from the mini fitting.
1
N° Part name
1 Valve head assy
2 Mini Fitting
162 AP-74111 - Revision 1.4

Caution
 When pulling out the valve head assembly from the mini fitting, perform the
operation on the flushing box, or place a media under the head to perform the
operation on the platen. The ink remaining the head may be leak out.
 Do not touch the transparent film on the side of valve head Assembly.
The ink filled inside the valve head Assembly will be discharged.
 Take care not to damage the transparent film on the valve head Assembly.
 Place a cotton waste under the detached valve head, or put the valve head
Assembly in a plastic bag to prevent discharging of remaining ink.
4
Step 8: Turn the connector valve head to unlock, and then remove the connector valve
head from the valve head Assembly.
N° Part name
1 Connector valve head
2 Valve head Assy
Step 9: Remove the O ring (1) from the ink tube.
N° Part name
1 Ink Tube
2 O Ring
3 Joint Screw
AP-74111 - Revision 1.4 163

Step 10: Attach a new O ring around the tip of ink tube.
Step 11: Connect the joint screw and connector valve head by pushing the O ring with
connector valve head.
N° Part name
1 Connector Valve head
2 O Ring
3 Joint Screw
164 AP-74111 - Revision 1.4

Step 12: Attach a new valve head assembly filled with cleaning fluid to the mini fitting.
Make sure to attach the valve head with the filter of valve head assembly (silver
part) to be front and
side.
Upper side
1 4
Lower side
N° Part name
1 Valve head Assy
2 Filter
Caution
 Make sure to attach the valve head assembly from the mini fitting side.
If the valve head assembly is attached from the ink tube side, the cleaning fluid
in the valve head and the ink in the tube may be leak out.
Note
 Replace the valve head assembly one by one, and attach the ink tube by one
colour.
Although all 4 valve heads are replaced on time in the picture above, make sure
to replace the valve head one by one to avoid a mistake in tubing.
Step 13: Insert the correct tube to each valve head assembly to match the colour.
Step 14: To attach the cover, reverse the removal procedure.
Select the "Ink Charge 2: Little" from "Check 3: Ink Charge" in the Self Diagnostic
menu to charge inks.
Ink Charging Menu"
Note
 After charging the ink, check if there is no air in the valve head assembly.
 If the valve head assy contains air, charge the ink until three-quarters of the
valve head is filled with ink.
AP-74111 - Revision 1.4 165

4.8.9 Replacing Print Head
Caution
 While operation, pay special attention not to touch the head nozzles or
contaminate them with foreign objects.
 The print head assembly has been adjusted. Do not disassemble it.
The cables can be connected or removed up to 5 times.

Step 3: Remove the valve head assembly.
Refer to Replacing Valve Head Assembly
Step 4: Remove the screws (2) that retain the print head guide.
1
N° Part name
1 Print head guide
2 Screws that retain the print head guide
Step 5: Remove the print head guide.
166 AP-74111 - Revision 1.4

Step 6: Remove the print head.

1
N° Part name
1 Print head
Step 7: Remove the head FFC (2) from the print head.
2 Front 1 Back
1 2
N° Part name
1 Head FFC
2 Print head
Step 8: Replace the print head.

AP-74111 - Revision 1.4 167

4.8.10 Replacing Head FFC
Caution
 While operation, pay special attention not to touch the head nozzles or
contaminate them with foreign objects.
 The print head assembly has been adjusted. Do not disassemble it.
The cables can be connected or removed up to 5 times.
Step 2: Initialize the head counter.
Refer to Software Counter Initialization Menu
Step 4: Remove the valve head assembly.
Refer to Replacing Valve Head Assembly
Step 5: Remove the valve head holding plate.
Step 6: Remove the print head.
Refer to Replacing Print Head
2 1
N° Part name
1 CR board assembly
2 Head FFC
Step 7: Remove the screws (2) that retain the flat core holder.
Step 8: Remove the flat core holder (2).
168 AP-74111 - Revision 1.4

Step 9: Remove the flat core (2).

2
4
3 4 1
.
N° Part name
1 Flat core holder
2 Screws that retain the flat core holder
3 Flat core
4 Head FFC
Step 10: Replace the head FFCs (2).
Note
 Fold the head FFC as follows.
0RXQWDLQ)ROG L 5HIHUWRWKHSLFWXUHEHORZWRIROGWKHIOH[LEOHIODWFDEOH
9DOOH\)ROG LL 3ODFHWKHFDEOHձRQWRSRIWKHFDEOHղDWWKHSRVLWLRQRIIROGLQJOLQH$
LLL 6HFXUHWZRFDEOHVZLWKDFHWDWHWDSHDWWKHSRVLWLRQRISDWWHUQ
LQWKLVSLFWXUH
Print Head Side &5%RDUG6LGH
13 mm 130 mm 45 mm 2 mm 10mm
$ 1 6XUIDFHZLWKQROHWWHUV
13 mm 125 mm 45 mm 2 mm 10mm
$ 2 6XUIDFHZLWK
SULQWHGOHWWHUV
41 mm
 Contact the non-engraved surfaces of the head FFC with each other so that the
engraved surfaces face outwardly.
AP-74111 - Revision 1.4 169

4.8.11 Replacing P_EDGE Sensor Assembly

Step 2: Detach the connector to the P_EDGE sensor assembly from the CR board
assembly (J208).
Refer to Replacing CR Board Assembly
Step 3: Remove the screw (1 that retains the P_EDGE sensor assembly.
1
N° Part name
1 P_EDGE sensor assembly
2 Screw that retains the P_EDGE sensor assembly
Step 4: Detach the cable of the P_EDGE sensor assembly from the clamp (4).
Left lower view 2 Upper view 1
2 1
N° Part name
1 Cable of the P_EDGE sensor assembly
2 Clamp
Step 5: Replace the P_EDGE sensor assembly.
Note
 The cable of the P_EDGE sensor assembly is a stranded wire of red, black, blue
and orange.
170 AP-74111 - Revision 1.4

4.9 Replacing Maintenance Section

This section describes the procedure to replace the maintenance section.
4.9.1 Removing Maintenance Inner Cover

Refer to Removing Maintenance Cover U 4
Step 3: Remove the screws (4) that retain the maintenance inside cover.
1 Front Upper side 2
2 1
N° Part name
1 Maintenance inside cover
2 Screws that retain the maintenance inside cover
Step 4: Remove the maintenance inside cover.
4.9.2 Replacing Flushing Box Assembly
Step 1: Remove the maintenance cover R.

Step 2: Remove the maintenance cover U_R.
Step 4: Move the carriage to the left side (opposite side of the origin).
AP-74111 - Revision 1.4 171

Step 5: Remove the maintenance inner cover.

Refer to Removing Maintenance Inner Cover
Step 6: Remove the screw (1) that retains the flushing box, and the one that retaining the
flushing box holder to maintenance base.
2 4
N° Part name
1 Flushing box
2 Screws that retain the flushing box
3 Flushing box holder
4 Screws that retain the flushing box holder
Step 7: Remove the tube from L shaped tube fitting.
N° Part name
1 Flushing box
2 Tube
3 L shaped tube fitting
172 AP-74111 - Revision 1.4

Caution
 Ink may drop while working. Place an waste cloth or discarded print media
before the operation.
Step 8: Remove the flushing box with tubes are attached.

Step 9: Replace the flushing box assembly.
4
4.9.3 Replacing Cleaner Head

Step 2: Using tweezers, detach the cleaner head from the hook at the cleaner head
retaining section, and remove it upwardly.
1
N° Part name
1 Cleaner head
AP-74111 - Revision 1.4 173

Step 3: Replace the cleaner head.
Note
 When reassembling the cleaner head, pay attention to the following:
 Do not touch the cleaner head with bare hands.
 Make sure that the cleaner head gets no dust or oil.
 Install the cleaner head so that the point of the cleaner head is located to the
observer's right side.
1 Cleaner head
2 Head point
 Insert the cleaner head into the holder to the full depth securely and hook it.
4.9.4 Replacing Maintenance Assembly
Note
 There are some remaining ink in the tubes. Be careful not to spill ink from the
tube outlet onto the printer or the covers.
Step 1: Remove the Maintenance cover R.

Step 3: Remove the cartridge cover (side).
Step 4: Remove the cartridge cover (lower)
Refer to Removing Cartridge Cover (Lower)
174 AP-74111 - Revision 1.4

Step 7: Remove the maintenance inner cover.

Refer to Removing Maintenance Inner Cover
Step 8: Detach the connector to the wiper origin sensor relay assembly from the pump cap
assembly.
1 2
N° Part name
1 Pump cap assembly
2 Wiper origin sensor relay assembly
AP-74111 - Revision 1.4 175

Step 9: Detach the connector to the pump motor relay assembly at the back that is under
the maintenance base.
)URQW
&DUWULGJHSDUW
3 2
N° Part name
1 Cable to pump motor
2 Connector to the pump motor relay assembly
3 Absorbent Sheet Plate
4 Maintenance Base
Step 10: Remove the screw (1) that retains the flushing box holder.
Step 11: Remove the flushing box holder.
Step 12: Remove the screw (1) that retains the head lock holder.
176 AP-74111 - Revision 1.4

Step 13: Remove the head lock holder.

4 3
1
4
N° Part name
1 Flushing box holder
2 Screw that retains the flushing box holder
3 Head lock holder
4 Screw that retains the head lock holder
Step 14: Use tweezers to remove the acetate tape affixed to the screws on the right that
retains the maintenance holder.
1 3
N° Part name
1 Maintenance holder
2 Screw that retains the maintenance holder
3 Acetate tape
AP-74111 - Revision 1.4 177

Step 15: Remove the screws (2) that retain the maintenance base.
1
3
N° Part name
1 Pump cap assembly
2 Screw that retains the maintenance holder
Step 16: Remove the screws (6) that retain the maintenance base.
4
2 3 2
N° Part name
Remove the screws (6) that retain the maintenance
1
base.
2 pan-head screw with spring washer and flat washer
3 Tapping screw
4 pan-head screw with spring washer and flat washer
Step 17: Remove the maintenance base.
178 AP-74111 - Revision 1.4

Step 18: Remove the tubes that are connected to the pump cap assembly from the waste
fluid tube joint.
1
3 4
2
N° Part name
1 Pump cap assembly
2 Tubes that are connected to the pump cap assembly
3 Waste fluid tube joint
Step 19: Remove the maintenance assembly from the maintenance base.
For the composition of the maintenance assembly, refer to the sections shown
below
Refer to List of Maintenance Part
Refer to Exploded View
Step 20: Remove the screws (2) that retain the maintenance holder with the maintenance
assembly.
Maintenance Assy(flip side)
N° Part name
1 Maintenance assembly
2 Maintenance holder
screws (2) that retain the maintenance holder with the
3
maintenance assembly
Step 21: Remove the maintenance holder.
AP-74111 - Revision 1.4 179

Step 22: Install it on the new maintenance assembly.

Step 23: Cut the free ends of the tubes that are connected to the pump cap assembly of the
new maintenance assembly 80 mm from these ends.
2
1
N° Part name
1 Maintenance assembly
2 Tubes
Step 24: Split the double tube 20mm from the free ends of the tubes.
PP
N° Part name
1 Tubes
Step 25: Replace the maintenance assembly.
Note
 For the tubes that are connected to the pump cap assembly, refer to step N°17
in this section.
Step 26: To reassemble the unit, reverse the removal steps.
180 AP-74111 - Revision 1.4

4.10 Replacing IH Section

This section describes the procedure to replace the IH section.
4.10.1 Replacing Ink ID Board Assembly
Step 1: Remove the ink cartridge.

Step 2: Remove the cartridge cover(upper). 4
Step 3: Remove the under cartridge cover (side).
Refer to Removing Cartridge Cover (Middle)
Step 5: Remove 2 screws that fix the cartridge cover stay C.
/HIWVLGH 5LJKWVLGH
1
1
2
2
N° Part name
1 Cartridge Cover Stay C
2 Screw that fix the cartridge cover C
Step 6: Remove the cartridge cover stay C.
AP-74111 - Revision 1.4 181

Step 7: Remove 4 screws that fix the cartridge rotating base to the cartridge rotating base
holder.
1 Left side Right side 1
2 2
N° Part name
Screw that fix the cartridge rotating base to the cartridge
2
rotating base holder
Caution
 The cartridge rotating base will fall over under it's own weight.
 Remove the last one screw with holding the cartridge rotating base by hand to
not to get hurt.
Step 8: Lay down the cartridge rotating base slowly.
Note
 Be careful not to caught the ink cartridge control cable under the cartridge
rotating base.
 1 = Ink cartridge control cable
182 AP-74111 - Revision 1.4

Step 9: Remove the screws (2) that retain the I/C slide (2).
1 3
4
2 4
N° Part name
1 I/C slide (2)
2 Screws that retain the I/C slide (2)
3 Cartridge side plate
4 Screws that retain the cartridge side plate
Step 10: Remove the I/C slide (2).

Step 11: Remove the screws (2) that retain the cartridge side plate.
Step 12: Remove the cartridge side plate.
Step 13: Remove the screws (2) that retain the holder pressure spring (4).
1 3
N° Part name
2 Holder pressure spring
3 Screws that retain the holder pressure spring
AP-74111 - Revision 1.4 183

Step 14: Remove the holder pressure spring.
Note
 There are two holder pressure springs respectively in the upper and lower
portion.
Step 15: Detach the cable of the ink ID board assembly from the clamp.
Step 16: Detach the ink cartridge control cable from the ink ID board assembly.
Step 17: Remove the ink ID board assembly.
1 4
2 3
N° Part name
1 Ink ID board assembly
2 Ink cartridge control cable
3 Clamp
Step 18: Replace the ink ID board assembly.
Note
 The card board holder is accompanied when removing the ink ID board
assembly. They are collectively called ink ID board assembly.
184 AP-74111 - Revision 1.4

4.10.2 Replacing Frame Assembly, Needle
Step 1: Remove the ink cartridge.

Step 2: Remove the cartridge cover(upper).
Step 3: Remove the under cartridge cover (side).
4
Step 5: Remove 2 screws that fix the cartridge cover stay C.
/HIWVLGH 5LJKWVLGH
1
1
2
2
N° Part name
2 Screw that fix the cartridge cover C
Step 6: Remove the cartridge cover stay C.
AP-74111 - Revision 1.4 185

Step 7: Remove 4 screws that fix the cartridge rotating base to the cartridge rotating base
holder.
1 Left side Right side 1
2 2
N° Part name
Screw that fix the cartridge rotating base to the cartridge
2
rotating base holder
Caution
 The cartridge rotating base will fall over under it's own weight.
 Remove the last one screw with holding the cartridge rotating base by hand to
not to get hurt.
Step 8: Lay down the cartridge rotating base slowly.

 Be careful not to caught the ink cartridge control cable under the cartridge
rotating base.
N° Part name
1 Ink Cartridge Control Cable
186 AP-74111 - Revision 1.4

Step 9: Remove the screws (2) that retain the I/C slide (2).
1 3
4
2 4
N° Part name
1 I/C slide (2)
2 Screws that retain the I/C slide (2)
4 Screws that retain the cartridge side plate
Step 10: Remove the I/C slide (2).

Step 11: Remove the screws (2) that retain the cartridge side plate.
Step 12: Remove the cartridge side plate.
Step 13: Remove the joint screw M6.
1 4
2 3
N° Part name
1 Frame assembly, needle
2 Joint screw M6
4 Ink tube
Note
 An O ring is inside the joint screw. Be careful not to lose the O ring.
 Soak the O ring in the specified cleaning fluid before installing.
AP-74111 - Revision 1.4 187

Step 14: Detach the hook of the cartridge slide.
1 2
N° Part name
1 Cartridge slide
3 Hook
Step 15: Move the hook of the cartridge slide to the direction shown below.
Step 16: Remove the cartridge slide.
1 2
N° Part name
1 Cartridge slide
2 Hook of the cartridge slide
Step 17: Detach the ink cartridge control cable from the clamp.
Step 18: Move the frame assembly and the needle to the direction shown below.
188 AP-74111 - Revision 1.4

Step 19: Remove the frame assembly and the needle.

1
N° Part name
1 Hook of the frame assembly and the needle
2 Clamp
Step 20: Remove the screw (1) that retains the ink cartridge control cable to the frame
assembly and the needle.
3
1 2
N° Part name
2 Screw that retains the ink cartridge control cable
Step 21: Remove the ink cartridge control cable.

AP-74111 - Revision 1.4 189

4.10.3 Replacing Ink Cartridge Control Cable
Note
 There are three connectors to the ink cartridge control cable.
Step 1: Detach the ink cartridge control cable from the ink ID board assembly.
Refer to Replacing Ink ID Board Assembly
Step 2: Detach the ink cartridge control cable from the frame assembly and the needle.
Refer to Replacing Frame Assembly, Needle
Step 3: Remove the screw (1) that retains the ink cartridge control cable to the cartridge
side plate.
4 3
1 2
N° Part name
2 Screw that retains the ink cartridge control cable
Step 4: Remove the connector to the ink cartridge control cable from the HEATER
JUNCTION board assembly (J5 - J10).
Step 5: Replace the ink cartridge control cable.
190 AP-74111 - Revision 1.4

4.10.4 Replacing Cartridge Holder Assembly

Step 2: Remove the cartridge cover (middle)
Step 3:
Step 4:
Remove the I/C slide (2).
Remove the cartridge side plate.
4
Step 5: Remove the joint screw M6.
Refer to Replacing Frame Assembly, Needle
Step 6: Detach the ink cartridge control cable from the clamp.
Refer to Replacing Ink Cartridge Control Cable
Step 7: Replace the cartridge holder assembly.
Note
 The cartridge holder assembly consists out of many parts. Refer to exploded
view for details.
AP-74111 - Revision 1.4 191

4.10.5 Replacing Two-Way Valve
This section explains replacement procedures of two-way valve.

Step 3: Remove the screws (8) that retain the two-way valve.
2 1
N° Part name
1 Two-way valve mounting plate
2 Screws that retain the two-way valve
Step 4: Remove the screws (4) that retain the two-way valve mounting plate.
1 1
N° Part name
1 Two-way valve mounting plate
2 Screws that retain the two-way valve
Step 5: Remove the two-way valve mounting plate.
192 AP-74111 - Revision 1.4

Step 6: Detach the ink tube (2) from the two-way valve.
Step 7: Remove the two-way valve.
2 Rear view (when replacing cyan)
Y
M
C
K
4
N° Part name
1 two-way valve
2 Ink tube
Step 8: Replace the two-way valve.

AP-74111 - Revision 1.4 193

4.10.6 Replacing Sub-Tank Lower Absorber Assembly

Step 2: Remove the screws (4) that retain the absorber mounting plate.
2 2
3 3
N° Part name
1 Absorber mounting plate
2 Screws that retain the absorber mounting plate
3 Screws that retain the absorber mounting plate
Step 3: Pull out the absorber mounting plate.

Step 4: Replace the sub-tank lower absorber assembly.
Note
 The sub-tank lower absorber is accompanied when removing the absorber
mounting plate. They are collectively called sub-tank lower absorber assembly.
194 AP-74111 - Revision 1.4

4.10.7 Replacing Sub-Tank Assembly
Step 2: Remove the two-way valve fixture plate.
Refer to Replacing Two-Way Valve
Step 3: Remove the absorber mounting plate. 4
Refer to Replacing Sub-Tank Lower Absorber Assembly
Step 5: Remove the intake tubes (2) from the joint screws (2).
1 Front view Rear view 4
2 3 1 2
N° Part name
1 Joint screw
2 Ink tube
3 Sub tank assembly
4 Two-way valve
AP-74111 - Revision 1.4 195

Step 6: Remove the screws (2) that retain the sub tank assembly of the target colour to the
sub tank pack base.
1 3
3 2
N° Part name
1 Sub tank assembly
2 Sub tank pack base
3 Screws that retain the sub tank assembly
Step 7: Pull out the sub tank assembly.

Step 8: Replace the sub tank assembly.
Refer to Ink Charging Menu
196 AP-74111 - Revision 1.4

4.11 Replacing Leg Section

This section describes the procedure to replace the leg section.
4.11.1 Replacing Waste Fluid Bottle
Note 4
 Discharge waste fluid fully to replace the waste fluid bottle.
 Confirm that there remains no waste fluid in the waste fluid tube.
Step 1: Remove the connector for the waste fluid level switch.
1
2
N° Part name
1 Connector for waste fluid level switch
2 Waste Bottle
Step 2: Remove the waste fluid tube.

Step 3: Loosen the cap of waste bottle.
Step 4: Loosen the nut for Waste Fluid Level Switch.
AP-74111 - Revision 1.4 197

N° Part name
1 Waste Bottle
2 Waste Fluid Tube
3 Cap of Waste Bottle
4 Nut for Waste Fluid Level Switch
Step 5: Pull out the nut of the level switch (waste fluid) and the cap of the waste fluid bottle
from the connector side of the level switch (waste fluid).
N° Part name
1 Cap of Waste Bottle
2 Nut for Waste Fluid Level Switch
Step 6: Exchange the waste bottle.

Step 7: Exchange the level switch.
198 AP-74111 - Revision 1.4

4.12 Replacing Roll Media Holder Assembly

This section describes the procedure to replace the roll media holder assembly.
4.12.1 Replacing Roll Media Holder Assembly on the VJ16_L Side

Refer to Removing Media Guide R (Lower) 4
Step 2: Release the roll media fixing lever.
N° Part name
1 Roll media fixing lever
Step 3: Pull out the roll media holder assembly on the VJ16_L side from the left side.
1 2
N° Part name
1 Roll media holder assembly on the VJ16_L side
2 Roll media holder assembly on the VJ16_R side
AP-74111 - Revision 1.4 199

Step 4: Replace the roll media holder assembly on the VJ16_L side.
Note
 The roll media holder assembly on the VJ16_L side is an integral part.
4.12.2 Replacing Roll Media Holder Assembly on the VJ16_R Side
 Follow the same procedures as for the replacement of the roll media holder assembly on
the VJ16_L side.
Refer to Replacing Roll Media Holder Assembly on the VJ16_L Side
 Pull out the roll media holder assembly on the VJ16_R side from the right side.
200 AP-74111 - Revision 1.4

Chapter 5 Self-Diagnosis
Mode
Introduction. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204 5
Preparation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204
 Preparations on Machine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204
 Setting Printing Media . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204
 Connecting Power Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204
 Starting Up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205
Operations in Self-Diagnosis Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206

 Operating Self-Diagnosis Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206
 Diagnosis Items in Self-Diagnosis Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208
Platen Adjustment Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210
Inspection Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211

 Memory Size Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213
 Version Menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213
 Operation Panel Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214
 Operation Panel Key Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214
 LCD Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214
 LED Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214
 Sensor Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215
 Encoder Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217
 Fan Menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217
 History Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218
 Maintenance History. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218
 Serious Error History . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220
 Error Initialization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221
 Head Waveform Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221
Ink Charging Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222
AP-74111 - Revision 1.4 201

Adjustment Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223

 Head Nozzle Check Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226
 Skew Check Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228
 Head Slant Check Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229
 Horizontal Direction Checking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230
 Vertical Direction Checking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232
 Voltage Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234
 Uni-D/Bi-D Low/High Adjustment. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236
 Side Margin Adjustment Menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244
 Test Printing Menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245
 HeadWash Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246
 HeadWash Menu 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247
 Software Counter Initialization Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247
 Feed Pitch Check Menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248
 Solid Print Menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249
Cleaning Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250
Sample Printing Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251
Time Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255
Parameter Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256

 Parameter Initialization Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257
 Voltage Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258
 Uni-D/Bi-D Low/High . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259
 Parameter Update Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260
 Head Rank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261
 Voltage Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262
 Uni-D / Bi-D Low. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263
 Side Margin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265
 Ink Not-filled Flag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266
 Serial Number Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267
 Debug bit Update . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268
 Cap sequence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269
Servo Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270
202 AP-74111 - Revision 1.4

Endurance Running Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273

 CR Motor Endurance Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274
 PF Motor Endurance Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275
 Pump Endurance Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 276
 Print Head Endurance (Nozzle Print) Menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277
 General Endurance Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 278
 Endurance Running Check Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279 5
Media Feed Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280
ExControl Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281

 Version. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282
 Sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282
 Tank Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283
 Electromagnetic Valve Check. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 284
 Miscellaneous. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285
 Mist Fan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 286
 Heater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 286
 History . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287
PaperInitial Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288
Speed Mode Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 289
AP-74111 - Revision 1.4 203

5.1 Introduction
This chapter provides information on the self-diagnosis function.
The self-diagnosis function adjusts the printing accuracy. Used in the manufacturing process,
adjustment, and maintenance.
The system firmware implements the self-diagnosis function. All functions are available from
the operation panel.
Part Names and Functions
5.2 Preparation
Before you can use the self-diagnosis function, you must make the machine ready to call up
the self-diagnosis menu.
5.2.1 Preparations on Machine
Before starting up the self-diagnosis function, perform the following preparations.
Setting Printing Media
Set a roll media for adjustment.
Note
 In the self-diagnosis menu display status, the media type depends on the user
setting.
 During adjustment, use coated paper for the media.
Connecting Power Cable
Connect the power cable to the machine’s inlet assembly and insert the power plug into an
outlet.
Note
 Do not connect three or more power plugs to one outlet.
204 AP-74111 - Revision 1.4

5.2.2 Starting Up
To use the self-diagnosis function, you must first call up the self-diagnosis menu on the
operation panel.
The self-diagnosis menu is completely independent of the normal operation mode and
self-diagnosis display mode. To call up the self-diagnosis menu, follow the steps below.
Step 1: If the system is in the operation mode or the
self-diagnosis menu mode, press Power to switch off the
printer. 5
Step 2: While holding down Setting/value , Setting/value + and >
simultaneously, press Power.
The system will enter the self-diagnosis mode and display
the self-diagnosis menu.
AP-74111 - Revision 1.4 205

5.3 Operations in Self-Diagnosis Mode

This section explains how to operate in the self-diagnosis mode as well as providing the list of
available diagnosis items.
5.3.1 Operating Self-Diagnosis Mode
Follow the operation flow shown below to operate the self-diagnosis mode.
Note
 For more detailed operation steps, refer to the flow chart of the applicable
diagnosis item.
Step 1: Press < or > to select the item to be diagnosed, and

press Enter.
 Selects the item.
 If the item has a sub menu, the sub menu is displayed.
Step 2: When the LCD monitor indicates a setting value, the

value can be modified.
Press Setting/value + or Setting/value to modify the
value.
Step 3: To save the modified value, press Enter.

The modified value is stored and the next item is
displayed
 If you press Cancel, or, Setting/value + or Setting/
value , instead of Enter, the modification is not
stored.
206 AP-74111 - Revision 1.4

Step 4: To quit the diagnosis, press Cancel.

The system returns to an upper hierarchy of the
diagnosis menu.
5
Step 5: To exit the self-diagnosis menu, press Power.
AP-74111 - Revision 1.4 207

5.3.2 Diagnosis Items in Self-Diagnosis Menu
The self-diagnosis menu includes the following diagnosis items.
Diagnosis item Contents Reference

Platen Adjustment Performs temperature setting for the platen Platen Adjustment
Menu heater to 42°C. Menu"
Performs various inspections for memory size,
Inspection Menu version, panel, sensor, encoder, fan, head Inspection Menu"
waveform, etc. Displays the history.
Ink Charging Menu Performs ink charging. Ink Charging Menu"
Performs various adjustments for the printer
Adjustment Menu Adjustment Menu"
mechanism.
Cleaning Menu Performs cleaning of the print head. Cleaning Menu
Performs sample printing necessary for Sample Printing
Print Menu
adjustment. Menu
Time Setting Menu Performs setting the time of the printer. Time Check
Parameter Menu Configures various adjustment parameters. Parameter Menu
Servo Menu Performs adjustment for the servo motor. Servo Setting
Endurance Performs endurance running of the printer Endurance
Running Menu mechanism. Running Menu
Feeds media into the printer forward or
Media feed Menu Media Feed Menu
backward.
Performs diagnosis of the controller board
ExControl Menu version, sensor, and heater check. Displays the ExControl Menu
history.
Performs initialization and media detection
PaperInitial Menu PaperInitial Menu
setting.
Speedmode menu Performs speedmode setting.
208 AP-74111 - Revision 1.4

>@NH\
>(QWHU@
㹁㹦㹣㹡㹩ࠉ㸯㸸㸿㹢㹨㸬㹎㹪㹟㹲㹣㹬 $GM3ODWHQ0HQX
>&DQFHO@
>!@NH\ >@NH\
>(QWHU@
㹁㹦㹣㹡㹩ࠉ㸰㸸㹒㹣㹱㹲 7HVW0HQX
>&DQFHO@
>!@NH\ >@NH\
>(QWHU@
㹁㹦㹣㹡㹩ࠉ㸱㸸㹇㹬㹩㹁㹦㹟㹰㹥㹣 ,QN&KDUJH0HQX
5
>&DQFHO@
>!@NH\ >@NH\
>(QWHU@
㹁㹦㹣㹡㹩ࠉ㸲㸸㸿㹢㹨㹳㹱㹲㹫㹣㹬㹲 $GMXVWPHQW0HQX
>&DQFHO@
>!@NH\ >@NH\
>(QWHU@
㹁㹦㹣㹡㹩ࠉ㸳㸸㹁㹪㹣㹟㹬㹧㹬㹥 &OHDQLQJ0HQX
>&DQFHO@
>!@NH\ >@NH\
>(QWHU@
㹁㹦㹣㹡㹩ࠉ㸴㸸㹎㹰㹧㹬㹲 3ULQW0HQX
>&DQFHO@
>!@NH\ >@NH\
>(QWHU@
㹁㹦㹣㹡㹩ࠉ㸵㸸㹑㹣㹲㹒㹧㹫㹣 6HW7LPH0HQX
>&DQFHO@
>!@NH\ >@NH\
>(QWHU@
㹁㹦㹣㹡㹩ࠉ㸶㸸㹎㹟㹰㹟㹫㹣㹲㹣㹰 3DUDPHWHU0HXQ
>&DQFHO@
>!@NH\ >@NH\
>(QWHU@
㹁㹦㹣㹡㹩ࠉ㸷㸸㹑㹣㹰㹴㹭 6HUYR0HQX
>&DQFHO@
>!@NH\ >@NH\
>(QWHU@
㹁㹦㹣㹡㹩㸯㸮㸸㹃㹬㹢㹳㹰㹟㹬㹡㹣 (QGXUDQFH0HQX
>&DQFHO@
>!@NH\ >@NH\
>(QWHU@
㹁㹦㹣㹡㹩㸯㸯㸸㹎㹟㹮㹣㹰㹄㹣㹣㹢 3DSHU)HHG0HQX
>&DQFHO@
>!@NH\ >@NH\
>(QWHU@
㹁㹦㹣㹡㹩㸯㸰㸸㹃㹶㹁㹭㹬㹲㹰㹭㹪 ([&RQWURO0HQX
>&DQFHO@
>!@NH\ >@NH\
>(QWHU@
㹁㹦㹣㹡㹩㸯㸱㸸㹎㹟㹮㹣㹰㹇㹬㹧㹲㹧㹟㹪 3DSHU,QLWLDO0HQX
>&DQFHO@
>!@NH\ >@NH\
>(QWHU@
㹁㹦㹣㹡㹩㸯㸲㸸㹑㹮㹣㹣㹢㹋㹭㹢㹣 6SHHG0RGH0HQX
>&DQFHO@
>!@NH\
AP-74111 - Revision 1.4 209

5.4 Platen Adjustment Menu

In the platen adjustment menu, you can set the temperature of the pre-heater and platen
heater to 42°C.
Parts assembly and adjustment should be done in the condition.
* This item displays platen temperature only.
[>] key [<] key

[Enter] key
PlatenHeater 1
[Cancel] key
[>] key [<] key
[Enter] key
PlatenHeater 2
[Cancel] key
[>] key
If the heater temp. does not reach 42°C
[>] key [<] key

[Enter] key
Platen Heater 1
[Cancel] key
[>] key [<] key
[Enter] key
Platen Heater 2
[Cancel] key
[>] key
If Pla1 reaches 42°C

* Pla2 is a reference value. Though Pla2 does not reach 42°C, Pla1 reaches 42°C and it will
be complete.
Note
 When the heater reaches the specified temperature, a buzzer sounds.
210 AP-74111 - Revision 1.4

5.5 Inspection Menu

In the inspection menu, you can perform various inspections on the circuit boards, sensors,
and fans.
The inspection menu includes the following diagnosis items.
Diagnosis Contents Reference

item
Memory Displays the size of memories installed on the MAIN board Memory Size
5
size assembly. Menu"
Displays the versions of the firmware and MAIN board
assembly.
 Firmware version
Backup parameter version Version
Version 
Menu
 Setting of dip switches
 Revision of MAIN board assembly
 Company code
Operation Used to check the functions of the operation panel keys, LCD, Operation
panel and LED. Panel Menu
Displays the status of the following sensors.
 CR_ORG sensor
 Wiper sensor
 Cover sensor
 Lever sensor
Sensor
Sensor  Head slide sensor
Menu"
 Waste fluid box sensor
 P_EDGE sensor
 P_REAR sensor
 Head transistor thermistor sensor
 Head thermistor sensor
Displays the detected values from the following encoders.
Encoder
Encoder  CR (Carriage)
Menu
 PF (Media feed)
AP-74111 - Revision 1.4 211

Diagnosis Contents Reference

item
Used to check if the following fans operate normally by turning
them ON and OFF.
Fan  Suction fan Fan Menu
 Cooling fan
 Head fan
Used to check the following records. Used to initialize the
serious error history.
History  Maintenance history History Menu
 Serious error history
 Initializing serious error history
Head
Head
Used to check the head-driving waveform. Waveform
waveform
Menu
[<] key
[Enter] key
Ram Capacity Menu
[Cancel] key
[>] key [<] key
[Enter] key
Version Menu
[Cancel] key
[>] key [<] key
[Enter] key
Panel Menu
[Cancel] key
[>] key [<] key
[Enter] key
Sensor Menu
[Cancel] key
[>] key [<] key
[Enter] key
Encoder Menu
[Cancel] key
[>] key [<] key
[Enter] key
Fan Menu
[Cancel] key
[>] key [<] key
[Enter] key
History Menu
[Cancel] key
[>] key [<] key [Enter] key
Head Signal Menu
[Cancel] key
[>] key [<] key
212 AP-74111 - Revision 1.4

5.5.1 Memory Size Menu
This menu displays the size of memories installed on the MAIN board assembly.
[Cancel] key
Test Menu
5
5.5.2 Version Menu
This menu displays the following contents about the firmware and MAIN board assembly.
 Firmware version
 Backup parameter version
 Setting of dip switches of MAIN board assembly
 Revision of MAIN board assembly
 Company code settings
Note
 Settings for the DIP switch on the MAIN board assembly are displayed as
follows:
 ON: 0, OFF: 1
 Switch N°1: LSB
 Switch N°2: MSB
㹁㹦㹣㹡㹩ࠉ㸰㸸㹒㹣㹱㹲
>(QWHU@
㹒㹣㹱㹲㸰㸸㹔㹣㹰㹱㹧㹭㹬
>(QWHU@
>@NH\
㹔㹣㹰㸸㹄㹧㹰㹫ࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉ㸯㸬㸮㸴 )LUPZDUHYHUVLRQ
>!@NH\ >@NH\
㹔㹣㹰㸸㹎㹟㹰㹟㹫㹣㹲㹣㹰ࠉࠉࠉ㸯㸬㸮㸮 %DFNXSSDUDPHWHUYHUVLRQ
>!@NH\ >@NH\
6HWWLQJRI',3VZLWFKHV
㹔㹣㹰㸸㹂㹧㹮㹑㹕ࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉ㸮㹶㸮㸱 RIPDLQERDUGDVVHPEO\
>!@NH\ >@NH\
㹔㹣㹰㸸㹀㹭㹟㹰㹢ࠉ㹐㹣㹴ࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉ㸯㸯 5HYLVLRQRIPDLQERDUGDVVHPEO\
>!@NH\ >@NH\
㹔㹣㹰㸸㹁㹭㹫㹮㹟㹬㹷㹁㹭㹢㹣ࠉ㸮㹶㸮㸯 6HWWLQJRI&RPSDQ\&RGH
>!@NH\
AP-74111 - Revision 1.4 213

5.5.3 Operation Panel Menu
This menu is used to check the functions of the operation panel keys, LCD, and LEDs.
Operation Panel Key Check
When you press a key, the LCD displays the name of the key. To exit the operation panel key
check, press Cancel twice.
LCD Check
The entire LCD screen is black. You can check for any missing dots.
LED Check
The following LEDs light up in the following order. The LCD displays the name of the LED that
is currently illuminated.
 Power lamp
 Data lamp
 High lamp
 Low lamp
 Wave lamp
 Fine & S.Fine lamp
 Strong lamp
 Normal lamp
[Enter]
[Enter]
[<] key Operation Panel Key Check

[Enter] key
[Cancel] key (twice)

[>] key [<] key LCD Check
[Enter] key
[Cancel] key
[>] key [<] key LED Check
[Enter] key
[Cancel] key
[>] key
214 AP-74111 - Revision 1.4

5.5.4 Sensor Menu
This menu displays the sensor status on the operation panel.

If the displayed sensor status does not match the actual machine status, replace or adjust the
relevant sensor referring to the table below.
N° Sensor name Status in Reference

display
1 CR_HP sensor ON / OFF Replacing CR Origin Sensor" 5
2 Waste fluid tank sensor ON / OFF -
3 Wiper sensor ON / OFF -
4 Maintenance cover sensor (L/R) Open / Close -
5 Lever sensor Up / Down Replacing Lever Up Sensor
Replacing P_EDGE Sensor
6 P_EDGE sensor 0 to 255
Assembly
Replacing P_REAR Sensor
7 P_REAR sensor 0 to 255
Assembly
8 Headslide Low / High -
9 Head thermistor ** ºC Replacing Print Head
10 H transistor 1, 2 ** ºC -
Note
 For the following sensors, the sensor sensitivity is displayed in decimal
number.
 P_EDGE sensor
 P_REAR sensor
AP-74111 - Revision 1.4 215

[Enter]
[Enter]
[<] key
CR_HP Sensor
[>] key [<] key
Waste Tank Sensor
[>] key [<] key
Wiper Sensor
[>] key [<] key
Cover Sensor
[>] key [<] key
Maintenance Cover L Sensor
[>] key [<] key
Maintenance Cover R Sensor
[>] key [<] key
Lever Sensor
[>] key [<] key
㧿㨑㨚‫ޓ‬㧤㧦㧱㨐㨓㨑㧭㧰‫ޓޓޓޓޓޓޓ‬㧟 P_EDGE Sensor
[>] key [<] key
㧿㨑㨚‫ޓ‬㧥㧦㧼㨍㨜㨑㨞‫ޓ‬㧾㨑㨍㨞‫ޓ‬㧞㧡㧜 P_REAR Sensor
[>] key [<] key

Head Gap Sensor
[>] key [<] key
Head Sensor
[>] key [<] key

H Transistor 1
[>] key [<] key

H Transistor 2
[>] key
216 AP-74111 - Revision 1.4

5.5.5 Encoder Menu
This menu displays the detected values from the following encoders.
 CR_ENC (Carriage)
 PF_ENC (Media feed)
Note
 For the encoder-detected values, the encoder pulse numbers are displayed in
hexadecimal number.
5
[Enter]
[Enter]
[<] key
CR_ENC
[>] key [<] key
PF_ENC
[>] key
5.5.6 Fan Menu
Used to check if the fans operate normally by turning them ON and OFF.
If selecting this operation, the fans operate as follows:
 Suction fan: Turns to ON
 Cooling fan: Turns to OFF
 Head fan: Turns to ON
If you press Cancel, the suction fan is deactivated and the cooling fan is resumed, and the
display shifts to "Test 6: Fan".
[Enter]
[Enter]
[<] key
[>] key [<] key
[>] key [<] key
[>] key
AP-74111 - Revision 1.4 217

5.5.7 History Menu
Used to check maintenance history and serious error history.

This menu is used to check maintenance history and serious error history and to initialize
serious error history.
[Enter]
[Enter]
[<] key
Maintenance history
[>] key [<] key
Serious error history
[>] key [<] key
Initialization of the serious
[>] key communication
Maintenance History
This displays the past maintenance records on the following components.

 Number of wiping of wiper
 Number of CR motor activation cycles
 Number of PF motor activation cycles
 Number of printed copies
 Number of cleaning cycles
 Discharged amount of head ink (K, C, M, Y)
 Pump count (number of pump wheel cycles)
 Number of lock solenoid downs
Note
 All values of maintenance history are indicated in hexadecimal form.
218 AP-74111 - Revision 1.4

[Enter]
[Enter]
[Enter]
[<] key
Frequenc\ of the wiper blade used
5
[>] key [<] key
CR Motor driving (Unit : Operation count)
(Ink tube reciprocating count and the function)
[>] key [<] key
PF Motor driving (Unit : 220 pulse)
[>] key [<] key

Frequenc\ of printing
[>] key [<] key
Frequenc\ of cleaning
[>] key [<] key
Head 1-A Fire (Unit: Mdots)
[>] key [<] key
Head 1-B Fire (Unit: Mdots)
[>] key [<] key
[>] key [<] key
[>] key [<] key
[>] key [<] key
[>] key [<] key
[>] key [<] key

[>] key [<] key

Frequenc\of the pump operation
(Pump wheel rotation count)
[>] key [<] key
Frequency of the lock solenoid moving down
[>] key
AP-74111 - Revision 1.4 219

Serious Error History
Indicates serious error history.
Note
 The serious error history does not include CPU error.
 The serious error history menu indicates the history up to 64.
[Enter]
[Enter]
[Enter]
[<] key
[>] key [<] key
[>] key [<] key
[>] key [<] key
[>] key [<] key
[<] key
[>] key
220 AP-74111 - Revision 1.4

Error Initialization
Used to initialize the serious error history.
[Enter]
[Enter]
[Enter]
5
[Enter]
5.5.8 Head Waveform Menu
Used to check the head-driving waveform.
Note
 The number of shots can be selected in a range from 1 to 655.
 Magnification can be selected from the range of x1-1000000. Nozzle can be
selected among A to H and ALL.
 This is a function that is not used in field work.
㧯㨔㨑㨏㨗‫ޓ‬㧞㧦㨀㨑㨟㨠
='PVGT?
㨀㨑㨟㨠㧤㧦㧴㨑㨍㨐‫ޓ‬㧿㨕㨓㨚㨍㨘
='PVGT?
=?MG[
㧴㨑㨍㨐㧿㨕㨓㨚㨍㨘㧦‫ޓޓ‬㨂㧿㧰㧝㨐㧙㧸
= ?MG[ =?MG[ ='PVGT?
㧴㨑㨍㨐㧿㨕㨓㨚㨍㨘㧦‫ޓޓ‬㨂㧿㧰㧝㨐㧙㧹㧺㨛㨦㨦㨘㨑㧦‫ޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓ‬㧭
㧴㨑㨍㨐㧿㨕㨓㨚㨍㨘㧦‫ޓޓ‬㨂㧿㧰㧝㨐㧙㧿㧿㧴㧻㨀‫ޓ‬㧯㧻㨁㧺㨀㧦‫ޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓ‬㧝
㧴㨑㨍㨐㧿㨕㨓㨚㨍㨘㧦‫ޓޓ‬㨂㧿㧰㧟㨐㧙㧸㧿㧴㧻㨀㧾㨍㨠㨕㨛㧦‫ޓޓޓޓޓޓ‬㧝㧜㧜
㧴㨑㨍㨐㧿㨕㨓㨚㨍㨘㧦‫ޓޓ‬㨂㧿㧰㧟㨐㧙㧹㧰㧾㧵㨂㧱㧦
= ?MG[ =?MG[
㧴㨑㨍㨐㧿㨕㨓㨚㨍㨘㧦‫ޓޓ‬㨂㧿㧰㧟㨐㧙㧿
= ?MG[
AP-74111 - Revision 1.4 221

5.6 Ink Charging Menu

In the ink charging menu, you can charge ink.
The ink charging menu includes the following items.
Table 5-1
Charging item Contents

InkCharge Performs initial ink charging.
LittleCharge Performs a small amount of ink charging.
[Enter] [Enter]
[<] key
[>] key [<] key
[>] key
222 AP-74111 - Revision 1.4

5.7 Adjustment Menu

In this menu, you can align the printing position and correct the media feed operation.
The adjustment menu includes the following diagnosis menus.

Prints out a printing to check the ink
Head nozzle check discharge performance of the head
nozzles.
Head Nozzle Check
Menu
5
Performs media feed and detects the
Skew check degree of skew in media feed by the Skew Check Menu
sensor.
Prints out a printing to check for print head
slant (horizontal and vertical direction). Head Slant Check
Head slant check
Mechanical adjustment must be performed Menu
as necessary.
Adjusts the print position of VSD3d - small
Volt. adjustment Voltage Adjustment
dot.
Prints out a printing to align the nozzle line
distance (Uni-D) of PG Low and the position
of the repeated printing.
Uni-D 240: 240 cps
Uni-D 320: 320 cps
Uni-D 400: 400 cps
Uni-D 240B: 240 cps (Banner)
Uni-D / Bi-D Uni-D/Bi-D Low/High
adjustment Low Adjustment
Bi-D 240: 240 cps
Bi-D 320: 320 cps
Bi-D 400: 400cps
Bi-D 240B: 240 cps (Banner)
Bi-D 400B: 400cps(Banner)
Prints out a printing to align the nozzle line
distance (Uni-D) of PG High and the
position of the repeated printing.
Uni-D 240: 240 cps
Uni-D 320: 320 cps
Uni-D 400: 400 cps
Uni-D / Bi-D Uni-D/Bi-D Low/High
adjustment High Adjustment
Uni-D 400B: 400cps (Banner)
Bi-D 240: 240 cps
Bi-D 320: 320 cps
Bi-D 400:400 cps
Bi-D 400B: 400cps (Banner)
AP-74111 - Revision 1.4 223


Side margin Side Margin Adjustment
Sets the side margin.
adjustment Menu
Prints out a head nozzle check pattern, an
adjustment
Test printing Test Printing Menu
pattern, adjustment parameters, serious
error history or a dot pattern.
Cleans the tubes and heads using cleaning
HeadWash HeadWash Menu
liquid.
Cleans the tube heads using shipping fluid
HeadWash 2 to maintain the condition at the time of HeadWash Menu 2
shipping.
Software counter Software Counter
Clears various software counters.
initialization Initialization Menu
Used to check the media feed amount per Feed Pitch Check
Feed amount check
band. Menu
Performs solid nozzle print check (colour
Solid print check selection, nozzle selection and print Solid Print Menu
direction selection are available).
224 AP-74111 - Revision 1.4

[Enter]
[<] key
[Enter] key
Nozzle Check Menu
[Cancel] key
[>] key [<] key
[Enter] key
Check Skew Menu
[Cancel] key
5
[>] key [<] key
[Enter] key
Head Slant Menu
[Cancel] key
[>] key [<] key
[Enter] key
Voltage Adjustment Menu
[Cancel] key
[>] key [<] key
[Enter] key
Uni-D/Bi-D Low Adjustment Menu
[Cancel] key
[>] key [<] key
[Enter] key
Uni-D/Bi-D High Adjustment Menu
[Cancel] key
[>] key [<] key
[Enter] key
Side Margin Adjustment Menu
[Cancel] key
[>] key [<] key
[Enter] key
Test Print Menu
[Cancel] key
[>] key [<] key
[Enter] key
Head Wash Menu
[Cancel] key
Software Counter Initialization Menu
[Cancel] key
[>] key [<] key
[Enter] key
Feed Pitch Check Menu
[Cancel] key
Solid Print Menu
[Cancel] key
[>] key
AP-74111 - Revision 1.4 225

5.7.1 Head Nozzle Check Menu
In this menu, you can check if the head nozzles that have been charged can discharge ink
correctly by printing a sample printing. To check the head nozzle, follow the steps below.
Step 1: Set media as necessary.
Step 2: After setting media, the machine prints out head nozzle check patterns in the
following modes.
 1 pass, Uni-D
 PF: 360 dpi
 CR: 360 dpi
Step 3: Check the printed head nozzle check patterns for the following points.
 Ink nozzle discharge amount (omission, discontinuity, meandering)
 Satellite
 T fence
 Nozzle alignment in vertical direction
 Nozzle alignment in horizontal direction
Nozzle check: Prints out the pattern in the order of A to H
Nozzle alignment in vertical direction: Prints out the pattern in the order of A to H
Nozzle alignment in horizontal direction (CW direction): Prints out the pattern in the order of A
to H
226 AP-74111 - Revision 1.4

Nozzle alignment in horizontal direction (CCW direction): Prints out the pattern in the order of
A to H
If any abnormal conditions are found in the ink discharge status of the head nozzles, perform
cleaning.
5
Note
Refer to Feed Pitch Check Menu
After cleaning, make the machine print out head nozzle check patterns again.
㧯㨔㨑㨏㨗‫ޓ‬㧠㧦㧭㨐㨖㨡㨟㨠㨙㨑㨚㨠
='PVGT?
㧭㨐㨖‫ޓ‬㧝㧦㧺㨛㨦㨦㨘㨑㧯㨔㨗
='PVGT?
㧿㨑㨠‫ޓ‬㧼㨍㨜㨑㨞 +HOGFKCKUPQVUGV
/GFKCUGV
㧭㨐㨖㨡㨟㨠㨙㨑㨚㨠‫ޓ‬㧼㨞㨕㨚㨠 &KURNC[FWTKPICFLWUVOGPVRTKPVKPI
(KPKUJRTKPVKPI
= ?MG[
='PVGT?
㧺㨛㨦㨦㨘㨑㧯㨔㨗㧦‫ޓޓ‬㧯㨘㨑㨍㨚㨕㨚㨓
=?MG[ = ?MG[
㧺㨛㨦㨦㨘㨑㧯㨔㨗㧦‫ޓޓޓޓޓ‬㧼㨞㨕㨚㨠㧯㨘㨑㨍㨚㧝㧦㧱㨏㨛㨚㨛㨙㨥
=?MG[ = ?MG[ =?MG[
='PVGT? 㧯㨘㨑㨍㨚㧞㧦㧺㨛㨞㨙㨍㨘
= ?MG[ =?MG[
㧯㨘㨑㨍㨚㧟㧦㧿㨠㨞㨛㨚㨓
= ?MG[
='PVGT?
㧯㨘㨑㨍㨚㨕㨚㨓
AP-74111 - Revision 1.4 227

5.7.2 Skew Check Menu
Feed the paper to check the skew size using sensor.

When you select this item from the Adjustment Menu, the printer feeds the loaded media by
one pass and checks difference of the media edge positions before and after the media feed
detected by the sensor.
Note
 Before performing skew check, ensure that the media is set correctly.
The printer determines the media setting reference position during first
detection of media left edge. Therefore, the media that is not set correctly may
cause errors as below.
 Media error occurs during skew check and printer operation stops.
 During media initial operation after power is ON, "Undefined Paper" frequently
occurs.
[Enter]
[Enter]
0.1 m increments
0.1 m to 10.0 m
[Enter]
If media is not set
Media set
Finish media initialization
Media edge detection finishes normaly
Condition Specification
Roll media 7m 2.5 mm or less
228 AP-74111 - Revision 1.4

5.7.3 Head Slant Check Menu
The printer has 8 nozzle lines per head. This menu adjusts the slant of each nozzle line
evenly.
Check the head slant from a sample printing, and perform mechanical adjustment if
necessary.
Table 5-2 Head Slant Checking Items
Items Contents
5
Head slant in horizontal direction Head slant check in horizontal direction
Head slant in vertical direction Head slant check in vertical direction
[Enter]
[Enter]
[<] key
[>] key [<] key
[>] key
[Enter]
If setting is not in PG-Low

[Enter]
AP-74111 - Revision 1.4 229

Horizontal Direction Checking
This menu prints out a sample printing to check for head slant in the horizontal direction.
To perform head slant check, follow the steps below.
Step 2: After media is set, the printer prints out head slant check patterns in the following
modes.
 1 pass, Uni-D
 PF: 360 dpi, CR: 360 dpi
Step 3: Check the printed head slant check patterns. Checking items are as follows:
 Head slant
 Check the slant at this point.
 Media feed direction
 OK
 Move the head adjusting cam upward.
 Move the head adjusting cam downward.
B
A
20mm
C D E
Step 4: If any head slant is found, perform mechanical adjustment.

 Head Alignment (Horizontal Height)
230 AP-74111 - Revision 1.4

Step 5: After mechanical adjustment, make the machine print out head nozzle check
patterns again.
5
Display during adjustment printing
Finish printing
[<] key
Finish printing
[>] key [<] key

Output pattern
[>] key
AP-74111 - Revision 1.4 231

Vertical Direction Checking
This menu prints out a sample printing to check for head slant in the vertical direction.
To perform head slant check, follow the steps below.
Step 2: After media is set, the machine prints out head slant check patterns in the following
modes.
 1 pass, Uni-D
 PF: 360 dpi, CR: 360 dpi
Step 3: Check the printed head slant check patterns. Checking items are as follows:
 Check the vertical slant angle at this point.
 OK
 Move the vertical-slant adjusting cam to the right.
 Move the vertical-slant adjusting cam to the left.
4-B 4-A 3-B 3-A 2-B 2-A 1-B 1-A
CCW
4-B 4-A 3-B 3-A 2-B 2-A 1-B 1-A
B CW
C D E
232 AP-74111 - Revision 1.4

Step 4: If any head slant is found, perform mechanical adjustment.

 Head Alignment (Vertical Slant)
Step 5: After mechanical adjustment, make the machine print out head nozzle check
patterns again.
5
Finish printing
[<] key
Finish printing
[>] key [<] key

Output pattern
[>] key
AP-74111 - Revision 1.4 233

5.7.4 Voltage Adjustment
Used to adjust the voltage of VSD 3d small dot so that the print position will be corrected.
Check the small dot is on the centre of the middle dots in the CR direction.
When adjusting, change the voltage up to ±5V (0.1V increment) considering the current
voltage as a basis.
Note
 The initial value is set to values that are suited for the manufacturer genuine
ink.
Items Contents
240 CW Adjusts the VSD 3d-s at 240 cps / CW printing.
240 CCW Adjusts the VSD 3d-S at 240 cps / CCW printing.
320 CW Adjusts the VSD 3d-S at 320 cps / CW printing.
㹁㹦㹣㹡㹩ࠉ㸲㸸㸿㹢㹨㹳㹱㹲㹫㹣㹬㹲
>(QWHU@
㸿㹢㹨ࠉ㸲㸸㹔㹭㹪㹲㸬㹍㹤㹤㹱㹣㹲
>(QWHU@
>!@NH\
㸿㹢㹨㸬㹔㹭㹪㹲㸯㸸㸰㸲㸮ࠉ㹁㹕
>@NH\ >!@NH\
㸿㹢㹨㸬㹔㹭㹪㹲㸰㸸㸰㸲㸮ࠉ㹁㹁㹕
>@NH\ >!@NH\
㸿㹢㹨㸬㹔㹭㹪㹲㸱㸸㸱㸰㸮ࠉ㹁㹕
>@NH\ >!@NH\
㸿㹢㹨㸬㹔㹭㹪㹲㸲㸸㸱㸰㸮ࠉ㹁㹁㹕
>@NH\ >!@NH\
㸿㹢㹨㸬㹔㹭㹪㹲㸳㸸㸲㸮㸮ࠉ㹁㹕
>@NH\ >!@NH\
㸿㹢㹨㸬㹔㹭㹪㹲㸴㸸㸲㸮㸮ࠉ㹁㹁㹕
>@NH\
234 AP-74111 - Revision 1.4

The following figure shows a case for 240 CW.
[Enter] key
If media is not set
Media set
If head gap is PG-Low
Change head gap (to PG-Low)
Finish warm-up
If the temperature of the pre-heater and
platen heater is below 42 C
* Pressing [Cancel] key stops control and start printing
5
Finish printing
Press [Setting/Value+] or [Setting/Value-] key
to change unit to pulse
Volt range: -5V to 5V (0.1V)
VH3L-1 to VH3L-4
VH3S-1 to VH3S-4
Print pattern: 240 CW
2B 2A 1B 1A 2B 2A 1B 1A
CW
240CPS A
AP-74111 - Revision 1.4 235

 Print direction
 Adjust the voltage so that the small dot printed positions (shown as dot-line) are the same
with the middle dot printed positions (shown as solid line) in the CR direction.
 Executed adjustment item is printed like this.
Items Speed
240 CW CW 240 cps
320 CW CW 320 cps
240 CCW CCW 240 cps
320 CCW CCW 320 cps
400 CW CW 400 cps
400 CCW CCW 400 cps
* Print pattern: Uni-D, 2 pass, 1A to 2B print

1st pass: prints middle dot
2nd pass: prints small dot
5.7.5 Uni-D/Bi-D Low/High Adjustment
Adjusts the gap of the print heads (in the CR moving direction) when the head is in the PG
Low/High and the print position of the head in repeatability printing.
To adjust, perform printing in repeatability printing and correct CW and CCW printing
positions by inputting parameters.
* Check the printing at the origin, centre and the opposite side to origin, and perform
adjustment so that the gap is even.
Adjustment items are shown below.
Table 5-3 Uni-D / Bi-D Menu Items
Item Contents
Uni-D 240 Adjusts CW at 240 cps. PG Low or High
Uni-D 240B Adjusts CW at 240 cps-Banner. PG Low or High
Bi-D 240 Adjusts Bi-D at 240 cps. PG Low or High
236 AP-74111 - Revision 1.4

Table 5-3 Uni-D / Bi-D Menu Items
Item Contents
Bi-D 240B Adjusts Bi-D at 240 cps-Banner. PG Low or High
Table 5-4 Uni-D / Bi-D Adjustment Items 5

Item Contents
Set up Sets the selected parameter.
Print (when selecting Prints pattern according to the selected item with the
Bi-D, displays Print 1) current parameter.
Prints pattern according to the selected item with the

Print 2 (when
current parameter, plus with the values of ±2 / ±4 / ±6 /
selecting Bi-D,
±8 to the current parameter.
displays Print 2)
Check the gap of those printed patterns.
The actual procedure is as follows.

Step 2: After that, the printer starts printing automatically.
AP-74111 - Revision 1.4 237

Step 3: Check the printed pattern of CW adjustment.

(The following shows a case for Uni-D 240 Low Print.)
The printer prints the pattern in the order of 1A to 4B.
Uni-Lo
240cps
A
Banner
- + - + - + - + - + - + - + - +
4B 4A 3B 3A 2B 2A 1B 1A
B C
 A: Media feed direction
 B: Adjust the setting value so that these point matches.
 C: Executed adjustment item is printed like this.
Uni-D 240: Uni-Lo/Hi 240 cps
Uni-D 240B: Uni-Lo/Hi 240 cps-Banner
* Either “Lo“ or “Hi“ is displayed where explained as “Lo/Hi“ above.
(The following shows a case for Bi-D 240 Low Print 1.)
The printer prints the pattern by using 2A nozzle line.
238 AP-74111 - Revision 1.4

* Both Uni-D / Bi-D High should be adjusted in the same procedure.
Bi-Lo
240cps
A
Banner
5
- + - + - + - + - + - + - + - +
2A 2A 2A 2A 2A 2A 2A 2A
B C
 A: Media feed direction
 B: Adjust the setting value so that these point matches.
 C: Executed adjustment item is printed like this.
Bi-D 240: Bi-Lo/Hi 240 cps
Bi-D 240B: Bi-Lo/Hi 240 cps-Banner
AP-74111 - Revision 1.4 239

(The following shows a case for Bi-D 240B Low Print 2.)
The printer prints the pattern by using 2A nozzle line.
Bi-Lo
240cps A
Banner

% $ % $ % $ % $
B
C
A: Media feed direction
B: Adjust the setting value so that these point matches.
C: Executed adjustment item is printed like this.
Bi-D 400:Bi-Lo/Hi 400 cps
240 AP-74111 - Revision 1.4

Check the printing at the origin, centre and the opposite side to origin, and perform
adjustment so that the gap is even.
If any abnormal conditions are found, identify the gap of the print positions and enter it as the
CW adjustment parameter.
After that, print test pattern again as necessary.
(The following shows a case for Uni-D 240.)
㧯㨔㨑㨏㨗㧠㧦㧭㨐㨖㨡㨟㨠㨙㨑㨚㨠
㧭㨐㨖‫ޓ‬㧡㧦㨁㨚㨕㧛㧮㨕‫ޓޓޓޓޓ‬㧸㨛㨣
='PVGT?
='PVGT?
㧭㨐㨖‫ޓ‬㧢㧦㨁㨚㨕㧛㧮㨕‫ޓޓޓޓ‬㧴㨕㨓㨔 5
=?MG[
㧸㨛㨣㧝㧦㨁㨚㨕́㧰‫ޓ‬㧞㧠㧜
= ?MG[ =?MG[
㧸㨛㨣㧞㧦㨁㨚㨕́㧰‫ޓ‬㧟㧞㧜
= ?MG[ =?MG[
㧸㨛㨣㧟㧦㨁㨚㨕́㧰‫ޓ‬㧠㧜㧜
= ?MG[ =?MG[
㧸㨛㨣㧠㧦㨁㨚㨕́㧰‫ޓ‬㧞㧠㧜㧮 ='PVGT?
= ?MG[ =?MG[
㧸㨛㨣㧡㧦㨁㨚㨕́㧰‫ޓ‬㧟㧞㧜㧮
= ?MG[ =?MG[
㧸㨛㨣㧢㧦㨁㨚㨕́㧰‫ޓ‬㧠㧜㧜㧮
= ?MG[ =?MG[
㧸㨛㨣㧣㧦㧮㨕́㧰‫ޓ‬㧞㧠㧜
= ?MG[ =?MG[
㧸㨛㨣㧤㧦㧮㨕́㧰‫ޓ‬㧟㧞㧜
= ?MG[ =?MG[
㧸㨛㨣㧥㧦㧮㨕́㧰‫ޓ‬㧠㧜㧜
= ?MG[ =?MG[
㧸㨛㨣㧝㧜㧦㧮㨕́㧰‫ޓ‬㧞㧠㧜㧮
= ?MG[ =?MG[
㧸㨛㨣㧝㧝㧦㧮㨕́㧰‫ޓ‬㧟㧞㧜㧮
= ?MG[ =?MG[
㧸㨛㨣㧝㧞㧦㧮㨕́㧰‫ޓ‬㧠㧜㧜㧮
= ?MG[
=?MG[
㨁㨚㨕㧰‫ޓ‬㧞㧠㧜㧦㧿㨑㨠㨡㨜
= ?MG[
㨁㨚㨕㧰‫ޓ‬㧞㧠㧜㧦㧼㨞㨕㨚㨠
AP-74111 - Revision 1.4 241

Enter parameters when Bi-D is selected as follows.

(The following shows a case for Bi-D 240.)
[>] key
[<] key [>] key
[<] key [>] key
[<] key
 The following shows a case for “Print” (or Print 1 / Print 2) is selected.
* Common for Bi-D, Uni-D
or select “Print2”
If media is not set

Media set
If head gap is PG-High
Change head gap (to Low)
If the temperature of the preheater and
platen heater is below 42 C
* Pressing [Cancel] key stops control and start printing
Displayed during adjustment printing

Finish printing
Back to Uni-D/Bi-D top menu
242 AP-74111 - Revision 1.4

 The following shows a case for “Set up” is selected (Uni-D 240).
Enter parameters when Uni-D is selected as follows.
㨁㨚㨕࡯㧰‫ޓ‬㧞㧠㧜㧦㧿㨑㨠㨡㨜
=?MG[
㨁㨚㨕㧙㧰‫ޓ‬㧞㧠㧜‫ޓ‬۲㧝‫ޓ‬㧝㧭㧦‫ޓޓޓ‬㧜 2TGUU=5GVVKPI8CNWG ?QT=5GVVKPI8CNWG?MG[
VQEJCPIGVJGUGVVKPIXCNWG
= ?MG[ =?MG[ RWNUGKPEJ
㨁㨚㨕㧙㧰‫ޓ‬㧞㧠㧜‫ޓ‬۲㧝‫ޓ‬㧝㧮㧦‫ޓޓޓ‬㧜
= ?MG[ =?MG[
2WNUGTCPIGVQ
̌#̍KUPQVFKURNC[GFDGECWUGVJGRQUKVKQPKU
5
TGHGTTGFCUVJGXCUKUYJGPCFLWUVKPI
㨁㨚㨕㧙㧰‫ޓ‬㧞㧠㧜‫ޓ‬۲㧝‫ޓ‬㧞㧮㧦‫ޓޓޓ‬㧜
̌̍KUFKURNC[GFKH*KIJOGPWKUUGNGEVGF
= ?MG[ =?MG[
#NUQ̌$̍QŤ$̍QŤ$̍KUFKURNC[GF
㨁㨚㨕㧙㧰‫ޓ‬㧞㧠㧜‫ޓ‬۲㧝‫ޓ‬㧟㧭㧦‫ޓޓޓ‬㧜 CEEQTFKPIVQVJGOQFGUGNGEVKQP
= ?MG[ =?MG[
㨁㨚㨕㧙㧰‫ޓ‬㧞㧠㧜‫ޓ‬۲㧝‫ޓ‬㧟㧮㧦‫ޓޓޓ‬㧜
= ?MG[ =?MG[
㨁㨚㨕㧙㧰‫ޓ‬㧞㧠㧜‫ޓ‬۲㧝‫ޓ‬㧠㧭㧦‫ޓޓޓ‬㧜
= ?MG[ =?MG[
㨁㨚㨕㧙㧰‫ޓ‬㧞㧠㧜‫ޓ‬۲㧝‫ޓ‬㧠㧮㧦‫ޓޓޓ‬㧜
= ?MG[ =?MG[
='PVGT?
㨁㨚㨕㧰‫ޓ‬㧱㨚㨐㧚 4GVWTPUVQ̌7PK&̍UGVWROGPW
= ?MG[
(The following shows a case for “Bi-D 240 - Setup” is selected.)

[<] key Press [Setting/Value+] or [Setting/Value-] key
to change unit to pulse‫ޓ‬
1 pulse = 1/2880 inch
[>] key [<] key Pulse range: -400 VQ400
Back to Uni㨺D/Bi-D Top menu
[>] key
Note
 The initial value is set to values that are suited for the manufacturer genuine
ink.
AP-74111 - Revision 1.4 243

5.7.6 Side Margin Adjustment Menu
This menu is used to adjust the printing margins.

To adjust the margins, follow the steps below.
Step 2: After setting media, the detected width of the set media is displayed.
Step 3: After setting media, the printer prints out band feed correction adjustment patterns
and cuts the media in the following modes.
 Black, 1 pass, Uni-D, 360 dpi
* If "check" is selected, black replaces magenta.
Step 4: Check the printed side margin adjustment patterns for the measurement.
TOP
 1: Side margin
 2: Media feed direction
Step 5: Enter each measured value as the parameter.
(Input range: 0.0 to 20.0 mm (0.1 mm increments))
[Enter]
[Enter]
Press [Cancel] key to go back to
̌Adj. 7 SideMargin̍ Menu
[Enter]
Press [Setting/value+] or [Setting/value-] key
to select initialize or check
[Enter]
After printing
Side Margin: 0.1㨙㨙 increments
Range: 0.0 - 20.0 mm
244 AP-74111 - Revision 1.4

5.7.7 Test Printing Menu
In this menu, you can print out adjustment patterns for checking various adjustment items.
Step 2: After media is set, the machine prints out the following test printings.
 Print1: Adjust ALL: Prints adjustment patterns.


Print2: Parameter ALL: Prints adjustment parameters.
Print3: Error history: Pints the serious error history and smart chip log.
5
Step 3: Press the Enter to start the selected test printing.
[Enter]
[Enter]
[<] key Printing adjustment pattern
[Enter] key
[>] key [<] key
[>] key
AP-74111 - Revision 1.4 245

5.7.8 HeadWash Menu
Used to purge ink and clean the heads before print head replacement.
Step 1: Press Enter to determine the Head Cleaning Menu.
Step 2: Remove all ink cartridges.
Step 3: Press Enter to discharge ink.
Step 4: After discharging ink, install the head cleaning jig.
Step 5: Press Enter to charge cleaning liquid.
Step 6: After charging cleaning liquid, remove the head cleaning jig.
Remove all cartridges and press [Enter] key to discharge ink
Finish Ink Discharge
Set cleaning jig and press [Enter] key to charge shipping liquid
After shipping liquid is charged
Remove cleaning jig and press [Enter] key to discharge

shipping liquid
246 AP-74111 - Revision 1.4

5.7.9 HeadWash Menu 2
Maintain the conditions of the heads at the time of shipping by cleaning tubes and heads with
shipping fluid.
* This function is not usually used in maintenance work.
Go to “Adj 10: HeadWash2“ after charging shipping fluid.
㨇Enter㨉
5
㨇Enter㨉
Insert cleaning cartridge, then press [Enter] key to fill shipping fluid
After shipping fluid is filled
Remove the cleaning cartridge,

then press [Enter] key to discharge the shipping fluid
5.7.10 Software Counter Initialization Menu
Used to initialize the software counters such as the ink consumption counter.
Note
 The counters are initialized before delivery. Do not initialize them during
maintenance.
The software counters that can be initialized through this menu are as follows.
Counter Initial
value
Ink consumption counter K 0
Ink consumption counter C 0
Ink consumption counter M 0
Ink consumption counter Y 0
Cumulative print timer 0
User not-filled flag Not-filled
Not-filled flag Not-filled
AP-74111 - Revision 1.4 247

Pressing Enter performs the software counter initialization. Pressing Cancel cancels the
initialization.
[Enter]
[Enter]
Adjustment Menu
[Enter]
after a few seconds
5.7.11 Feed Pitch Check Menu
In this menu, you can check the media feed amount for one band by reviewing a sample
printing. There are no adjustment items.
To check the feed pitch, follow the steps below.
Step 2: Select "Adj 12: SendPitch".
Step 3: Select the feed pitch.
Step 4: Pattern 1 is printed as shown below.
Feed amount
for one band
A: Media feed direction
[Enter]
[Enter]
[<] key [Enter] key
[>] key [<] key Finish Printing or [Cancel] key
[>] key [<] key
[>] key [<] key
[>] key [<] key
[>] key
248 AP-74111 - Revision 1.4

5.7.12 Solid Print Menu
Used to print solid print patterns with head on both ends.

 A printed pattern is as follows.
5mm B
5
Specified color nozzles of both series A and B
Nozzles for series B only A
Nozzles for series A only
5mm 20mm
 A: Media feed direction

 B: 100% printing
Print the pattern in the order of 1A&1B, 1B&1B, 1A&1A.
[Enter]
[Enter]
[<] key
Press [>] or [<] key to select color to check
[>] key [<] key
[>] key [<] key
[>] key [<] key
[>] key
[Enter] key
[<] key
[>] key [<] key
ALL: All nozzles
ODD: Odd numbered nozzles
EVEN: Even numbered nozzles
[>] key [<] key
[>] key
[Enter] key
[<] key
[>] key [<] key CW: Eject ink when CW scanning
CCW: Eject ink when CCW scanning
[>] key
AP-74111 - Revision 1.4 249

5.8 Cleaning Menu

In this menu, you can clean ink from the print heads.
The cleaning menu includes the following diagnosis items.
Diagnosis item Contents

Economy Performs economy cleaning
Normal Performs normal cleaning
Strong Performs strong cleaning
[<] key [Enter] key

Economy Cleaning
[Cancel] key
Normal Cleaning
[Cancel] key
[>] key [<] key
[Enter] key
Strong Cleaning
[Cancel] key
[>] key
[Enter]
250 AP-74111 - Revision 1.4

5.9 Sample Printing Menu

This menu prints out a sample printing.
The sample printing menu includes the following items.

Adjust ALL Prints adjustment patterns.
Parameter ALL
Error history
Prints out the set values of various adjustment items.
Prints the serious error history and smart chip log.
5
Note
 If you have not registered the serial number of the machine, you must enter the
number before you can start the adjustment variable printing.
[Enter]
[<] key Adjust Pattern printing

[Enter] key
[>] key [<] key Adjust Parameter printing

[Enter] key
[>] key [<] key Error record printing

[Enter] key
[>] key [<] key
Note
 This is the same as the Test Printing Menu.
AP-74111 - Revision 1.4 251

 Sample printing (adjust ALL)

㸿㹢㹨㹳㹱㹲ࠉ㹎㹟㹰㹟㹫㹣㹲㹣㹰㹱
㹌㹭㸬 ࠉࠉ㹂㹟㹲㹣㸰㸮㸮㸶㸭㸮㸲㸭㸯㸯㹁㹣㹪㹱㹧㹳㹱ࠉࠉ㸯㸴ࠉࠉ
㹌㹟㹫㹣㹔㹣㹰ࠉ㸯㸬㸮㸯㹂㹧㹮㹱㹵ࠉ㸮㸱㹦
ࠉࠉ㹆㹣㹟㹢ࠉ㹐㹟㹬㹩ࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉ㸻ࠉ㸱㸵㸯㸵㸮㸱㸳㸳㸱㸷㸳㸮㸳㸰㹏㹕㹓㹕㹔㹕㹕㹏㹉㸮㹆
ࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉ㹙㸯㹛ࠉࠉࠉࠉ㹙㸰㹛ࠉࠉࠉࠉ㹙㸱㹛ࠉࠉࠉࠉ㹙㸲㹛
㸨㹔㹭㹪㹲㸬ࠉ㸰㸲㸮ࠉࠉ㹁㹕ࠉ㸫㹔㹆㸱㹊㸫ࠉࠉ㸻ࠉ㸫㸯㸬㸮㹔ࠉࠉ㸫㸯㸬㸮㹔ࠉࠉ㸫㸯㸬㸮㹔ࠉࠉ㸫㸯㸬㸮㹔
㸨㹔㹭㹪㹲㸬ࠉ㸰㸲㸮ࠉ㹁㹁㹕ࠉ㸫㹔㹆㸱㹊㸫ࠉࠉ㸻ࠉࠉ㸮㸬㸮㹔ࠉࠉࠉ㸮㸬㸮㹔ࠉࠉࠉ㸮㸬㸮㹔ࠉࠉࠉ㸮㸬㸮㹔
㸨㹔㹭㹪㹲㸬ࠉ㸱㸰㸮ࠉࠉ㹁㹕ࠉ㸫㹔㹆㸱㹊㸫ࠉࠉ㸻ࠉ㸫㸯㸬㸮㹔ࠉࠉ㸫㸯㸬㸮㹔ࠉࠉ㸫㸯㸬㸮㹔ࠉࠉ㸫㸯㸬㸮㹔
㸨㹔㹭㹪㹲㸬ࠉ㸱㸰㸮ࠉ㹁㹁㹕ࠉ㸫㹔㹆㸱㹊㸫ࠉࠉ㸻ࠉࠉ㸮㸬㸮㹔ࠉࠉࠉ㸮㸬㸮㹔ࠉࠉࠉ㸮㸬㸮㹔ࠉࠉࠉ㸮㸬㸮㹔
㸨㹔㹭㹪㹲㸬ࠉ㸲㸮㸮ࠉࠉ㹁㹕ࠉ㸫㹔㹆㸱㹊㸫ࠉࠉ㸻ࠉ㸫㸯㸬㸮㹔ࠉࠉ㸫㸯㸬㸮㹔ࠉࠉ㸫㸯㸬㸮㹔ࠉࠉ㸫㸯㸬㸮㹔
㸨㹔㹭㹪㹲㸬ࠉ㸲㸮㸮ࠉ㹁㹁㹕ࠉ㸫㹔㹆㸱㹊㸫ࠉࠉ㸻ࠉࠉ㸮㸬㸮㹔ࠉࠉࠉ㸮㸬㸮㹔ࠉࠉࠉ㸮㸬㸮㹔ࠉࠉࠉ㸮㸬㸮㹔
㸨㹔㹭㹪㹲㸬ࠉ㸰㸲㸮ࠉࠉ㹁㹕ࠉ㸫㹔㹆㸱㹑㸫ࠉࠉ㸻ࠉ㸫㸯㸬㸮㹔ࠉࠉ㸫㸯㸬㸮㹔ࠉࠉ㸫㸯㸬㸮㹔ࠉࠉ㸫㸯㸬㸮㹔
㸨㹔㹭㹪㹲㸬ࠉ㸰㸲㸮ࠉ㹁㹁㹕ࠉ㸫㹔㹆㸱㹑㸫ࠉࠉ㸻ࠉࠉ㸰㸬㸮㹔ࠉࠉࠉ㸰㸬㸮㹔ࠉࠉࠉ㸱㸬㸮㹔ࠉࠉࠉ㸱㸬㸮㹔
㸨㹔㹭㹪㹲㸬ࠉ㸱㸰㸮ࠉࠉ㹁㹕ࠉ㸫㹔㹆㸱㹑㸫ࠉࠉ㸻ࠉ㸫㸯㸬㸮㹔ࠉࠉ㸫㸯㸬㸮㹔ࠉࠉ㸫㸯㸬㸮㹔ࠉࠉ㸫㸯㸬㸮㹔
㸨㹔㹭㹪㹲㸬ࠉ㸱㸰㸮ࠉࠉ㹁㹕ࠉ㸫㹔㹆㸱㹑㸫ࠉࠉ㸻ࠉࠉ㸰㸬㸮㹔ࠉࠉࠉ㸰㸬㸮㹔ࠉࠉࠉ㸱㸬㸮㹔ࠉࠉࠉ㸱㸬㸮㹔
㸨㹔㹭㹪㹲㸬ࠉ㸲㸮㸮ࠉࠉ㹁㹕ࠉ㸫㹔㹆㸱㹑㸫ࠉࠉ㸻ࠉ㸫㸯㸬㸮㹔ࠉࠉ㸫㸯㸬㸮㹔ࠉࠉ㸫㸯㸬㸮㹔ࠉࠉ㸫㸯㸬㸮㹔
㸨㹔㹭㹪㹲㸬ࠉ㸲㸮㸮ࠉ㹁㹁㹕ࠉ㸫㹔㹆㸱㹑㸫ࠉࠉ㸻ࠉࠉ㸰㸬㸮㹔ࠉࠉࠉ㸰㸬㸮㹔ࠉࠉࠉ㸱㸬㸮㹔ࠉࠉࠉ㸱㸬㸮㹔
ࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉ㹙㸯㹛ࠉࠉࠉࠉ㹙㸰㹛ࠉࠉࠉࠉ㹙㸱㹛ࠉࠉࠉࠉ㹙㸲㹛
㸨㹓㹬㹧㹂ࠉ㹆㹣㹟㹢ࠉ㸿ࠉ㸰㸲㸮ࠉࠉ㸫㸡㸯㸫ࠉ㸻ࠉࠉࠉࠉ㸮ࠉࠉࠉࠉ㸫㸫ࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉ㸮ࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉ㸮
㸨㹓㹬㹧㹂ࠉ㹆㹣㹟㹢ࠉ㹀ࠉ㸰㸲㸮ࠉࠉ㸫㸡㸯㸫ࠉ㸻ࠉࠉࠉࠉ㸮ࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉ㸮ࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉ㸮ࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉ㸮
㸨㹓㹬㹧㹂ࠉ㹆㹣㹟㹢ࠉ㸿ࠉ㸰㸲㸮ࠉࠉ㸫㸡㸰㸫ࠉ㸻ࠉࠉࠉࠉ㸮ࠉࠉࠉࠉ㸫㸫ࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉ㸮ࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉ㸮
㸨㹓㹬㹧㹂ࠉ㹆㹣㹟㹢ࠉ㹀ࠉ㸰㸲㸮ࠉࠉ㸫㸡㸰㸫ࠉ㸻ࠉࠉࠉࠉ㸮ࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉ㸮ࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉ㸮ࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉ㸮
㸨㹓㹬㹧㹂ࠉ㹆㹣㹟㹢ࠉ㸿ࠉ㸱㸰㸮ࠉࠉ㸫㸡㸯㸫ࠉ㸻ࠉࠉࠉࠉ㸮ࠉࠉࠉࠉ㸫㸫ࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉ㸮ࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉ㸮
㸨㹓㹬㹧㹂ࠉ㹆㹣㹟㹢ࠉ㹀ࠉ㸱㸰㸮ࠉࠉ㸫㸡㸯㸫ࠉ㸻ࠉࠉࠉࠉ㸮ࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉ㸮ࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉ㸮ࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉ㸮
㸨㹓㹬㹧㹂ࠉ㹆㹣㹟㹢ࠉ㸿ࠉ㸱㸰㸮ࠉࠉ㸫㸡㸰㸫ࠉ㸻ࠉࠉࠉࠉ㸮ࠉࠉࠉࠉ㸫㸫ࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉ㸮ࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉ㸮
㸨㹓㹬㹧㹂ࠉ㹆㹣㹟㹢ࠉ㹀ࠉ㸱㸰㸮ࠉࠉ㸫㸡㸰㸫ࠉ㸻ࠉࠉࠉࠉ㸮ࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉ㸮ࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉ㸮ࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉ㸮
㸨㹓㹬㹧㹂ࠉ㹆㹣㹟㹢ࠉ㸿ࠉ㸲㸮㸮ࠉࠉ㸫㸡㸯㸫ࠉ㸻ࠉࠉࠉࠉ㸮ࠉࠉࠉࠉ㸫㸫ࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉ㸮ࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉ㸮
㸨㹓㹬㹧㹂ࠉ㹆㹣㹟㹢ࠉ㹀ࠉ㸲㸮㸮ࠉࠉ㸫㸡㸯㸫ࠉ㸻ࠉࠉࠉࠉ㸮ࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉ㸮ࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉ㸮ࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉ㸮
㸨㹓㹬㹧㹂ࠉ㹆㹣㹟㹢ࠉ㸿ࠉ㸲㸮㸮ࠉࠉ㸫㸡㸰㸫ࠉ㸻ࠉࠉࠉࠉ㸮ࠉࠉࠉࠉ㸫㸫ࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉ㸮ࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉ㸮
㸨㹓㹬㹧㹂ࠉ㹆㹣㹟㹢ࠉ㹀ࠉ㸲㸮㸮ࠉࠉ㸫㸡㸰㸫ࠉ㸻ࠉࠉࠉࠉ㸮ࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉ㸮ࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉ㸮ࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉ㸮
㸨㹓㹬㹧㹂ࠉ㹆㹣㹟㹢ࠉ㸿ࠉ㸰㸲㸮㹀ࠉ㸫㸡㸯㸫ࠉ㸻ࠉࠉࠉࠉ㸮ࠉࠉࠉࠉ㸫㸫ࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉ㸮ࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉ㸮
㸨㹓㹬㹧㹂ࠉ㹆㹣㹟㹢ࠉ㹀ࠉ㸰㸲㸮㹀ࠉ㸫㸡㸯㸫ࠉ㸻ࠉࠉࠉࠉ㸮ࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉ㸮ࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉ㸮ࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉ㸮
㸨㹓㹬㹧㹂ࠉ㹆㹣㹟㹢ࠉ㸿ࠉ㸰㸲㸮㹀ࠉ㸫㸡㸰㸫ࠉ㸻ࠉࠉࠉࠉ㸮ࠉࠉࠉࠉ㸫㸫ࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉ㸮ࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉ㸮
㸨㹓㹬㹧㹂ࠉ㹆㹣㹟㹢ࠉ㹀ࠉ㸰㸲㸮㹀ࠉ㸫㸡㸰㸫ࠉ㸻ࠉࠉࠉࠉ㸮ࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉ㸮ࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉ㸮ࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉ㸮
㸨㹓㹬㹧㹂ࠉ㹆㹣㹟㹢ࠉ㸿ࠉ㸱㸰㸮㹀ࠉ㸫㸡㸯㸫ࠉ㸻ࠉࠉࠉࠉ㸮ࠉࠉࠉࠉ㸫㸫ࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉ㸮ࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉ㸮
㸨㹓㹬㹧㹂ࠉ㹆㹣㹟㹢ࠉ㹀ࠉ㸱㸰㸮㹀ࠉ㸫㸡㸯㸫ࠉ㸻ࠉࠉࠉࠉ㸮ࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉ㸮ࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉ㸮ࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉ㸮
㸨㹓㹬㹧㹂ࠉ㹆㹣㹟㹢ࠉ㸿ࠉ㸱㸰㸮㹀ࠉ㸫㸡㸯㸫ࠉ㸻ࠉࠉࠉࠉ㸮ࠉࠉࠉࠉ㸫㸫ࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉ㸮ࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉ㸮
㸨㹓㹬㹧㹂ࠉ㹆㹣㹟㹢ࠉ㹀ࠉ㸱㸰㸮㹀ࠉ㸫㸡㸯㸫ࠉ㸻ࠉࠉࠉࠉ㸮ࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉ㸮ࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉ㸮ࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉ㸮
㸨㹓㹬㹧㹂ࠉ㹆㹣㹟㹢ࠉ㸿ࠉ㸲㸮㸮㹀ࠉ㸫㸡㸯㸫ࠉ㸻ࠉࠉࠉࠉ㸮ࠉࠉࠉࠉ㸫㸫ࠉࠉ㸮ࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉ㸮
㸨㹓㹬㹧㹂ࠉ㹆㹣㹟㹢ࠉ㹀ࠉ㸲㸮㸮㹀ࠉ㸫㸡㸯㸫ࠉ㸻ࠉࠉࠉࠉ㸮ࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉ㸮ࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉ㸮ࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉ㸮
㸨㹓㹬㹧㹂ࠉ㹆㹣㹟㹢ࠉ㸿ࠉ㸲㸮㸮㹀ࠉ㸫㸡㸰㸫ࠉ㸻ࠉࠉࠉࠉ㸮ࠉࠉࠉࠉ㸫㸫ࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉ㸮ࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉ㸮
㸨㹓㹬㹧㹂ࠉ㹆㹣㹟㹢ࠉ㹀ࠉ㸲㸮㸮㹀ࠉ㸫㸡㸰㸫ࠉ㸻ࠉࠉࠉࠉ㸮ࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉ㸮ࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉ㸮ࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉ㸮
ࠉ㹀㹧㸫㹂ࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉ㸰㸲㸮ࠉࠉ㸫㸡㸯㸫ࠉ㸻ࠉࠉ㸫㸰㸶
ࠉ㹀㹧㸫㹂ࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉ㸰㸲㸮ࠉࠉ㸫㸡㸰㸫ࠉ㸻ࠉࠉ㸫㸲㸶
ࠉ㹀㹧㸫㹂ࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉ㸱㸰㸮ࠉࠉ㸫㸡㸯㸫ࠉ㸻ࠉࠉ㸫㸰㸶
ࠉ㹀㹧㸫㹂ࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉ㸱㸰㸮ࠉࠉ㸫㸡㸰㸫ࠉ㸻ࠉࠉ㸫㸲㸶
ࠉ㹀㹧㸫㹂ࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉ㸲㸮㸮ࠉࠉ㸫㸡㸯㸫ࠉ㸻ࠉࠉ㸫㸰㸶
ࠉ㹀㹧㸫㹂ࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉ㸲㸮㸮ࠉࠉ㸫㸡㸯㸫ࠉ㸻ࠉࠉ㸫㸲㸶
ࠉ㹀㹧㸫㹂ࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉ㸰㸲㸮㹀ࠉ㸫㸡㸯㸫ࠉ㸻ࠉࠉ㸫㸰㸶
ࠉ㹀㹧㸫㹂ࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉ㸰㸲㸮㹀ࠉ㸫㸡㸰㸫ࠉ㸻ࠉࠉ㸫㸲㸶
ࠉ㹀㹧㸫㹂ࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉ㸱㸰㸮㹀ࠉ㸫㸡㸯㸫ࠉ㸻ࠉࠉ㸫㸰㸶
ࠉ㹀㹧㸫㹂ࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉ㸱㸰㸮㹀ࠉ㸫㸡㸰㸫ࠉ㸻ࠉࠉ㸫㸲㸶
ࠉ㹀㹧㸫㹂ࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉ㸲㸮㸮㹀ࠉ㸫㸡㸯㸫ࠉ㸻ࠉࠉ㸫㸰㸶
ࠉ㹀㹧㸫㹂ࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉ㸲㸮㸮㹀ࠉ㸫㸡㸯㸫ࠉ㸻ࠉࠉ㸫㸲㸶
252 AP-74111 - Revision 1.4

㹑㹧㹢㹣ࠉ㹋㹟㹰㹥㹧㹬ࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉ㸻ࠉ㸳㸬㸮㸮㹫㹫
㸨㹁㹭㹫㹮㹟㹬㹷ࠉ㹁㹭㹢㹣ࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉ㸻ࠉ㸮㸯
㸨㹑㹣㹰㹴㹭ࠉ㸰㸲㸮ࠉ㹁㹵ࠉࠉࠉ㹥㹮ࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉ㸻ࠉ㸮㹶㸰㸶㸮㸮
㸨㹑㹣㹰㹴㹭ࠉ㸰㸲㸮ࠉ㹁㹵ࠉࠉࠉ㹥㹧ࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉ㸻ࠉ㸮㹶㸮㸮㸳㸮
㸨㹑㹣㹰㹴㹭ࠉ㸰㸲㸮ࠉ㹁㹵ࠉࠉࠉ㹥㹪㹮㹤ࠉࠉࠉ㸻ࠉ㸰㸰㸶
㸨㹑㹣㹰㹴㹭ࠉ㸰㸲㸮ࠉ㹁㹵ࠉࠉࠉ㹱㹡㹟㹪㹣ࠉࠉ㸻ࠉ㸯㸱
㸨㹑㹣㹰㹴㹭ࠉ㸰㸲㸮ࠉ㹁㹵ࠉࠉࠉ㹵㹡ࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉ㸻ࠉ㸲㸳
㸨㹑㹣㹰㹴㹭ࠉ㸰㸲㸮ࠉ㹁㹡㹵ࠉࠉ㹥㹮ࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉ㸻ࠉ㸮㹶㸰㸶㸮㸮
㸨㹑㹣㹰㹴㹭ࠉ㸰㸲㸮ࠉ㹁㹡㹵ࠉࠉ㹥㹧ࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉ㸻ࠉ㸮㹶㸮㸮㸳㸮
㸨㹑㹣㹰㹴㹭ࠉ㸰㸲㸮ࠉ㹁㹡㹵ࠉࠉ㹥㹪㹮㹤ࠉࠉࠉ㸻ࠉ㸰㸰㸶
㸨㹑㹣㹰㹴㹭ࠉ㸰㸲㸮ࠉ㹁㹡㹵ࠉࠉ㹱㹡㹟㹪㹣ࠉࠉ㸻ࠉ㸯㸱
㸨㹑㹣㹰㹴㹭ࠉ㸰㸲㸮ࠉ㹁㹡㹵ࠉࠉ㹵㹡ࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉ㸻ࠉ㸲㸳
5
㸨㹑㹣㹰㹴㹭ࠉ㸱㸰㸮ࠉ㹁㹵ࠉࠉࠉ㹥㹮ࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉ㸻ࠉ㸮㸰㸶㸮㸮
㸨㹑㹣㹰㹴㹭ࠉ㸱㸰㸮ࠉ㹁㹵ࠉࠉࠉ㹥㹧ࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉ㸻ࠉ㸮㸮㸮㸳㸮
㸨㹑㹣㹰㹴㹭ࠉ㸱㸰㸮ࠉ㹁㹵ࠉࠉࠉ㹥㹪㹮㹤ࠉࠉࠉ㸻ࠉ㸰㸰㸶
㸨㹑㹣㹰㹴㹭ࠉ㸱㸰㸮ࠉ㹁㹵ࠉࠉࠉ㹱㹡㹟㹪㹣ࠉࠉ㸻ࠉ㸯㸱
㸨㹑㹣㹰㹴㹭ࠉ㸱㸰㸮ࠉ㹁㹵ࠉࠉࠉ㹵㹡ࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉ㸻ࠉ㸲㸳
㸨㹑㹣㹰㹴㹭ࠉ㸱㸰㸮ࠉ㹁㹡㹵ࠉࠉ㹥㹮ࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉ㸻ࠉ㸮㹶㸰㸶㸮㸮
㸨㹑㹣㹰㹴㹭ࠉ㸱㸰㸮ࠉ㹁㹡㹵ࠉࠉ㹥㹧ࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉ㸻ࠉ㸮㹶㸮㸮㸳㸮
㸨㹑㹣㹰㹴㹭ࠉ㸱㸰㸮ࠉ㹁㹡㹵ࠉࠉ㹥㹪㹮㹤ࠉࠉࠉ㸻ࠉ㸰㸰㸶
㸨㹑㹣㹰㹴㹭ࠉ㸱㸰㸮ࠉ㹁㹡㹵ࠉࠉ㹱㹡㹟㹪㹣ࠉࠉ㸻ࠉ㸯㸱
㸨㹑㹣㹰㹴㹭ࠉ㸱㸰㸮ࠉ㹁㹡㹵ࠉࠉ㹵㹡ࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉ㸻ࠉ㸲㸳
㸨㹑㹣㹰㹴㹭ࠉ㸲㸮㸮ࠉ㹁㹵ࠉࠉࠉ㹥㹮ࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉ㸻ࠉ㸮㹶㸰㸶㸮㸮
㸨㹑㹣㹰㹴㹭ࠉ㸲㸮㸮ࠉ㹁㹵ࠉࠉࠉ㹥㹧ࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉ㸻ࠉ㸮㹶㸮㸮㸳㸮
㸨㹑㹣㹰㹴㹭ࠉ㸲㸮㸮ࠉ㹁㹵ࠉࠉࠉ㹥㹪㹮㹤ࠉࠉࠉ㸻ࠉ㸰㸰㸶
㸨㹑㹣㹰㹴㹭ࠉ㸲㸮㸮ࠉ㹁㹵ࠉࠉࠉ㹱㹡㹟㹪㹣ࠉࠉ㸻ࠉ㸯㸱
㸨㹑㹣㹰㹴㹭ࠉ㸲㸮㸮ࠉ㹁㹵ࠉࠉࠉ㹵㹡ࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉ㸻ࠉ㸲㸳
㸨㹑㹣㹰㹴㹭ࠉ㸲㸮㸮ࠉ㹁㹡㹵ࠉࠉ㹥㹮ࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉ㸻ࠉ㸮㹶㸰㸶㸮㸮
㸨㹑㹣㹰㹴㹭ࠉ㸲㸮㸮ࠉ㹁㹡㹵ࠉࠉ㹥㹧ࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉ㸻ࠉ㸮㹶㸮㸮㸳㸮
㸨㹑㹣㹰㹴㹭ࠉ㸲㸮㸮ࠉ㹁㹡㹵ࠉࠉ㹥㹪㹮㹤ࠉࠉࠉ㸻ࠉ㸰㸰㸶
㸨㹑㹣㹰㹴㹭ࠉ㸲㸮㸮ࠉ㹁㹡㹵ࠉࠉ㹱㹡㹟㹪㹣ࠉࠉ㸻ࠉ㸯㸱
㸨㹑㹣㹰㹴㹭ࠉ㸰㸲ࠉ㸮ࠉ㹁㹡㹵ࠉࠉ㹵㹡ࠉࠉࠉࠉ㸻ࠉ㸲㸳
Note
 When adjustment values are initial values, "*" is displayed at the head of the
adjustment variable.
AP-74111 - Revision 1.4 253

 Sample printing (Error history)
㹊㹭㹥ࠉ㹇㹬㹤㹭㹰㹫㹟㹲㹧㹭㹬
㹌㹭㸬 ࠉࠉ㹂㹟㹲㹣㸰㸮㸮㸶㸭㸮㸲㸭㸮㸯㹁㹣㹪㹱㹧㹳㹱ࠉࠉ㸯㸷ࠉࠉ
㹌㹟㹫㹣㹔㹣㹰ࠉ㸯㸬㸮㸯㹂㹧㹮㹱㹵ࠉ㸮㸱㹦
ࠉ㹊㹭㹥㸮ࠉࠉ㸸ࠉ㹃㸶㸳ࠉࠉ㹆㹃㸿㹂ࠉ㹍㹔㹃㹐ࠉ㹆㹃㸿㹒ࠉ㸰㸮㸮㸶㸭㸮㸰㸭㸰㸴ࠉ㸯㸯㸸㸳㸷
ࠉ㹊㹭㹥㸯ࠉࠉ㸸ࠉ㹃㸶㸳ࠉࠉ㹆㹃㸿㹂ࠉ㹍㹔㹃㹐ࠉ㹆㹃㸿㹒ࠉ㸰㸮㸮㸶㸭㸮㸰㸭㸰㸴ࠉ㸯㸯㸸㸳㸷
ࠉ㹊㹭㹥㸰ࠉࠉ㸸ࠉ㹃㸶㸳ࠉࠉ㹆㹃㸿㹂ࠉ㹍㹔㹃㹐ࠉ㹆㹃㸿㹒ࠉ㸰㸮㸮㸶㸭㸮㸰㸭㸰㸴ࠉ㸯㸯㸸㸳㸵
ࠉ㹊㹭㹥㸱ࠉࠉ㸸ࠉ㹃㸶㸳ࠉࠉ㹆㹃㸿㹂ࠉ㹍㹔㹃㹐ࠉ㹆㹃㸿㹒ࠉ㸰㸮㸮㸶㸭㸮㸰㸭㸰㸴ࠉ㸯㸯㸸㸳㸰
ࠉ㹊㹭㹥㸲ࠉࠉ㸸ࠉ㹃㸶㸳ࠉࠉ㹆㹃㸿㹂ࠉ㹍㹔㹃㹐ࠉ㹆㹃㸿㹒ࠉ㸰㸮㸮㸶㸭㸮㸰㸭㸰㸴ࠉ㸯㸮㸸㸰㸴
ࠉ㹊㹭㹥㸳ࠉࠉ㸸ࠉ㹃㸶㸳ࠉࠉ㹆㹃㸿㹂ࠉ㹍㹔㹃㹐ࠉ㹆㹃㸿㹒ࠉ㸰㸮㸮㸶㸭㸮㸰㸭㸰㸴ࠉ㸯㸮㸸㸰㸳
ࠉ㹊㹭㹥㸴ࠉࠉ㸸ࠉ㹃㸶㸳ࠉࠉ㹆㹃㸿㹂ࠉ㹍㹔㹃㹐ࠉ㹆㹃㸿㹒ࠉ㸰㸮㸮㸶㸭㸮㸰㸭㸰㸴ࠉ㸯㸮㸸㸰㸱
ࠉ㹊㹭㹥㸵ࠉࠉ㸸ࠉ㹃㸶㸳ࠉࠉ㹆㹃㸿㹂ࠉ㹍㹔㹃㹐ࠉ㹆㹃㸿㹒ࠉ㸰㸮㸮㸶㸭㸮㸰㸭㸰㸴ࠉ㸯㸮㸸㸰㸰
ࠉ㹊㹭㹥㸶ࠉࠉ㸸ࠉ㹃㸶㸳ࠉࠉ㹆㹃㸿㹂ࠉ㹍㹔㹃㹐ࠉ㹆㹃㸿㹒ࠉ㸰㸮㸮㸶㸭㸮㸰㸭㸰㸴ࠉ㸯㸮㸸㸰㸮
ࠉ㹊㹭㹥㸷ࠉࠉ㸸ࠉ㹃㸶㸳ࠉࠉ㹆㹃㸿㹂ࠉ㹍㹔㹃㹐ࠉ㹆㹃㸿㹒ࠉ㸰㸮㸮㸶㸭㸮㸰㸭㸰㸴ࠉ㸯㸮㸸㸯㸷
ࠉ㹊㹭㹥㸯㸮ࠉ㸸ࠉ㹃㸶㸳ࠉࠉ㹆㹃㸿㹂ࠉ㹍㹔㹃㹐ࠉ㹆㹃㸿㹒ࠉ㸰㸮㸮㸶㸭㸮㸰㸭㸰㸴ࠉ㸮㸷㸸㸳㸷
ࠉ㹊㹭㹥㸯㸯ࠉ㸸ࠉ㹃㸶㸳ࠉࠉ㹆㹃㸿㹂ࠉ㹍㹔㹃㹐ࠉ㹆㹃㸿㹒ࠉ㸰㸮㸮㸶㸭㸮㸰㸭㸰㸴ࠉ㸮㸷㸸㸳㸴
ࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉ࣭
ࠉ㹊㹭㹥㸴㸱ࠉ㸸ࠉ㹃㸵㸳ࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉ㹆㹃㸿㹂ࠉ㹁㸿㹀㹊㹃ࠉ㸰㸮㸮㸶㸭㸮㸲㸭㸮㸯ࠉ㸯㸯㸸㸱㸵ࠉ
ࠉ㹋㹈ࠉ㹌㹭㹰㹫㹟㹪㹁㹟㹰㹲㹰㹧㹢㹥㹣ࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉ㸷㸰㹁㹭㹳㹬㹲㸸ࠉ㸰㸮㸮㸵㸭㸯㸰㸭㸯㸳ࠉ㸮㸷㸸㸯㸷
ࠉ㹋㹈ࠉ㸿㹠㹬㹭㹰㹫㹟㹪㹁㹟㹰㹲㹰㹧㹢㹥㹣ࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉ㸯㸷㹁㹭㹳㹬㹲㸸ࠉ㸰㸮㸮㸵㸭㸯㸰㸭㸯㸳ࠉ㸮㸷㸸㸰㸰
ࠉ㹋㹈ࠉ㸿㹠㹬㹭㹰㹫㹟㹪㹁㹟㹰㹲㹰㹧㹢㹥㹣ࠉ㹇㹬㹤㹭ࠉ㹁㹍㹓㹌㹒㹃㹐
ࠉ㹋㹃㹌ࠉ㹌㹭㹰㹫㹟㹪㹁㹟㹰㹲㹰㹧㹢㹥㹣ࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉ㸯㹁㹭㹳㹬㹲㸸ࠉ㸰㸮㸮㸵㸭㸯㸰㸭㸯㸳ࠉ㸮㸷㸸㸰㸰
ࠉ㹋㹃㹌ࠉ㸿㹠㹬㹭㹰㹫㹟㹪㹁㹟㹰㹲㹰㹧㹢㹥㹣ࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉ㸮㹁㹭㹳㹬㹲㸸ࠉ㸫㸫㸫㸫㸭㸫㸫㸭㸫㸫ࠉ㸫㸫㸸㸫㸫
ࠉ㸿㹠㹬㹭㹰㹫㹟㹪㹁㹟㹰㹲㹰㹧㹢㹥㹣ࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉ㸯㸱㹁㹭㹳㹬㹲㸸ࠉ㸰㸮㸮㸵㸭㸯㸮㸭㸯㸮ࠉ㸯㸱㸸㸳㸲
254 AP-74111 - Revision 1.4

5.10 Time Check

Checks the date and time managed by the RTC (Real Time Clock) on the main board.
Note
 Time settings cannot be performed in this menu. To set time, use the date and
time setting function in the Mutoh Service Assistance.
Refer to Date & Time Setting 5
㹁㹦㹣㹡㹩ࠉ㸵㸸㹒㹧㹫㹣㹁㹦㹣㹡㹩
[Enter]
Press [Enter] or [Cancel] key
to go back to Time Checking Menu
AP-74111 - Revision 1.4 255

5.11 Parameter Menu

In this menu, you can modify the set values of various adjustment items (adjustment
parameters).
The parameter menu includes the following items.

Parameter Initialization
Initialization Initializes the adjustment parameters.
Menu
Parameter Update
Update Updates the adjustment parameters.
Menu
[Enter]
[<] key [Enter] key
Parameter Initialization Menu
[Cancel] key
[>] key [<] key
[Enter] key
Parameter Update Menu
[Cancel] key
[>] key
256 AP-74111 - Revision 1.4

5.11.1 Parameter Initialization Menu
This menu initializes the adjustment parameters. The parameters that can be initialized
through this menu are as follows.
 Uni-D / Bi-D parameter, wiper, CR motor, PF motor, pump)
 Initialization of all items
[Enter] 5
[Enter]
[<] key [Enter]

key
[>] key [<] key
[>] key [<] key
[>] key [<] key
[>] key [<] key
[>] key [<] key
[>] key [<] key
[>] key [<] key
[>] key [<] key
[>] key
AP-74111 - Revision 1.4 257

Voltage Adjustment
This menu initialize the voltage adjustment parameter (VSD3d small dot).
Table 5-5 Voltage Adjustment Item
Items Contents
㧯㨔㨑㨏㨗‫ޓ‬㧤㧦㧼㨍㨞㨍㨙㨑㨠㨑㨞
='PVGT?
㧼㨍㨞㨍㨙㧝㧦㧵㨚㨕㨠㨕㨍㨘㨕㨦㨑
='PVGT?
㧵㨚㨕㨠㧚㧝㧦㨂㨛㨘㨠㧚㧻㨒㨒㨟㨑㨠
='PVGT?
=?MG[
㨂㨛㨘㨠㧚㧻㨒㨒㨟㨑㨠㧝㧦㧞㧠㧜‫ޓ‬㧯㨃
= ?MG[ =?MG[
㨂㨛㨘㨠㧚㧻㨒㨒㨟㨑㨠㧞㧦㧞㧠㧜‫ޓ‬㧯㧯㨃
= ?MG[ =?MG[
㨂㨛㨘㨠㧚㧻㨒㨒㨟㨑㨠㧟㧦㧟㧞㧜‫ޓ‬㧯㨃
= ?MG[ =?MG[
㨂㨛㨘㨠㧚㧻㨒㨒㨟㨑㨠㧠㧦㧟㧞㧜‫ޓ‬㧯㧯㨃
= ?MG[ =?MG[
㨂㨛㨘㨠㧚㧻㨒㨒㨟㨑㨠㧡㧦㧠㧜㧜‫ޓ‬㧯㨃
= ?MG[ =?MG[
㨂㨛㨘㨠㧚㧻㨒㨒㨟㨑㨠㧢㧦㧠㧜㧜‫ޓ‬㧯㧯㨃
= ?MG[
258 AP-74111 - Revision 1.4

Uni-D/Bi-D Low/High
This menu initialize the Uni-D/Bi-D adjustment parameter.
㹁㹦㹣㹡㹩ࠉ㸶㸸㹎㹟㹰㹟㹫㹣㹲㹣㹰
>(QWHU@
㹎㹟㹰㹟㹫㸯㸸㹇㹬㹧㹲㹧㹟㹪㹧㹸㹣
>(QWHU@
㹇㹬㹧㹲㸬㸰㸸㹓㹬㹧㸭㹀㹧ࠉࠉࠉࠉ㹊㹭㹵
>(QWHU@
㹇㹬㹧㹲㸬㸱㸸㹓㹬㹧㸭㹀㹧ࠉࠉࠉ㹆㹧㹥㹦
5
>@NH\
㹇㹬㹧㹲㸬㸯㸸㹓㹬㹧㸫㹂ࠉ㸰㸲㸮
>!@NH\ >@NH\
㹇㹬㹧㹲㸬㸰㸸㹓㹬㹧㸫㹂ࠉ㸱㸰㸮
>!@NH\ >@NH\
㹇㹬㹧㹲㸬㸱㸸㹓㹬㹧㸫㹂ࠉ㸲㸮㸮
>!@NH\ >@NH\
㹇㹬㹧㹲㸬㸲㸸㹓㹬㹧㸫㹂ࠉ㸰㸲㸮㹀
>!@NH\ >@NH\
㹇㹬㹧㹲㸬㸳㸸㹓㹬㹧㸫㹂ࠉ㸱㸰㸮㹀
>!@NH\ >@NH\
㹇㹬㹧㹲㸬㸴㸸㹓㹬㹧㸫㹂ࠉ㸲㸮㸮㹀
>!@NH\ >@NH\
㹇㹬㹧㹲㸬㸵㸸㹀㹧㸫㹂ࠉࠉ㸰㸲㸮
>!@NH\ >@NH\
㹇㹬㹧㹲㸬㸶㸸㹀㹧㸫㹂ࠉࠉ㸱㸰㸮
>!@NH\ >@NH\
㹇㹬㹧㹲㸬㸷㸸㹀㹧㸫㹂ࠉࠉ㸲㸮㸮
>!@NH\ >@NH\
㹇㹬㹧㹲㸬㸯㸮㸸㹀㹧㸫㹂ࠉ㸰㸲㸮㹀
>!@NH\ >@NH\
㹇㹬㹧㹲㸬㸯㸯㸸㹀㹧㸫㹂ࠉ㸱㸰㸮㹀
>!@NH\ >@NH\
㹇㹬㹧㹲㸬㸯㸰㸸㹀㹧㸫㹂ࠉ㸲㸮㸮㹀
>!@NH\
AP-74111 - Revision 1.4 259

5.11.2 Parameter Update Menu
This menu updates the adjustment parameters. The parameters that can be updated through
this menu are as follows.
Note
 The updated parameters will not be stored in the flash memory unless the
system power is OFF.
 Head rank
 Voltage adjustment
 Uni-D/Bi-D Low
 Uni-D/Bi-D High
 Side margin
 Not-filled flag
 Serial number
 DebugBit
 Cap sequence
>(QWHU@
㹎㹟㹰㹟㹫㸰㸸㹓㹮㹢㹟㹲㹣
>(QWHU@
>@NH\
>(QWHU@
㹓㹮㹢㹟㹲㹣㸯㸸㹆㹣㹟㹢ࠉ㹐㹟㹬㹩 +HDG3DUDPHWHU8SGDWH0HQX
>&DQFHO@
>!@NH\ >@NH\
>(QWHU@
㹓㹮㹢㹟㹲㹣㸰㸸㹔㹭㹪㹲㸬㹍㹤㹤㹱㹣㹲 +HDG9ROWDJH2IIVHW0HQX
>&DQFHO@
>!@NH\ >@NH\
>(QWHU@
㹓㹮㹢㹟㹲㹣㸱㸸㹓㹬㹧㸭㹀㹧ࠉ㹊㹭㹵 8QL'%L'/RZ8SGDWH0HQX
>&DQFHO@
>!@NH\ >@NH\
>(QWHU@
㹓㹮㹢㹟㹲㹣㸲㸸㹓㹬㹧㸭㹀㹧ࠉ㹆㹧㹥㹦 8QL'%L'+LJK8SGDWH0HQX
>&DQFHO@
>!@NH\ >@NH\
>(QWHU@
㹓㹮㹢㹟㹲㹣㸳㸸㹑㹧㹢㹣㹋㹟㹰㹥㹧㹬 6LGH0DUJLQ8SGDWH0HQX
>&DQFHO@
>!@NH\ >@NH\
>(QWHU@
㹓㹮㹢㹟㹲㹣㸴㸸㹁㹦㹟㹰㹥㹣ࠉ㹄㹪㹥 ,QN3DUDPHWHU8SGDWH0HQX
>&DQFHO@
>!@NH\ >@NH\
>(QWHU@
㹓㹮㹢㹟㹲㹣㸵㸸㹑㹣㹰㹧㹟㹪㹌㹭㸬 6HULDO1R8SGDWH0HQX
>&DQFHO@
>!@NH\ >@NH\
>(QWHU@
㹓㹮㹢㹟㹲㹣㸶㸸㹂㹣㹠㹳㹥㹀㹧㹲 'HEXJ%LW8SGDWH0HQX
>&DQFHO@
>!@NH\ >@NH\
>(QWHU@
㹓㹮㹢㹟㹲㹣㸷㸸㹁㹟㹮㹑㹣㹯㹳㹣㹬㹡㹣 &DS6HTXHQFH8SGDWH0HQX
>&DQFHO@
>!@NH\
260 AP-74111 - Revision 1.4

Head Rank
This menu updates the head rank parameters. Used to determine the print head driving
voltage and correct the head temperature.
After entering the head rank, the system shifts to the Ink Charge Menu.
[Enter]
[Enter] 5
[Enter]
[Enter]
[Enter]
[Enter] Error will occur if input value is wrong.

Press [Enter] key to retry
[Cancel]
[Enter] Initial Ink charge will not executed.
Head ID will be updated.
[Enter]
[Enter]
[Enter]
AP-74111 - Revision 1.4 261

Voltage Adjustment
This menu updates the voltage adjustment parameter (VSD3 small dot).
Table 5-6 Voltage Adjustment Item
Items Contents
240 CW Adjusts the VSD 3d-L (S) at 240 cps. CW printing.
240 CCW Adjusts the VSD 3d-L (S) at 240 cps. CCW printing.
>(QWHU@
>(QWHU@
㹓㹮㹢㹟㹲㹣㸰㸸㹔㹭㹪㹲㸬㹍㹤㹤㹱㹣㹲
>(QWHU@
>@NH\
㹔㹭㹪㹲㸬㹍㹤㹤㹱㹣㹲㸯㸸㸰㸲㸮ࠉ㹁㹕
>!@NH\ >@NH\
㹔㹭㹪㹲㸬㹍㹤㹤㹱㹣㹲㸰㸸㸰㸲㸮ࠉ㹁㹁㹕
>!@NH\ >@NH\
㹔㹭㹪㹲㸬㹍㹤㹤㹱㹣㹲㸱㸸㸱㸰㸮ࠉ㹁㹕
>!@NH\ >@NH\
㹔㹭㹪㹲㸬㹍㹤㹤㹱㹣㹲㸲㸸㸱㸰㸮ࠉ㹁㹁㹕
>!@NH\ >@NH\
㹔㹭㹪㹲㸬㹍㹤㹤㹱㹣㹲㸳㸸㸲㸮㸮ࠉ㹁㹕
>!@NH\ >@NH\
㹔㹭㹪㹲㸬㹍㹤㹤㹱㹣㹲㸴㸸㸲㸮㸮ࠉ㹁㹁㹕
>!@NH\
,I&:LVVHOHFWHG
㸰㸲㸮ࠉ㹁㹕ࠉ㹔㹆㸱㹊ࠉ㸫㸯㸸ࠉ㸯㸬㸮㹔 2IIVHWUDQJH9WR9 9LQFUHPHQW
9+/WR9+/
9+6WR9+6
262 AP-74111 - Revision 1.4

Uni-D / Bi-D Low
This menu updates the Uni-D/ Bi-D adjustment parameter.

Table 5-7 Uni-D / Bi-D Update Item
Item Contents
Uni-D 240 Adjusts Uni-D at 240 cps. PG Low or High

5
Uni-D 240B Adjusts Uni-D at 240 cps-Banner. PG Low or High
Uni-D / Bi-D adjustment parameters are updated.
AP-74111 - Revision 1.4 263

>(QWHU@
㹓㹮㹢㹟㹲㹣㸱㸸㹓㹬㹧㸭㹀㹧ࠉࠉࠉ㹊㹭㹵㹓㹮㹢㹟㹲㹣㸲㸸㹓㹬㹧㸭㹀㹧ࠉࠉ㹆㹧㹥㹦
>(QWHU@
>@NH\
㹓㹮㹢㹟㹲㹣㸯㸸㹓㹬㹧㸫㹂ࠉ㸰㸲㸮
>!@NH\ >@NH\
㹓㹮㹢㹟㹲㹣㸰㸸㹓㹬㹧㸫㹂ࠉ㸱㸰㸮
>!@NH\ >@NH\
㹓㹮㹢㹟㹲㹣㸱㸸㹓㹬㹧㸫㹂ࠉ㸲㸮㸮
>!@NH\ >@NH\
㹓㹮㹢㹟㹲㹣㸲㸸㹓㹬㹧㸫㹂ࠉ㸰㸲㸮㹀
>!@NH\ >@NH\
㹓㹮㹢㹟㹲㹣㸳㸸㹓㹬㹧㸫㹂ࠉ㸱㸰㸮㹀
>!@NH\ >@NH\
㹓㹮㹢㹟㹲㹣㸴㸸㹓㹬㹧㸫㹂ࠉ㸲㸮㸮㹀
>!@NH\ >@NH\
㹓㹮㹢㹟㹲㹣㸵㸸㹀㹧㸫㹂ࠉࠉ㸰㸲㸮
>!@NH\ >@NH\
㹓㹮㹢㹟㹲㹣㸶㸸㹀㹧㸫㹂ࠉࠉ㸱㸰㸮
>!@NH\ >@NH\
㹓㹮㹢㹟㹲㹣㸷㸸㹀㹧㸫㹂ࠉࠉ㸲㸮㸮
>!@NH\ >@NH\
㹓㹮㹢㹟㹲㹣㸯㸮㸸㹀㹧㸫㹂ࠉ㸰㸲㸮㹀
>!@NH\ >@NH\
㹓㹮㹢㹟㹲㹣㸯㸯㸸㹀㹧㸫㹂ࠉ㸱㸰㸮㹀
>!@NH\ >@NH\
㹓㹮㹢㹟㹲㹣㸯㸰㸸㹀㹧㸫㹂ࠉ㸲㸮㸮㹀
>!@NH\
264 AP-74111 - Revision 1.4

(The following shows a case for “Uni-D 240” is selected.)
If any value has been changed

[<] key
[>] key [<] key [Enter]
[>] key [<] key

* Press [Setting/Value +] or [Setting/Value -] key
to change the set value
[>] key [<] key
5
Range: -100 to 100
* “2A” is not displayed because the value is the basis
[>] key [<] key
* If “High” is selected, the values of #2 will be displayed
[>] key [<] key
[>] key [<] key
[>] key
Side Margin
This updates the side margin parameters.
[Enter]
[Enter]
Press [Setting/Value +] or [Setting/Value -] key

[Enter] to change the set value
Range: 0.0mm to 20.0mm
(This sets the distance between the print head
[Enter] and media edge sensor.)
When any parameter has been changed
[Enter]
AP-74111 - Revision 1.4 265

Ink Not-filled Flag
This updates the ink parameter. The setting items are as follows.
 User/:Charge: Initial wash completed, ink not filled.
 User/Init:Not ChargeÅFInitial wash incomplete, ink not filled
 User/Init:Charge: Initial wash completed, ink filled.
[Enter]
[Enter]
Press [Setting/Value +] or [Setting/Value -] key

[Enter] to change the setting items
“User/ : Charge”
“User/Init:Not Charge”
[Enter] “User/Init: Charge”
When any parameter has been changed
[Enter]
Note
 When selecting "Reset", be sure to install the cartridge.
266 AP-74111 - Revision 1.4

Serial Number Entry
This is for entering the serial number.
>(QWHU@
>(QWHU@
㹓㹮㹢㹟㹲㹣㸵㸸㹑㹣㹰㹧㹟㹪㹌㹭㸬
>(QWHU@
5
㹄㹍㸴㸨㸮㸮㸮㸮㸮㸮 (QWHU6HULDO1XPEHU GLJLWE\GLJLW
>!@NH\ >@NH\
㹄㹍㸴(㸨㸮㸮㸮㸮㸮
>!@NH\ >@NH\
㹄㹍㸴(㸯㸨㸮㸮㸮㸮
>!@NH\ >@NH\
㹄㹍㸴(㸯㸰㸨㸮㸮㸮
>!@NH\ >@NH\
㹄㹍㸴(㸯㸰㸱㸨㸮㸮
>!@NH\ >@NH\
㹄㹍㸴(㸯㸰㸱㸲㸨㸮
>!@NH\ >@NH\
㹄㹍㸴(㸯㸰㸱㸲㸳㸨
㹓㹮㹢㹟㹲㹣ࠉ㹎㹟㹰㹟㹫㹣㹲㹣㹰㸽 :KHQDQ\SDUDPHWHUKDVEHHQFKDQJHG
>(QWHU@
㹓㹮㹢㹟㹲㹧㹬㹥ࠉ㹎㹟㹰㹟㹫㹣㹲㹣㹰
AP-74111 - Revision 1.4 267

Debug bit Update
This menu is for updating the debug bit.

Use the debug bit for testing.
Note
 The debug bit is displayed in binary digits. The setting values and initial values
at the time of shipping is as follows.
 At the time of shipping: 00000000
 Initial value: 00000000
* Debug Bit (Set digit by digit)

Press [Settting/Value] or [Setting/Value] key
= ?MG[ =?MG[ to change the value
* The default value for all items is “0”
= ?MG[ =?MG[
= ?MG[ =?MG[
= ?MG[ =?MG[
= ?MG[
Note
 This is a function that is not used in field work.
268 AP-74111 - Revision 1.4

Cap sequence
Specify the wiping speed during the ink sequence, and specify the head position to discharge
the waste ink in the head cap.
Table 5-8 Cap sequence Item
Item Contents
Type A
Speed for wiping: 150 cps, weight 500ms
5
Head position for discharging the waste ink in
the head cap: Approx. 15mm
Speed for wiping: 80 cps, weight 200ms

Type B Head position for discharging the waste ink in
the head cap: Approx. 5mm
㧯㨔㨑㨏㨗‫ޓ‬㧤㧦㧼㨍㨞㨍㨙㨑㨠㨑㨞
='PVGT?
㧼㨍㨞㨍㨙㧞㧦㨁㨜㨐㨍㨠㨑
='PVGT?
㨁㨜㨐㨍㨠㨑㧥㧦㧯㨍㨜㧿㨑㨝㨡㨑㨚㨏㨑
='PVGT?
=?MG[
㧯㨍㨜㧿㨑㨝㨡㨑㨚㨏㨑㧦‫ޓޓޓ‬㨀㨥㨜㨑㧭
= ?MG[ =?MG[
㧯㨍㨜㧿㨑㨝㨡㨑㨚㨏㨑㧦‫ޓޓޓ‬㨀㨥㨜㨑㧮
= ?MG[
AP-74111 - Revision 1.4 269

5.12 Servo Setting

In this menu, you can change the servo settings.
* Because this is a menu for evaluating problems of the unit (noise, vibration), and improving
the image (measures for vertical unevenness) normally, do not change these parameters.
Table 5-9 Servo Setting Item
Items Contents
240 cps CW Servo setting at CR CW direction, 240 cps
240 cps CCW Servo setting at CR CCW direction, 240 cps
320cps CCW Servo setting at CR CCW direction, 320 cps
400 cps CCW Servo setting at CR CCW direction, 400 cps
Table 5-10 Servo Adjustment Item
Items Contents
Proportional gain Sets proportional gain
Integral gain Sets integral gain
Low-pass filter Sets low-pass filter
PWM scale Sets PWM scale
ωC Sets ω C
270 AP-74111 - Revision 1.4

㹁㹦㹣㹡㹩ࠉ㸷㸸㹑㹣㹰㹴㹭
>(QWHU@
>@NH\
㹑㹣㹰㹴㹭㸯㸸㸰㸲㸮㹡㹮㹱ࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉ㹁㹕
>!@NH\ >@NH\
㹑㹣㹰㹴㹭㸰㸸㸰㸲㸮㹡㹮㹱ࠉࠉࠉࠉ㹁㹁㹕
>!@NH\ >@NH\
㹑㹣㹰㹴㹭㸱㸸㸱㸰㸮㹡㹮㹱ࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉ㹁㹕
>!@NH\ >@NH\
5
㹑㹣㹰㹴㹭㸲㸸㸱㸰㸮㹡㹮㹱ࠉࠉࠉࠉ㹁㹁㹕
>!@NH\ >@NH\
㹑㹣㹰㹴㹭㸳㸸㸲㸮㸮㹡㹮㹱ࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉ㹁㹕
>!@NH\ >@NH\
㹑㹣㹰㹴㹭㸴㸸㸲㸮㸮㹡㹮㹱ࠉࠉࠉࠉ㹁㹁㹕
>!@NH\ >@NH\
㹑㹣㹰㹴㹭㸵㸸㹇㹢㹪㹣
>!@NH\
>(QWHU@
:KHQVHOHFWLQJFSV&:
>@NH\
㸰㸲㸮㹡㹮㹱ࠉ㹁㹕㸸㹅㹎
>!@NH\ >@NH\
㸰㸲㸮㹡㹮㹱ࠉ㹁㹕㸸㹅㹇
>!@NH\ >@NH\
㸰㸲㸮㹡㹮㹱ࠉ㹁㹕㸸㹅㹊㹎㹄
>!@NH\ >@NH\
㸰㸲㸮㹡㹮㹱ࠉ㹁㹕㸸㹎㹕㹋ࠉ㹑㹡㹟㹪㹣
>!@NH\ >@NH\
㸰㸲㸮㹡㹮㹱ࠉ㹁㹕㸸Ȱ㹁
>!@NH\
>(QWHU@
&KDQJHWKHYDOXH XQLWWRFRXQW E\SUHVVLQJ

㹅㹎㸸ࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉ㸮㹶㸴㸮㸮㸮
>VHWWLQJYDOXH@RU>VHWWLQJYDOXH@NH\
* The minimum / maximum / count value for each item is shown blow.
Table 5-11 Max./Min./Count Values for Servo Setting
Items Min. Max. Count

GP (Proportional gain) 0 × 2000 0 × 7800 0 × 200
GI (Integral gain) 0 × 0002 0 × 0800 1
GLPF (Low-pass filter) 0 255 1
PWM (PWM scale) 10 15 1
AP-74111 - Revision 1.4 271

Table 5-11 Max./Min./Count Values for Servo Setting
Items Min. Max. Count

ω C (Position gain) 30 60 5
The initial values of the setting items are as follows.

When the speed is the same, the initial values of CW and CCW will be the same.
Table 5-12 Initial Servo Settings
Items Initial values on each speeds

240cps 320cps 400cps
GP (Proportional gain) 0 × 3000 0 × 2800 0 × 2800
GI (Integral gain) 0 × 60 0 × 50 0 × 50
GLPF (Low-pass filter) 234 228 228
PWM (PWM scale) 13 13 13
ω C (Position gain) 45 45 45
272 AP-74111 - Revision 1.4

5.13 Endurance Running Menu

Performs endurance running of mechanicals and the head.
The endurance running menu includes the following items.

CR Motor Endurance
CR motor Performs carriage stroke.
Menu 5
PF Motor Endurance
PF motor Drives the PF motor.
Menu
Pump Endurance
Pump Drives the pump motor assembly.
Menu
Performs sequential print operation of the print Print Head Endurance
Nozzle print
head. (Nozzle Print) Menu
General Performs endurance running on the CR and PF General Endurance
endurance concurrently. Menu
Confirms the number of endurance running Endurance Running
Confirmation
cycles. Check Menu
[Enter]
[<] key [Enter] key

CR Motor Endurance Menu
[Cancel] key
PF Motor Endurance Menu
[Cancel] key
Pump Motor Endurance Menu
[Cancel] key
Sequential Printing Endurance Menu
[Cancel] key
General Endurance Menu
[Cancel] key
Endurance Running Check Menu
[Cancel] key
[>] key [<] key
AP-74111 - Revision 1.4 273

5.13.1 CR Motor Endurance Menu
This menu performs endurance running for the CR motor.

You can operate the carriage stroke according to your desired settings. The available settings
are shown below.
Set item Contents Set value Remark

Running speed (CW, Set the carriage running speed
240, 320, 400 Unit: cps
CCW) (CW direction, CCW direction)
Number of endurance Set the number of endurance
-1 to 10000 -
running cycles running cycles
Caution
 When performing the CR motor endurance running, note the following:
 Install available ink cartridges.
 If performing the CR motor endurance running without ink cartridges, ink
inside the tube may leak through the ink holder during the carriage movement.
Note
 If the number of endurance running cycles is set to -1, the carriage
continuously repeats endurance running until cancel input is given from the
operation panel.
 The maximum counter value for endurance running cycles is 99999999 (up to
8-digit number). If the number of cycles exceeds the maximum value, the
counter is reset to 0.
 The carriage moving distance is fixed to the maximum value of print area.
[Enter]
[Enter]
CW-speed
[Enter]
CCW-speed
[Enter]
Endurance Count
[Enter]
Performing endurance
[Enter] or [Cancel]
274 AP-74111 - Revision 1.4

5.13.2 PF Motor Endurance Menu
This menu performs endurance running for the PF motor.

You can drive the PF motor according to your desired settings. The available settings are
shown below.

Set the media feed
Media feed amount amount per endurance
running cycle.
0.1 to 100 Unit: mm 5
Set the number of
Number of endurance
endurance running -1 to 10000 -
running cycles
cycles.
 The following table shows the motor moving parameters to media feed amount.
Speed 35CPS
Acceleration 0.1G
Deceleration 0.1G
 If the number of endurance running cycles is set to -1, the carriage continuously
repeats endurance running until cancel input is given from the operation panel.
 The maximum counter value for endurance running cycles is 99999999 (up to 8-digit
number). If the number of cycles exceeds the maximum value, the counter is reset to 0.
[Enter]
[Enter]
Enter a media feed amount by using ±.
Range : 0.1 to 100.0 mm
[Enter]
Endurance Count
[Enter]
Performing endurance
[Enter] or [Cancel]
AP-74111 - Revision 1.4 275

5.13.3 Pump Endurance Menu
This menu performs endurance running for the pump motor assembly.
You can drive the pump motor assembly according to your desired settings. The available
settings are shown below.

Set the running speed of Super high / High /
Running speed
pump motor assembly. Normal / Low
Number of endurance Set the number of
-1 to 10000
running cycles endurance running cycles.
Note
operation panel.
[Enter]
[Enter]
[<] key
[Enter]
[>] key [<] key
[Enter]
[>] key [<] key
[Enter]
[>] key [<] key
[Enter]
[>] key
Endurance Count
Performing Endurance [Enter]
[Enter] or [Cancel ]
The pump endurance running sequence is as follows.

Step 1: Pump endurance running starts.
276 AP-74111 - Revision 1.4

Step 2: Performs pump phase detection.

Step 3: Rotates with the specified suction speed. This rotation is counted as one cycle.
Repeats Step 2 the number of times specified as follows.
Super high: 4000

High: 3000
Normal: 2000
Low: 1000
Step 4:
Step 5:
Performs pump release.
Pump endurance running ends.
5
5.13.4 Print Head Endurance (Nozzle Print) Menu
This menu performs endurance running for the plot head.

In the sequential plotting endurance menu you can operate sequential plotting endurance
operation on the plot head according to your desired settings.

Set the number of
Number of endurance
running cycles
cycles.
Note
operation panel.
[Enter]
[Enter]
Endurance Count
[Enter]
Performing endurance running
[Enter] or [Cancel]
AP-74111 - Revision 1.4 277

5.13.5 General Endurance Menu
This menu performs the general endurance running.

You can operate various driving systems according to your desired settings.
The available settings are shown below.

Set the carriage
Running speed (CW, running speed (CW
240, 320, 400 Unit: cps
CCW) direction, CCW
direction).
Set the media feed
Media feed amount amount per endurance 0.1 to 100 Unit: mm
running cycle.
Set the number of
Number of endurance
running cycles
cycles.
Note
 In the general endurance menu, the following operations are performed as one
cycle of endurance running:
 Carriage stroking: 1 stroke
 Media feed: 1 cycle
continuously repeats stroking until cancel input is given from the operation
panel.
[Enter]
[Enter]
CW-speed
[Enter]
CCW-speed
[Enter]
Media feed amount
[Enter]
Endurance count
[Enter]
Performing endurance running
[Enter] or [Cancel]
278 AP-74111 - Revision 1.4

5.13.6 Endurance Running Check Menu
In this menu, you can confirm the number of endurance running cycles that have been
already finished.
The number of endurance running cycles is stored in NVRAM in the system. Therefore, even
if a serious error occurs during endurance running, you can confirm the number of finished
cycles just before the occurrence of the serious error.
[Enter] 5
[Enter]
[<] key
Number of endurance running cycles
for the CR Motor
[>] key [<] key
for the PF Motor
[>] key [<] key
for the Head Lock
[>] key [<] key
for the Pump motor
[>] key [<] key
for Sequential Printing
[>] key [<] key
Number of general endurance running cycles
[>] key
AP-74111 - Revision 1.4 279

5.14 Media Feed Menu

In this menu, you can feed media into the printer frontward or backward.
The mechanical initialization should be done if not performed yet.
[Enter]
[–] key: Feeds forward
[+] key: Feeds backward
Note
 This is the same function as the Media Feed Menu
280 AP-74111 - Revision 1.4

5.15 ExControl Menu

In this menu, you can diagnose the equipment on the controller board.
Table 5-13 Controller Board Check Item
Items Contents Remark

Version Firmware, board revision
Tank status, electromagnetic valve, pre-heater

-
5
thermistor, platen thermistor 1/2, after-heater
Sensors -
thermistor, ink ID for 4 cartridges, ink NOT sensor for
4 cartridges, ink END sensor for 4 cartridges
Mist fan Checks mist fan operation -
Heater Pre-heater, platen heater, after-heater -
History Maintenance history confirmation -
[Enter]
[<] key
[Enter]
Version Menu
[Cancel]
[>] key [<] key
[Enter]
Sensor Menu
[Cancel]
[>] key [<] key
[Enter]
Mist fan Menu
[Cancel]
[>] key [<] key
[Enter]
Heater Menu
[Cancel]
[>] key [<] key
[Enter]
History Menu
[Cancel]
[>] key
AP-74111 - Revision 1.4 281

5.15.1 Version
In this menu, you can check the ROM version of the controller board firmware, and the
version of the controller board. The firmware version (AP version) is displayed as “XX.XX“.
The controller board version is displayed in hex format (2 digits).
[Enter]
[Enter]
[<] key
[>] key [<] key
[>] key
5.15.2 Sensor
Displays the status of the following sensors on the controller board.
[Enter]
[Enter]
[<] key
[Enter]
Tank Status Menu
[Cancel]
[>] key [<] key
[Enter]
Electromagnetic
[Cancel] Valve Check Menu
[>] key [<] key
[Enter]
Miscellaneous Menu
[Cancel]
[>] key
282 AP-74111 - Revision 1.4

Tank Status
Displays the status of sub tank and electromagnetic valve.
[<] key
[<] key
[<] key
5
[<] key
[>] key [<] key
[>] key [<] key
[>] key [<] key
[>] key
AP-74111 - Revision 1.4 283

Electromagnetic Valve Check
Checks if the electromagnetic valve on the sub tank operates correctly.
[Enter]
[Enter]
[Enter]
[<] key
[>] key [<] key
[>] key [<] key
[>] key [<] key
[>] key
Pressing Enter or Cancel turns on/off the electromagnetic valve.
[Enter] key
[Cancel] key
284 AP-74111 - Revision 1.4

Miscellaneous
Displays the status of the following sensors on the panel.

 Pre-heater thermistor
 Platen heater thermistor
 After-heater thermistor
 Ink ID for 4 cartridges
 Ink NOT sensor for 4 cartridges 5
 Ink END sensor for 4 cartridges
[Enter]
[Enter]
[Enter]
[<] key
Pre-heater1 condition display
[>] key [<] key
Pre-heater2 condition display
[>] key [<] key
Platen Heater1 condition display
[>] key [<] key
Platen Heater2 condition display
[>] key [<] key
After Dryer heater1 condition display

[>] key [<] key
After Dryer heater2 condition display

[>] key [<] key
K Ink ID condition display

[>] key [<] key
C Ink ID condition display

[>] key [<] key
M Ink ID condition display

[>] key [<] key
Y Ink ID condition display

[>] key [<] key
Ink NOT sensor condition display
[>] key [<] key
Ink END sensor condition display
[>] key
AP-74111 - Revision 1.4 285

5.15.3 Mist Fan
Checks if the mist fan operates correctly.

When selecting this menu, the mist fan is activated.
5.15.4 Heater
In this menu, you can check whether pre-heater, platen heater, and after-heater works
properly or not. The printer sets the temperature at 50°C and controls the selected heater
process. Press Cancel to stop the operation.
If the temperature reaches to the set value, the printer keeps the temperature control.
[Enter]
[Enter]
[<] key
[>] key [<] key
[>] key [<] key
[>] key
[Enter] key㸦When selecting Pre㸧
286 AP-74111 - Revision 1.4

5.15.5 History
You can check the maintenance history of the controller board control device.
The history is displayed in H (hour) / M (min.) / S (sec.).
Total operating time of each heater shows the period from when the printer is used in
self-diagnosis mode. Daily operating time is not counted.
Note
5
 This menu is not available at this point.
[Enter]
[Enter]
[<] key
Time of using Pre-heater
[>] key [<] key
Time of using Platen Heater
[>] key [<] key

Time of using After Dryer Heater
[>] key
AP-74111 - Revision 1.4 287

5.16 PaperInitial Menu

In this menu, you can set the media detection method in the self-diagnosis mode. The default
value is the same as the one in the normal operation mode.
Select either Top & Width / Width / Off. When selecting Off, you can set the media width in the
media width setting menu.
Table 5-14 Media Detection Item
Items Contents
Top & Width Normal media detection mode
Width Detects media width.
Off Does not detect media.
[Enter]
[-] key
[+] key [-] key
[+] key [-] key
[+] key
When Off is selected

Input media width
Press [Setting/value +] or [Setting/value -] key
to change the value
Range: 1000 to 1625 mm
288 AP-74111 - Revision 1.4

5.17 Speed Mode Menu

In this menu, you can set the speed mode settings. Select either High Speed/ Normal Speed.
Table 5-15 Speed Mode Items
Items Contents
High Speed Set the carriage speed on 320 cps/400cps 5
Normal Speed Set the carriage speed on 240 cps/320cps
㹁㹦㹣㹡㹩㸯㸲㸸㹑㹮㹣㹣㹢㹋㹭㹢㹣
>(QWHU@
>@NH\
㹑㹮㹣㹣㹢㹋㹭㹢㹣㸯㸸㹆㹧㹥㹦
>!@NH\ >@NH\
㹑㹮㹣㹣㹢㹋㹭㹢㹣㸰㸸㹌㹭㹰㹫㹟㹪
>!@NH\
>(QWHU@
㹓㹮㹢㹟㹲㹣ࠉ㹎㹟㹰㹟㹫㹣㹲㹣㹰㸽
>(QWHU@
㹓㹮㹢㹟㹲㹧㹬㹥ࠉ㹎㹟㹰㹟㹫㹣㹲㹣㹰
AP-74111 - Revision 1.4 289

290 AP-74111 - Revision 1.4

Chapter 6 Maintenance
Mode 2
Introduction. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292 6
Operations in Maintenance Mode 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292
 Starting Up the Maintenance Mode 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292
 Operating Maintenance Mode 2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292
Maintenance Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293

 Counter Display Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 294
 Counter Initialization Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 296
 Counter Print Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 297
 Media Feed Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 297
AP-74111 - Revision 1.4 291

6.1 Introduction
This chapter provides information on the maintenance mode.
The maintenance mode provides the user with functions of displaying and initializing the life
counters. Used in the manufacturing process, adjustment, and maintenance.
The system firmware implements the maintenance mode. All functions are available from the
operation panel.
Refer to Part Names and Functions
6.2 Operations in Maintenance Mode 2

This section explains how to start up and operate the maintenance mode as well as provides
the list of available diagnosis items.
6.2.1 Starting Up the Maintenance Mode 2
To use the maintenance mode 2, you must first call up the maintenance menu on the
operation panel.
The maintenance menu is completely independent of the normal operation mode and setup
menu display mode. To run the maintenance menu, follow the steps below.
Step 1: If the system is in the operation
mode or the setup menu mode,
press the Power to turn the power
off.
Step 2: While holding down Setting/value ,
> and < simultaneously, press
Power.
The maintenance mode will start
running and display the
maintenance menu.
6.2.2 Operating Maintenance Mode 2
For the operation method of maintenance mode 2, refer to Operations in Self-Diagnosis

Mode, and perform operations accordingly.
292 AP-74111 - Revision 1.4

6.3 Maintenance Menu

The maintenance menu includes the following diagnosis items.

Counter: Indication Displays the life counter. Counter Display Menu
Counter: Init Counter Initialization
Counter
Counter: Print
Initializes the life counter.
Prints the life counter values.

Menu
Counter Print Menu
6
Feeds media into the printer frontward or
PaperFeed Media Feed Menu
backward.
Previous menu
[Enter] key
Counter display
[Cancal] key
Next menu Previous menu
[Enter] key
Counter initialization
[Cancal] key
Next menu Previous menu
[Enter] key
Counter print
[Cancal] key
Next menu Previous menu [Enter] key
Media feed
[Cancal] key
Previous menu
AP-74111 - Revision 1.4 293

6.3.1 Counter Display Menu
This menu displays the life counters. It consists of the following diagnosis items.
Note
 All life counters are displayed in decimal number.

Used Ink K Displays the ink consumption (K) counter.
Used Ink C Displays the ink consumption (C) counter.
Used Ink M Displays the ink consumption (M) counter.
Used Ink Y Displays the ink consumption (Y) counter.
Print Number Displays the total number of printed copies.
CR Motor Displays the life counter of the CR motor.
PF Motor Displays the life counter of the PF motor.
PUMP Displays the life counter of the pump unit.
HEAD K1, K2 Displays the life counter of the head nozzle (K).
HEAD C1, C2 Displays the life counter of the head nozzle (C).
HEAD M1, M2 Displays the life counter of the head nozzle (M).
HEAD Y1, Y2 Displays the life counter of the head nozzle (Y).
Cleaner Displays the life counter of the cleaning unit.
294 AP-74111 - Revision 1.4

[Enter]
[>] key [<] key

Ink consumption (K) counter
[>] key [<] key

Ink consumption (C) counter
[>] key [<] key
6
Ink consumption (M) counter
[>] key [<] key
Ink consumption (Y) counter
[>] key [<] key

Total number of printed copies
[>] key [<] key
Waste ink amount counter
[>] key [<] key
Life counter of the CR motor
[>] key [<] key
Life counter of the PF motor
[>] key [<] key
Life counter of the pump unit
[>] key [<] key
Life counter of the head nozzle (K1)

[>] key [<] key
Life counter of the head nozzle (K2)
[>] key [<] key

Life counter of the head nozzle (C1)
[>] key [<] key

Life counter of the head nozzle (C2)
[>] key [<] key
Life counter of the head nozzle (Y1)
[>] key [<] key
Life counter of the head nozzle (Y2)
[>] key [<] key
Life counter of the head nozzle (M1)

[>] key [<] key
Life counter of the head nozzle (M2)
[>] key [<] key
Life counter of the cleaner head
[>] key
AP-74111 - Revision 1.4 295

6.3.2 Counter Initialization Menu
This menu initializes the life counters. The parameters that can be initialized in this menu are
as follows.

Print Num. Initializes the total print counter.
Ink Initializes the ink amount counter.
All Initializes the life counter.
NVRAM Initializes the NVRAM.
Timer Initializes the timer.
CR Motor Initializes the CR motor life counter.
PF Motor Initializes the PF motor life counter.
Head Unit Initializes the head nozzle life counter.
Cleaning Initializes the life counter of the cleaning unit.
PUMP Initializes the life counter of the pump unit.
Batch initializing before shipping
Shipping
(Print Num., CR Motor, PF Motor, Cleaning, PUMP)
[Enter]
[<] key [Enter]

key
[>] key [<] key
[>] key [<] key
[>] key [<] key
[>] key [<] key
[>] key [<] key
[>] key [<] key
[>] key [<] key
[>] key [<] key
[>] key [<] key
[>] key [<] key
[>] key [<] key
296 AP-74111 - Revision 1.4

6.3.3 Counter Print Menu
This menu prints the life counter values.
[Enter]
[Enter]
After media is set

6
6.3.4 Media Feed Menu
This menu feeds media into the printer frontward or backward.

The mechanical initialization should be performed if not performed yet.
[Enter]
[–] key: Feeds forward
[+] key: Feeds backward
Note
 This is the same function as the Media Feed Menu
AP-74111 - Revision 1.4 297

298 AP-74111 - Revision 1.4

Chapter 7 Adjustment
Introduction. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 302
Adjustment Item . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 302

7
Working with Mutoh Service Assistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305
 Parameter Backup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305
 Jigs and Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 306
 Required Environment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 306
 Installing Mutoh Service Assistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 306
 Creating Shortcut icon . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 306
 Confirming “Mutoh Service Assistance” launch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307
 Setting Language . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307
 PC IP Address Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 308
 Changing to Technician Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 309
 Connecting Printer to PC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 310
 Starting the Printer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 311
 Printer mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 311
 Starting Board Manager Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 312
 Confirming Printer IP Address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 313
 Selecting Printer Model and Confirming the IP Address . . . . . . . . . . . . 315
 Date & Time Setting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 315
 Editing Media Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 317
 Downloading and Saving Error Log . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 319
 Updating Main Firmware . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 322
 Updating the Firmware of Heater Controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 323
 Receiving Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 324
 Downloading Backup Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 325
 Downloading Main Board Inheritance Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 326
 Sending Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 327
 Uploading Main Board Inheritance Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 329
 Using Diagnostic Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 330
AP-74111 - Revision 1.4 299

 Ink System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 331

 Smart Chip Information. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 332
 Heater System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 333
 Downloading Individual Code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 334
 Uploading Authorization Code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 336
 Referring Setup List Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 337
 Referring Setup List Information from Printer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 338
 Referring Setup List Information from Backup Parameters (*.prm) . . . . 338
 Referring Adjust Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 340
 Referring Adjust Parameters from Printer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 340
 Referring Adjust Parameters from Backup Parameters (*.prm) . . . . . . . 341
 Version Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 342
 Quitting Application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 343
Steel Belt Tension Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 344

 Jigs and Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 344
 Adjustment Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 344
PF Speed Reduction Belt Tension Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 347

 Jigs and Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 347
PF Encoder Assembly Position Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 348

CR Speed Reduction Belt Tension Adjustment. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 349

 Jigs and Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 349
 Adjustment Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 349
Head Accuracy Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 352

 Head Alignment (Horizontal Height) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 352
 Head Alignment (Vertical Slant). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 354
PG Height Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 356

 Jigs and Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 356
P_EDGE Sensor Sensitivity Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 358
300 AP-74111 - Revision 1.4

 Jigs and Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 358

P_REAR Sensor Sensitivity Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 361

 Jigs and Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 361
AP-74111 - Revision 1.4 301

7.1 Introduction
This chapter provides information on necessary adjustment items and procedures.
Note
Refer to Jigs and Tools
7.2 Adjustment Item

This section describes the adjustment items required in part replacement procedures.
When you adjust or replace any of the maintenance parts listed in "Table 7-1 Adjustment Item
List", you must always adjust the plotout quality using the self-diagnosis function referring to
Table 7-1"Adjustment Item List"(p.7-3).
Part replaced or Adjustment Adjustment item Reference

adjusted order
Head rank input (including Head Rank
1
initial ink charge) Ink Charging Menu
Head Nozzle Check
2 Head nozzle check
Menu
Head Slant Check
Menu
3 Head slant check
Printer head Head Accuracy
Adjustment
Uni-D / Bi-D Low Adjustment Uni-D/Bi-D Low/High
4
Uni-D / Bi-D High Adjustment Adjustment
5 Test printing Test Printing Menu
Parameter
6 Reset of head unit life counter
Initialization Menu
302 AP-74111 - Revision 1.4


adjusted order
7 Parameter backup Parameter Backup1-9
Updating Main
8 Main firmware installation
Firmware
Head rank input (no need for
9 Head Rank
initial ink charge)
10 Head nozzle check

Head Nozzle Check
Menu
7
Main board Uni-D / Bi-D Low Adjustment Uni-D/Bi-D Low/High
11
assembly Uni-D / Bi-D High Adjustment Adjustment
Side Margin
12 Side margin adjustment
Adjustment Menu
P_EDGE sensor sensitivity P_EDGE Sensor
13
adjustment Sensitivity Adjustment
P_REAR sensor sensitivity P_REAR Sensor
14
adjustment Sensitivity Adjustment
CR Speed Reduction
CR speed reduction belt
16 Belt Tension
tension adjustment
Adjustment
CR motor Uni-D / Bi-D Low Adjustment Uni-D/Bi-D Low/High
17
assembly Uni-D / Bi-D High Adjustment Adjustment
Side Margin
Adjustment Menu45
Side Margin
Adjustment Menu
PF motor
PF Encoder Assembly
assembly 21 P_ENC position adjustment
Position Adjustment
P_EDGE sensor sensitivity P_EDGE Sensor
23
P_EDGE sensor adjustment Sensitivity Adjustment
assembly Side Margin
Adjustment Menu
PF_ENC assembly mounting PF Encoder Assembly
25
position adjustment Position Adjustment
PF_ENC 26 PF_ENC inspection Encoder Menu
assembly Side Margin
Adjustment Menu
AP-74111 - Revision 1.4 303


adjusted order
29 CR encoder inspection Encoder Menu
30
T fence
Side Margin
Adjustment Menu
CR Speed Reduction
33 CR belt tension adjustment Belt Tension
CR driven pulley Adjustment
Side Margin
Adjustment Menu
35 PG height adjustment PG Height Adjustment
CR Speed Reduction
36 CR belt tension adjustment Belt Tension
Adjustment
37 CR encoder inspection Encoder Menu
P_EDGE Sensor
38 P_EDGE sensor adjustment
Sensitivity Adjustment
Print Head
Sequential printing endurance
39 Endurance (Nozzle
operation check
Print) Menu
Head Rank
Print Head
Carriage 40 Head rank input
Endurance (Nozzle
assembly Print) Menu
Side Margin
Adjustment Menu
Head Nozzle Check
42 Head nozzle check
Menu
Head Slant Check
43 Head slant check
Menu
Head Accuracy
44 Head slant check
Adjustment
45
304 AP-74111 - Revision 1.4

7.3 Working with Mutoh Service Assistance

In this section, the operation of “Mutoh Service Assistance” is explained below.
The software is also called “MSA”.
On this printer, you can export and import the parameter settings, as well as installation of the
firmware via network by using dedicated software.
Note
 For backing up/installing parameters or installing firmware, you can use either
7
of the following software. Follow the procedure corresponding to the software
you will use.
 Mutoh Maintenance Engineer Assistant: The explanation is described below. The
existing printers has been set up using this software.
 Mutoh Service Assistance: Newly built software. Some of the specification has
been added and revised.
Caution
 Do not provide “Mutoh Service Assistance” to the customer because the
software can access the functions concerning security data of the printer.
7.3.1 Parameter Backup
The NVRAM (Flash-Rom) installed on the main board assembly stores various parameters
for the system operation.
The available backup parameters are as follows.
. Panel setting parameters
. Mechanism adjustment parameters
. Main board-unique adjustment parameters
Note
 The main board-unique adjustment parameters cannot be erased or modified.
If the main board assembly is found to need replacement during maintenance operations,
make sure to back up the parameters. The backup data can be used to restore the original
system status, omitting some adjustment steps.
AP-74111 - Revision 1.4 305

7.3.2 Jigs and Tools
The following jigs and tools are required for Mutoh Service Assistance operation.
 Windows PC:
 CPU: Pentium 400MHz or higher, Installed memory: 128MB or more
 With one of the following installed: Windows98/Windows98SE/WindowsMe/
Windows2000/WindowsXP
 Equipped with network port (RJ-45) (10M/100M Ethernet interface)
 With dedicated network software (Mutoh Maintenance Engineer Assistant) installed
 Network crossover cable (For hub connection, network straight cable)
7.3.3 Required Environment
Before starting work, set up the following environment.
Installing Mutoh Service Assistance
Step 1: Place the CD-ROM on the CD Drive tray of computer and explore the data from “My
Computer“.
Step 2: Find “Mutoh Service Assistance” folder in the CD-ROM, drag and drop it to the
desktop.
Creating Shortcut icon
Create shortcut icon on the desktop to launch the “Mutoh Service Assistant” easily.
Step 1: Open the “Mutoh Service Assistanbe” folder.
Step 2: In the folder, right-click the “Mutoh
Service Assistance.exe”, then click
Send To - [Desktop (create
shortcut)].
Step 3: An shortcut icon of “Mutoh Service Assistance” appears on the desktop.
306 AP-74111 - Revision 1.4

Confirming “Mutoh Service Assistance” launch
Step 1: Double click the shortcut icon of

“Mutoh Service Assistance” on the
desktop to launch the software.
When launching software, the UI

language will be English.
7
Setting Language
You can select either Japanese or English for menu and message display.
If it is changed, the setting will be available by re-launch the software.
Follow the steps below to change the setting.
Step 1: Select desired language from
[Setup (S)] - [Language (L)] of main
screen.
Step 2: In the Language Check window,

click [OK]
The software quits automatically.
AP-74111 - Revision 1.4 307

PC IP Address Setting
To set up on Windows XP with the default IP address on the printer, follow the steps below.
Step 1: From [Control Panel], open [Network Connections].
Step 2: Right-click [Local Area Connection] and select [Properties].
Step 3: Double-click [Internet
Protocol (TCP/IP)].
Step 4: In [IP address], input

any value of
"192.168.1.1" to
192.168.1.252" or
"192.168.1.254".
Any numerical value between 1 and 252,
or 254.
308 AP-74111 - Revision 1.4

Step 5: Click [OK] to finish the setting.
Caution
 When the printer and PC are not directly connected with crossover cable but
connected via hub, the IP address needs to be different from that of devices on
the network to be connected. To connect via hub, consult with the network
administrator.
Changing to Technician Mode 7

Mutoh Service Assistance starts up with User mode (henceforth, MSA for User). When
performing maintenance work, change the mode to Technician mode (henceforth, MSA for
Technician).
Caution
 Do not provide the information about changing to Technician mode.
Only maintenance person is permitted to access the mode.
Step 1: In the main menu of User mode,

click [Help] - [Version].
Displays the [Version] window.
Step 2: Double-click the string part of

“Mutoh Service Assistance” and
“MSA“ icon
Displays a log in window.

Step 3: Enter the required strings In the
Login and Pass word filed and click
[Login].
The main menu changes and the

title bar displays “MSA for
technician”.
Step 4: Close the [Version] window.
AP-74111 - Revision 1.4 309

Caution
 Login name and Password are not disclosed in this manual. Contact a Mutoh
dealer for the information.
Note
 When “MSA for User” starts up in English UI mode, the “MSA for Technician”
mode is also displayed in English. You need to log off and log in after changing
the language mode by selecting [Setting (S)] - [Language (L)] in Technician
mode.
Connecting Printer to PC
Step 1: Connect a ethernet cable to the network ports of the printer and PC.
Network port
Note
 When connecting the printer and PC on a one-to-one basis, use a “crossover
cable”. When connecting the printer and PC via hub, use a “straight cable”.
 Use the printer and host PC on a one-to-one basis using crossover cable, not a
part of network, as possible.
310 AP-74111 - Revision 1.4

Starting the Printer
You have to start the printer in a mode (described later) depending on the function you will
use. The function and the corresponding start mode is listed below.
Note
 If the start mode is not appropriate, an error message will be displayed. In that
case, select an appropriate mode and restart the printer.
7
MSA functions Printer start mode
Date & Time Setting Start the printer with Board Manager mode.
Editing Media Type Start the printer with Printer mode.
Downloading and Saving Error Log Start the printer with any mode
Updating Main Firmware Start the printer with Board Manager mode.
Updating the Firmware of Heater
Start the printer with Board Manager mode.
Controller
Receiving Parameters Start the printer with any mode
Sending Parameters Start the printer with Board Manager mode.
Using Diagnostic Mode Start the printer with Printer mode.
Downloading Individual Code Start the printer with Board Manager mode.
Uploading Authorization Code Start the printer with Board Manager mode.
Referring Setup List Information Start the printer with Printer mode.
Referring Adjust Parameters Start the printer with Printer mode.
Printer mode
Starts the printer with Printer mode.

Printer mode indicates that the printer is powered on normally by pressing the Power.
AP-74111 - Revision 1.4 311

Starting Board Manager Mode
Starts the printer with Board Manager mode.

Follow the steps below to start the printer with mode.
Step 1: When the printer is in the operation
status or in the menu display
status, press Power to turn the
printer off.
Step 2: While holding down <, press Power.
The LCD displays [Board Manager
Mode]. If < is released, the display
turns to “Waiting for command”.
Note
 If not displaying “waiting for command”, follow the steps below.
 If displaying the IP address that is not default on the board, releasing Back will
display [IP192.168.xxx.xxx] (depending on the set address) on the LCD. In this
case, display either of the default IP (IP 192.168.1.253) or the set IP address
using [+] and [-], and press [Enter]. Then, “waiting for command” will be
displayed.
312 AP-74111 - Revision 1.4

Confirming Printer IP Address
You can confirm the IP address of the printer either with Printer mode and Board Manager
mode. Follow the steps below to confirm the IP address.
Confirming Printer IP Address with Printer Mode
Step 1: Start the printer with Printer mode.
Step 2: Press the Enter.
Step 3: After the LCD displays “Menu 1: Settings >”, IP address, subnet mask, and default
gateway can be confirmed by pressing the buttons explained below.
[>] key
[Setting/value +] key
[Setting/value -] key [Setting/value +] key

[Enter]
Displays IP address
[Cancel]
[Enter]
Displays Subnet mask
[Cancel]
[Enter]
Displays Default gateway
[Cancel]
[Setting/value -] key
Note
 If not displaying “Set 23: IP Address” or other item, change the settings so that
IP address or other items can be displayed by selecting “Menu 5: Basic
Selection“.
Refer to “Operation Manual“
Confirming Printer IP Address with Board Manager Mode
AP-74111 - Revision 1.4 313

Step 1: Start the printer with Printer mode.

Step 2: Confirm that only the Power lamp is
on, press other than Power.
㹵㹟㹧㹲㹧㹬㹥ࠉ㹤㹭㹰ࠉ㹡㹭㹫㹫㹟㹬㹢
LCD display changes as shown * key
right and IP address or subnet 㹇㹎ࠉࠉ㸻㸯㸷㸰㸬㸯㸴㸶㸬㸮㸮㸯㸬㸰㸳㸱
mask can be confirmed.
* key
㹋㸿㹑㹉㸻㸰㸳㸳㸬㸰㸳㸳㸬㸰㸳㸳㸬㸮㸮㸮
* key
* key: Any key other than [Power] key.
The LCD display changes as shown

right if the network interface card
cannot be recognized because of the 㹵㹟㹧㹲㹧㹬㹥ࠉ㹤㹭㹰ࠉ㹡㹭㹫㹫㹟㹬㹢
damage or poor contacting. * key
㹌㹭ࠉ㹌㹣㹲㹵㹭㹰㹩ࠉ㹇㹬㹲㹣㹰㹤㹟㹡㹣
* key
* key: Any key other than [Power] key.
314 AP-74111 - Revision 1.4

Selecting Printer Model and Confirming the IP Address
Step 1: Double-click the shortcut icon (on

the desktop) to start “Mutoh Service
Assistance.exe”
Step 2: Change the mode to “MSA for Technician”.

Refer to Changing to Technician Mode 7
Step 3: On the main menu, select [Settings
(S)] - [Options (O)].
Step 4: When selecting a printer model,

select the one from the combo box.
8,
By selecting a printer model, the
corresponding functions will be
activated.
Step 5: Confirm that the displayed IP

address matches the one of the
printer. The default IP address is 8,
“192.168.1.253”. After the
confirmation, click the OK.
If the address is different from the

default value, change it to
“192.168.1.253” and click the OK.
Caution
 Use the default IP address if there is no problem on using the printer. If
you want to use Other than the default value, consult the network
administrator of the network.
 Do not add “0” when setting an IP address of 1 or 2 digit to IP address field to
make the value 3 digit. Foe example, if you want to enter “010” instead of “10“,
the network device of the printer will not recognize “010” as “10” so that the
communication error will occur.
7.3.4 Date & Time Setting
AP-74111 - Revision 1.4 315

Sets date and time of the printer.

These data has been transferred from PC to printer. The setting can be confirmed in the
“Time setting” of the self-diagnosis function.Time Check
Note
 The date and time information of PC is transferred directly. Check whether the
information is correct or not.
 Confirm that the printer is started with Board Manager mode.
Refer to Starting Board Manager Mode
Step 1: On the main menu of MSA for

Technician, click [Date & Time
Update].
Step 2: When the "Date & time update"

window opens, click [OK].
Transferring will start.
Step 3: While transferring, “Communication

situation” window is displayed.
Step 4: When transferring completes and

the “Install completed” window
opens, confirm that the installed
date is correct, and click [OK].
316 AP-74111 - Revision 1.4

7.3.5 Editing Media Type
This section describes how to edit media type.
Note
 Before editing, make sure that the printer is started with Printer mode.
Printer mode
Step 1: On the main menu of “MSA for 7

Technician”, click [Media Type Edit].
Step 2: On the “Media Type Edit” window,

click [Download].
Click [Cancel] to return to the main

window.
Step 3: On the “Media type download”

window, click [OK].
AP-74111 - Revision 1.4 317

Step 4: After downloading the media type

data, the “Media type download”
window opens.
Click [OK] and return to “Media

Type Edit” window.
Step 5: Media type editing is finished, click

[Upload].

Step 6: On the “Media type upload”
window, click [OK].
The media type list will be updated.
Step 7: On the “Media type upload”

window, confirm the message that
the upload is finished and click
[OK].
The window returns to “Media type

edit” window.
318 AP-74111 - Revision 1.4

7.3.6 Downloading and Saving Error Log
This section describes how to download and save the error log by using MSA for Technician.
Note
 Downloading and saving error log can be done either in Printer mode and
Board Manager mode.

Technician, click [Error Log
7
Download].
Step 2: On the “Error log download”

window, click [Download Log].
Note
 You can download the log data by selecting [Operation (O)] - [Download (D)] in
the “Error log download” screen.
Step 3: On the “Confirmation of error log

download” window, click [OK].
Step 4: While downloading, displays

“Communication situation” window.
AP-74111 - Revision 1.4 319

Step 5: The download is finished, the result

is displayed on the “Error log
download” window.
If the printer has no log data, <No

data> is displayed on the window.

window, click [Save as].
Note
 Saving log data can be done by selecting [File] - [Save as...] in the on the “Error
log download” window.
Step 7: On the “Save As” window, enter a

file name and click [Save].
The file extension will be “*.hst“.
320 AP-74111 - Revision 1.4

 When referring error log, follow the steps below.

window, click [Open]
Alternatively, select [File] - [Open].
Step 9: Click a log file (*.hst) you want to

refer and click [Open].

Step 10: In the “Error log download” window,

the imported data in the above step
is displayed.
AP-74111 - Revision 1.4 321

7.3.7 Updating Main Firmware
Note
 Before the operation, make sure to start the printer in Board Manager mode.
Refer to: Starting Board Manager Mode

Technician, click [Main F/W
Update].
Step 2: Click and select an installation file

(*.jfl) you want to transfer, then click

[Open].
* Click Cancel to return to the main

window.
Step 3: On the “Main F/W update” window,

click [OK].
Step 4: While transferring main firmware

data, it displays “Communication
situation” window.
Step 5: On the “Transfer completed“

window, click [OK] to close the
window.
Caution
 After displaying “Transfer completed”, only the transfer of installation file from
“MSA for Technician” to the printer is completed, not program installation to
the printer. Do not power off the printer until installation to the printer finishes.
A buzzer on the MAIN board assembly sounds three times when the program
installation finishes.
322 AP-74111 - Revision 1.4

7.3.8 Updating the Firmware of Heater Controller
In this section, how to update the firmware of heater controller by using MSA for Technician.
Note
 Before the operation, make sure the printer starts in Board Manager mode.
Refer to: Starting Board Manager Mode
Step 1: On the main menu of MSA for 7

Technician, click [Heater Controller
F/W Update].
Step 2: Click and select an installation file

(*.mfl) you want to transfer, then
click [Open].
* Click [Cancel] to return to the main

window.
Step 3: On the “Heater controller F/W

update” window, click [OK].

window.
Step 4: While transferring the firmware

data, it displays “Communication
situation” window.

window.
Step 5: On the “Transfer completed”

window, click [OK] to close the
window.
AP-74111 - Revision 1.4 323

7.3.9 Receiving Parameters
This section describes how to backup the printer parameter and download the main board
inheritance information.
Note
 Downloading and saving of backup parameters and main board inheritance
information can be done either in Printer mode and Board Manager mode.

Technician, click [Parameter
Download].
Step 2: On the “Parameter download”

window, click [Yes] to start
downloading the main board
inheritance information.
Click [No] to start downloading the
backup parameters.

window.
Note
 If a communication error occurs after clicking [Yes] or [No], an error message
will by displayed. On the error message window, click [OK] to return to main
window.
324 AP-74111 - Revision 1.4

Downloading Backup Parameters

window, click [No]. The
“communication dialog” window is
displayed.
* Click Cancel to cancel the

downloading the parameter file.
7
Step 2: On the "Parameter download"
window, click [OK].
Step 3: In the “Save the download

parameter save” window, enter a
file name and click [Save]. The file
extension (*.prm) is automatically
attached.
Click [Cancel] to return to the

previous window
AP-74111 - Revision 1.4 325

Downloading Main Board Inheritance Information
Main board inheritance information consists of authentication information and backup

parameters.
When replacing a main board, download and save the main board inheritance information
and install it to the new board.
In this section, how to download the main board inheritance information from the main board
for replacement by using MSA for Technician.
window, click [Yes]. The “progress
dialog” window is displayed.
Step 2: On the “Parameter download“

window, click [OK].
Step 3: On the “Save the download

parameter save” window, the file
will be automatically named after
the printer serial number.
Choose the directory to save the

file and click [Save].
* You can name the file as you like.

Click [Cancel] to return to the main
window without saving the file.
326 AP-74111 - Revision 1.4

7.3.10 Sending Parameters
This section explains how to upload the printer backup parameter and main board inheritance
information by using MSA for Technician.
Note
 Before the operation, make sure that the printer is started with Board Manager
mode.
Starting Board Manager Mode 7
Technician, click Parameter Upload.
Step 2: On the “Parameter upload” window,

click [Yes] to start uploading the
main board inheritance information.
Click [No] to start uploading the
backup parameters.
* Click [Cancel] to return to the

main window.
AP-74111 - Revision 1.4 327

Uter

click [No]. Displays the
“communication dialog” window.
Click and select the file to upload,

and click [Open].

window without uploading.

Step 4: On the “Parameter upload“ window,

click [OK].
Note
window.
Step 5: While transferring, it displays the

“Communication situation“ window.

window without uploading.

click [OK].
328 AP-74111 - Revision 1.4

Uploading Main Board Inheritance Information

click [Yes]. Displays the “Save the
download parameter save” window.
Click and select the file to upload,

and click [Open].
(You cannot select any file with the
extension other than *.bii.) 7
main window without uploading.
Note
 If you select a file with extension other than *.bii and click [Open], an error
message will be displayed and returns to the main window.

click [OK].

Note
window.
Step 3: While transferring, it displays the

"Communication situation" window.
Step 4: After the data uploading is finished,

it displays the “Parameter upload“
window.
Click [OK] to return to the main

window.
AP-74111 - Revision 1.4 329

7.3.11 Using Diagnostic Mode
This section explains how to use the Diagnostic mode of MSA for Technician.
Each function has a independent monitor window (henceforth, remote panel window). You
can monitor the printer status viewing multi windows.
Note
 Before the operation, make sure to start the printer in Printer mode.
Printer mode
Step 1: Click [Diagnostic Mode] on the

MSA for Technician main window.
Step 2: Click a function name you want to

monitor on the “Remote panel”
window.

main window.
Note
 “Remote panel” window always monitors the printer status. Therefore, if a
communication error has occurred, an error message will be displayed.
330 AP-74111 - Revision 1.4

Ink System
Click [Ink system] on the “Remote panel” window to monitor the ink status of connected
printer.

7

N° Description
1 Indicates ink colours.
Displays subtank sensor status.
2 Green: Sensor is ON
Red: Sensor is OFF
Displays two-way valve status.
3 Open: Two-way valve is open.
Close: Two-way valve is close.
Displays cartridge status.
4 Green: Cartridge(s) is attached.
Red: Cartridge(s) is not attached.
Displays that ink is almost end.
5 Green: Normal
Red: Almost end
6 Displays head temperature. (C = Celsius, F = Fahrenheit)
7 Stops monitoring.
Note
 If a sensor has a problem and cannot monitor the printer status, the item is
displayed in gray. Also, if the printer does not have the function, the item is
displayed in gray.
AP-74111 - Revision 1.4 331

Smart Chip Information
Click [Smart chip information] on the “Remote panel” window to monitor the ink cartridge
status of connected printer.

N° Description
Displays following cartridge information.
 Format check
 Format
 Colour
 Cartridge type
 Ink kind
1
 Capacity (ml)
 Consume (ml)
 Company code
 Serial N°
 Insert count
 Empty flag
2 Displays no information if no cartridge is inserted.
3 Stops monitoring.
Indicates any other colour cartridge than specified is
4
inserted to the slot.
332 AP-74111 - Revision 1.4

Heater System
Click [Heater system] on the “Remote panel” window to monitor the heater status of
connected printer.

N° Description
Displays the information of following functions
concerning pre-heater, platen heater, and after heater
(top to bottom)
 Print temperature
 Wait temperature
1
 Wait time over setting
 Thermistor 1 - 4
* Displays Each value in both C (Celsius) and F
(Fahrenheit). “AD” is reference information for
developers.
Turns to green when thermistor temperature reaches the
2
set value.
3 Stops monitoring.
Turns to green when temperature reaches set value and
4
starts printing.
Note
 If the temperature sensor has a problem and cannot display the monitored
information, thermistor temperature information displays “20 °C (68 F°)”, which
is the default value.
AP-74111 - Revision 1.4 333

7.3.12 Downloading Individual Code
This section explains how to download individual code of printer using MSA for Technician.
Individual code is used for authorization code issue from the dealer of Mutoh Belgium nv
Note
 Before the operation, make sure that the printer starts in Board Manager mode.
Step 1: Click [Individual Code Download]

on the main window of MSA for
Technician.
Step 2: Click [OK] on the “Individual code

download” window to download
individual code of the printer.

main window without downloading.
Note
 If a communication error occurs after clicking [Yes] or [No], it displays an error
message. On the error message window, click [OK] to return to main window.
Step 3: While downloading individual code,

it displays the progress dialog.
Step 4: After downloading the code,

“Individual code download” window
will be displayed.

main window.
334 AP-74111 - Revision 1.4

Step 5: On the “Save the individual code”

window, specify a directory or a
folder to save the file, and click
[Save]. (The file extension (*.ink)
will automatically attached.)

main window without saving.

7
Note
 The individual code saved above is used for authorization code issue.
Send the individual code file to a dealer of Mutoh Belgium nv to obtain an
authorization code file.
AP-74111 - Revision 1.4 335

7.3.13 Uploading Authorization Code
This section explains how to upload an authorization code file from PC to printer using MSA
for Technician. Send the individual code file to a dealer of Mutoh Belgium nv to obtain an
Note
 Before the operation, make sure that;
 Save the authorization code file (*.ulk) to a folder before uploading the file to the
printer.
 Printer is started with Board Manager mode. Refer to: Starting Board Manager
Mode
Step 1: Click [Authorization Code Upload]

on the main window of MSA for
Technician.
Step 2: Browse to the folder where a

authorization code file is saved,
select the file and click [Open].

main window.
Note
 If you select an inappropriate file and click [Open], an error message will be
displayed and returns to the main window.
Step 3: On the “Authorization code upload”

window, click [OK] to upload the

336 AP-74111 - Revision 1.4

Step 4: While transferring the file, it

displays the progress window.
Step 5: After uploading the file, it displays

the “Authorization code upload”
window.Click [OK] to return to the
main window. 7
7.3.14 Referring Setup List Information
 This section explains how to refer the information of printer’s setup list using
MSA for Technician.
Note
 Before the operation, make sure that the printer starts in Printer mode. Refer to:
Printer mode
AP-74111 - Revision 1.4 337

Referring Setup List Information from Printer
Step 1: Click [Setup List] tab, then click

[receive] on the MSA for Technician
main window.
Step 2: While transferring the information, a

progress dialog will be displayed.
Step 3: the [Setup list] tab displays

Transferred setup list information.
Click [Save] to save the information
in text format.
* The contents of the information is

the same as the one from “Sample
printing”- “Parameter ALL”.
Referring Setup List Information from Backup Parameters (*.prm)
Step 1: On the [Setup List] tab of MSA for

Technician, click [Open].
338 AP-74111 - Revision 1.4

Step 2: Click a backup parameter file, then

click [Open].

main window.
7
Step 3: The [Setup list] tab displays
Transferred setup list information.
in text format.

printing”. However, date or firmware
version is not displayed.
Note
 The backup parameter file on the window can be referred after changing the
window tab. Also, obtaining other parameter or opening a saved parameter file
updates the contents.
AP-74111 - Revision 1.4 339

7.3.15 Referring Adjust Parameters
Referring Adjust Parameters from Printer
Note
 Before the operation, make sure that the printer started in Printer mode.
Refer to Printer mode
Step 1: On the [Adjust Parameters] tab of

MSA for Technician, click [receive].

Step 2: While transferring the information, a

progress dialog will be displayed.
Step 3: The [Adjust parameters] tab

displays transferred adjust
parameters information.
in text format.

printing”.
340 AP-74111 - Revision 1.4

Referring Adjust Parameters from Backup Parameters (*.prm)
Step 1: On the [Adjust Parameters] tab,

click [Open].
Step 2: Click a backup parameter file, then

click [Open].
main window.
Note
 If you select a file with an extension other than a prm file extension prm”, and
click [Open], an error message appears and returns to the main window.
Step 3: The [adjust parameters] tab

displays the transferred adjust
parameters information.
in text format.

printing”. However, date or firmware
version is not displayed.
AP-74111 - Revision 1.4 341

Note
 The backup parameter file on the window can be referred after changing the
window tab. Also, obtaining other parameter or opening a saved parameter file
updates the contents.
7.3.16 Version Information
This sections explains how to confirm the version of the MSA.

Step 1: On the main window, select [Help
(H)] - [Version (V)].
Step 2: After confirming the software

version on the “Version” window,
click [OK] to return to the main
window.
342 AP-74111 - Revision 1.4

7.3.17 Quitting Application
This section explains how to quit the application.

Step 1: On the main window of MSA for
Technician, click [Exit] or [x] on the
upper right of the screen to quit the
application.
* The values set in [Setup (S)] -

[Option (O)] is saved and loaded
7
when printer starts up next time.
Note
 Once you quit the MSA, it starts with User mode next time. If you want to start it
up with Technician mode, you must login operation once more.
AP-74111 - Revision 1.4 343

7.4 Steel Belt Tension Adjustment

This section describes the procedure to adjust the tension of the steel belt.
When you have removed and installed the steel belt, always adjust the steel belt tension.
The jigs and tools required for steel belt tension adjustment are as follows.
 Tension gauge: for measuring Max. 2N (204gf)
 Adhesive material
Note
 Refer to Jigs and Tools for the details of jigs and tools required for this work.
7.4.2 Adjustment Procedure
To adjust the steel belt tension, follow the steps below.

Step 3: Press the tension gauge at the centre position of the steel belt.
1
2 3
344 AP-74111 - Revision 1.4

N° Part name
1 Steel belt
2 Tension gauge
3 Y tension attachment
Note
 The steel belt tension specification is 0.98N ± 0.09N (100gf ± 10gf). 7
 The range where the steel belt moves up and down in the pulley is 1 mm or
less.
Step 4: If the tension of the steel belt does not agree to the specification, adjust the tension
with a steel belt tension screw.
1
N° Part name
1 Steel belt
2 Steel belt tension screw
Caution
 Adjust the steel belt so that the steel belt is equally balanced. If not, the steel
belt may be cut.
AP-74111 - Revision 1.4 345

N° Part name
1 Adhesive material applying surface
Step 6: Close all the covers.
346 AP-74111 - Revision 1.4

7.5 PF Speed Reduction Belt Tension Adjustment

This section describes the procedure to adjust the tension of PF speed reduction belt.
After maintenance work concerning attaching / detaching PF speed reduction belt, such as
PF motor detachment, adjust the tension of PF speed reduction belt.
Use the tool for adjusting PF belt tension for position adjustment of PF encoder and PF belt
tension.
7.5.1 Jigs and Tools 7

The jigs and tools required for PF speed reduction belt tension adjustment are as follows.
 Tension gauge: Max 40N (4,080gf) for measurement
 Refer to Jigs and Tools for the details of jigs and tools required for this work.
To adjust the tension of PF speed reduction belt, follow the steps below.
Step 1: Loosen the screw that retains the PF motor assembly so that the assembly still
remains the same.
Refer to Replacing PF Motor Assembly
Step 2: Hook the tip of tension gauge to the shaft of PF motor assembly.
N° Part name
1 Steel belt
2 Steel belt tension screw
Step 3: Pull the tension gauge to the direction shown with the arrow mark above.
Step 4: Pull the shaft of PF motor assembly until the tension gauge indicates 34.32 ± 3.43N
(3,500gf ± 350gf), then tighten the screw that retains PF motor assembly.
AP-74111 - Revision 1.4 347

7.6 PF Encoder Assembly Position Adjustment

After replacing the PF encoder, adjust the PF encoder position.

Step 2: Loosen the screws that retain PF encoder.
Step 3: Align the PF encoder assembly so that the corner covers the periphery of the PF
encoder scale, then retain the PF encoder assembly with screws.
Note
 Align the PF encoder so that the encoder scale slit periphery came very close
to the corners of the PF encoder.
PF encorder scale
come very close to
this point.
PF encorder scale
PF encorder
Step 4: Attach the slit guide to the PF encoder assembly.

N° Part name
1 Slit guide
2 Scale

3 PF scale assembly
Step 5: Turn the scale around to check that it does not swing toward the speed reduction
pulley from the centre of the encoder gap. If it swings, adjust the PF encoder
assembly position again.
Note
 There is no problem even if the scale hits the slit guide when turned around.
348 AP-74111 - Revision 1.4

7.7 CR Speed Reduction Belt Tension Adjustment

This section describes the procedure to adjust the tension of the CR speed reduction belt.
When you have removed and installed the CR speed reduction belt, adjust the CR speed
reduction belt tension.
The jigs and tools required for CR speed reduction belt tension adjustment are as follows.
7
 Tension gauge: for measuring Max. 40N (4080gf)
7.7.2 Adjustment Procedures

Step 3: Remove the panel to conversion board tape wire from the flat cramps (2) on the
back of the cartridge cover stay R.
4 1
N° Part name
1 CR motor assembly
2 Cartridge cover stay R
3 Panel to conversion board tape wire
4 Flat cramp
AP-74111 - Revision 1.4 349

Step 4: Remove the screws (3) that retain cartridge cover stay R.
Upper 3 2 Lower
1 2 3
N° Part name
1 CR motor assembly
3 Screws that retain cartridge cover stay R
Step 5: Remove the cartridge cover stay R.

Step 6: Loosen the hexagon bolts (4) that retain CR motor mounting plate.
1 3
2 2
N° Part name
1 CR motor assembly
3 Screws that retain cartridge cover stay R
Step 7: Mount a tension gauge to CR motor mounting plate.
350 AP-74111 - Revision 1.4

3 Enlarged view 3
7
1 1 2
N° Part name
1 Tension gauge
2 CR motor mounting plate
3 CR motor assembly
Step 8: Pull the tension gauge in a direction perpendicular to the CR motor assembly so
that the tension of the CR speed reduction belt equals the specification.
Note
 The tension specification of the CR speed reduction belt is 34.32N ± 3.43N
(3,500gf ± 350gf).
Step 9: Tighten the hexagon bolts (4) that retain the CR motor mounting plate.
Step 10: Continue adjusting until the tension of the CR speed reduction belt equals the
specification.
Step 11: Remove the tension gauge from the CR motor mounting plate.
AP-74111 - Revision 1.4 351

7.8 Head Accuracy Adjustment

This section describes the procedure to adjust the head slant.
When you have removed and installed the head assembly, such as head assembly
replacement, always adjust the head slant following the steps below.
7.8.1 Head Alignment (Horizontal Height)
This section describes the procedure to adjust the head slant in horizontal direction.
When you have removed and installed the head assembly, such as for head assembly
replacement, always adjust the head slant and depth following the steps below.
Note
 Before starting adjustment, remove the following parts.
 CR board cover: Removing CR Board Cover
 Adjust the horizontal height of the head alignment before adjusting the vertical
alignment slant of head alignment.
 In this procedure, align the print head in the direction shown below.
Print head
 Lateral view
Step 1: Start the printer in the self-diagnosis function mode and print the adjustment
patterns in “Head Slant: Slant 1".
Refer to Head Slant Check Menu
352 AP-74111 - Revision 1.4

Step 2: Make adjustment based on the printed adjustment patterns.
B
A
20mm
C D E
 A: Check the slant at this point.

 B: Media feed direction
 C: OK
 D: Move the head adjusting cam upward.
 E: Move the head adjusting cam downward.
Step 3: Move the head adjusting cam lever to adjust head slant.
N° Part name
1 Head adjusting cam
1 2 Head mounting plate
AP-74111 - Revision 1.4 353

7.8.2 Head Alignment (Vertical Slant)
This section describes the procedure to adjust the head slant in vertical direction.
After operation such as head assembly replacement, adjust the head slant according to the
steps below.
Note
 Before starting adjustment, remove the following parts.
CR board cover: Refer to: Replacing CR Board Assembly
 Before aligning print head in vertical direction, perform the alignment in
horizontal direction.
Refer to Head Alignment (Horizontal Height)
In this procedure, align the print head in the direction shown below.
Print head
Lateral view
Step 1: Start the printer in the self-diagnosis function mode and select "Head Slant: Slant 2".
Refer to Head Slant Check Menu
354 AP-74111 - Revision 1.4

Step 2: Make adjustment based on the printed adjustment patterns.
4-B 4-A 3-B 3-A 2-B 2-A 1-B 1-A
CCW
7
4-B 4-A 3-B 3-A 2-B 2-A 1-B 1-A
B CW
C D E
 Check the vertical slant angle at this point.

 OK
 Move the head base mounting plate downward.
 Move the head base mounting plate upward.
Step 3: Loosen the head base mounting plate screw and move the head base mounting
plate up and down (in the direction shown below) to adjust the head vertical angle.
N° Part name
1 Head base mounting plate

2 Head base mounting plate screw
AP-74111 - Revision 1.4 355

7.9 PG Height Adjustment

This section describes the procedure to adjust the carriage height (distance between carriage
and platen).
The following jigs and tools are required for carriage height adjustment.
 PG height adjustment tool (VJ16): JD-42910
To make adjustment, follow the steps below.

Step 2: Unlock the head lock.
Step 3: Place the PG height check jig on the platen.
Note
 Place the PG height check jig where print heads pass over the jig when moving
the carriage.
N° Part name
1 PG height check jig
Step 4: Move the carriage from the origin side with the lever “LOW“.
356 AP-74111 - Revision 1.4

Step 5: Check if the carriage passes over the 1.3 mm part of the PG height check jig, but
not over the 1.4 mm part.
2 Enlarged view 2
L R
1.4mm
1.3mm
7
3 1 1
N° Part name
1 PG height check jig
2 Print head
3 Platen
Step 6: Reverse the jig and move the carriage from the opposite side of the jig.
Step 7: If the carriage passes over the 1.42 mm part of the PG height check jig, loosen the
screws (1 on each side) on the left and right side of the carriage that retain the head
UD collar to lower the PG.
1 2 2 3
N° Part name
1 Head UD collar
2 Screws that retain the head UD collar (
3 Carriage
Step 8: Loosen the screws (1 on each side) that retain the head UD collar to fix the height of
the head.
Step 9: Move the carriage back to the origin.
AP-74111 - Revision 1.4 357

7.10 P_EDGE Sensor Sensitivity Adjustment

This section describes the procedure to adjust the P_EDGE sensor sensitivity.
When you have removed and installed the P_EDGE sensor, the P_REAR sensor, or the
MAIN board assembly, adjust the P_EDGE sensor sensitivity.
 P_EDGE sensor
 P_REAR sensor
Note
 When you adjust the sensor sensitivity, note the followings:
 Perform work in a location where external light from sunlight and other lighting will
not affect the sensor.
 During media adjustment, lower the lever so that the media is in contact. If the
media is not securely held, the sensor detection accuracy may be adversely
affected.
 When operating the volume on the main board assembly, use a non-conductive
screwdriver.
 If a conductive screwdriver touches electronic parts on the main board or metal
components such as the frame, there will be a possibility that a short circuit will
occur.
The following jigs and tools are required for P_EDGE sensor sensitivity adjustment.
 Test media: MF-3G (A4)
To adjust the P_EDGE sensor, follow the steps below.
Note
 The adjustment parameters are as follows;
 HIGH level (with media): 216 to 226
 LOW level (without media): 0 to 80

Note
 Start the self-diagnosis function before setting the test media. Otherwise, the
suction fan does not rotate and you cannot get correct setting value.
358 AP-74111 - Revision 1.4

Step 2: Start the system in self-diagnosis function mode.

 Starting Up
Step 3: Select “Check 2: Test” from the self-diagnosis menu.
Step 4: After confirming the operation panel displays the “Check 2: Test“, set the test media
on the media base position and down the media hold lever to confirm that the
suction fan starts rotating.
Note
 The suction fan will not rotate if pressing the [Enter] before setting the test
7
media. Make sure to press the [Enter] after setting the test media.
Step 5: Select “Test 4: Sensor” from the inspection menu.

Step 6: Select “Sen 8: Edged??" from the sensor menu.
Step 7: Move the carriage to the centre of the test media.
Step 8: Adjust the P_EDGE sensor adjusting volumes as shown below so that the value
displayed becomes between 216 and 226.
Counterclockwise: Sensitivity increases
Clockwise: Sensitivity decreases
 Trimmer R361: Rough adjustment
 Trimmer R365: Fine adjustment
Enlarged view
2 1
N° Part name
1 Trimmer R361
2 Trimmer R365
Step 9: Move the carriage and adjust the P_EDGE sensor adjusting volumes so that the
value displayed becomes between 216 and 226.
AP-74111 - Revision 1.4 359

Step 10: Move the carriage so that the P_EDGE sensor is moved from the media setting
position to the non-reflective tape area.
1
N° Part name
1 Platen
2 Non-reflective tape
Step 11: Check that the value displayed is "80" or less.

Step 12: Move the carriage back to the origin.
360 AP-74111 - Revision 1.4

7.11 P_REAR Sensor Sensitivity Adjustment

This section describes the procedure for adjusting sensor sensitivity.
When the replacement of the following sensors or the main board assembly is done, perform
the P_REAR sensor adjustment.
 P_EDGE sensor
 P_REAR sensor
Note
7
 When you adjust the sensor sensitivity, note the followings:
 Perform work in a location where external light from sunlight and other lighting will
not affect the sensor.
 During media adjustment, lower the lever so that the media is in contact. If the
media is not securely held, the sensor detection accuracy may be adversely
affected.
 When operating the volume on the main board assembly, use a non-conductive
screwdriver.
 If a conductive screwdriver touches electronic parts on the main board or metal
components such as the frame, there will be a possibility that a short circuit will
occur.
The following jigs and tools are required for P_REAR sensor sensitivity adjustment.
 Test media: MF-3G (A4)
To adjust the P_REAR sensor, follow the steps below.
Note
 The adjustment parameters are as follows;
 HIGH level (with media): 216 to 226
 LOW level (without media): 0 to 80

Note
 Start the self-diagnosis function before setting the test media. Otherwise, the
suction fan does not rotate and you cannot get correct setting value.
AP-74111 - Revision 1.4 361

Step 2: Start the system in self-diagnosis function mode.

Refer to Starting Up
Step 3: Select "Check 2: Test" from the self-diagnosis menu.
Step 4: After confirming that the operation panel displays the “Check 2: Test“, set the test
media on the media base position and down the media hold lever to confirm that the
suction fan starts rotating.
Note
 The suction fan will not rotate if pressing the Enter before setting the test media.
Make sure to press the Enter after setting the test media.
Step 5: Select "Test 4: Sensor" from the inspection menu.

Step 6: Select "Sen 9: Paper Rear??" from the sensor menu.
Step 7: Adjust the P_REAR sensor adjusting volumes as shown below so that the value
displayed becomes between 216 and 226.
Counterclockwise: Sensitivity increases
Clockwise: Sensitivity decreases
 Trimmer R371: Rough adjustment
 Trimmer R373: Fine adjustment
MAIN board assembly

1 2
N° Part name
1 Trimmer R371
2 Trimmer R373
Step 8: Check that the value displayed becomes between 216 and 226.
Step 9: Remove the standard media.
Step 10: Check that the value displayed is "80" or below.
362 AP-74111 - Revision 1.4

Chapter 8 Maintenance
Introduction. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 364
Periodical Services. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 365

 Periodic Replacement Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 365
8
 Parts Which Require Inspection/Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 366
Part Life Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 367
Jigs and Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 368

 Required Tools. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 368
 Tools for Part Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 368
Lubrication/Bonding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 369
Transportation of Printer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 372

 Task Before Transportation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 372
 Task After Transportation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 372
AP-74111 - Revision 1.4 363

8.1 Introduction
This chapter provides information about the periodical services, part life, lubrication/bonding,
and transport.
Important
 Before starting any maintenance work, always perform the following
operations.
 Switch the printer power OFF.
 Remove the power cable from the power outlet.
Not doing so may cause electric shock or damage to the electric circuit.
 Unplug the cables connected to the printer.
 Failure to do so could result in damage to the printer.
Caution
 Make sure there is sufficient space around the printer when performing
maintenance work.
 When servicing the machinery inside with some covers removed, pay special
attention not to be injured by the driving mechanisms.
 Maintenance must be done by two or more persons for the following work.
 When disassembling or reassembling the printer and the dedicated stand
 When packing the printer for transportation
364 AP-74111 - Revision 1.4

8.2 Periodical Services

This section describes the periodical services required for this printer.
The periodical services ensures stable plotting quality of the printer.
Perform periodical inspections according toTable 1-2"Periodical Inspection Part List and
perform cleaning and part replacement as necessary.
Refer to Operation manual
Refer to Separate sheet “Exploded view 8
8.2.1 Periodic Replacement Parts
The parts in the following table require replacement once per year
Table 8-1 Replacement Target Parts
Maintenance part names Replacement parts Replacement procedure

(Maintenance part numbers)
Replacing PF Speed
Valve head assembly
Reduction Belt
VJ1614 periodic maintenance Replacing Maintenance

Maintenance assembly
kit Section
Replacing CR Drive
Cleaner head assembly
Pulley Assembly
AP-74111 - Revision 1.4 365

8.2.2 Parts Which Require Inspection/Replacement
Table 8-2 Periodical Inspection Part List
Part Timing Check point Action

 Media dust Clean it.
accumulation
 Foreign objects If ink deposits are
Media guide F Several times present, remove them
Platen front surface per year  Damages with a dampened cloth
and wipe the area with
a clean dry cloth.
 Media dust Clean it.

Timing fence accumulation
Several times
(CR encoder Foreign objects If any damages are
per year 
detection slit plate) found, replace the
 Damages part.
 Media dust
P_REAR sensor front Several times accumulation Clean it.
surface per year
 Foreign objects
Cleaner head Several times  Ink deposits

Clean it.
(Cleaning wiper) per year  Damages
Several times  Ink deposits

Pressure roller Clean it.
per year  Damages
366 AP-74111 - Revision 1.4

8.3 Part Life Information

This section shows how to check the life of the service parts.
To know the life of the service parts, check the maintenance counter from the counter display
menu in the maintenance mode.
Refer to Counter Display Menu
Part life information of this printer is shown in the table below.
8
Table 8-3 List of Parts Life Expectancy
Part Life expectancy Warning How to Replacement References
display restore parts
Not counted
internally. Waste ink
Waste fluid Detected at the Waste fluid BOX
- -
tank float sensor and box full (Replaced by
displays a user)
message.
At the first  Replacing
warning: CR Motor
 CR motor Assembly
 CR Driven  Replacing
pulley CR Driven
Pulley
Check Life Counter (Check the ink
CR motor 4,600,000 passes tube and the  Replacing
[CR motor] clear
CR cable.) Ink Tube
At the next  Replacing
warning: CR_FFC
 CR cable
besides
above
Replacing
Check Life Counter Replace as
PF motor 21 km PF Motor
[PF motor] clear necessary
Assembly
6 × 109 (6
Check Life Counter Replace as Replacing
Print head thousand million)
[Head] clear necessary Print Head
dots
60 million pulses Replacing
Check Life Counter Replace as
Pump (182,000 times Maintenance
[Pump] clear necessary
rotations) Assembly
AP-74111 - Revision 1.4 367

8.4 Jigs and Tools

This section provides lists of jigs and tools required for service operations.
8.4.1 Required Tools
Tools for Part Replacement
Table 8-4 Tools for Part Replacement

N° Name Part number Remarks
We recommend more than 250 mm
1 Phillips driver N°2 Generic product
shaft length.
We recommend less than 50 mm shaft
length.
4 Flat-head driver Generic product For replacing E rings
5 Box driver Generic product For replacing CR board assemblies
6 Ratchet Generic product
7 Long-nose pliers Generic product
8 Tweezers Generic product
Hex wrench (opposite
9 Generic product
side: 1.5 to 6 mm)
Name: JIS E-2.5
10 E ring holder (E-2.5) Generic product
Manufacturer: Iwata Denko Co., Ltd
Name: JIS E-5
11 E ring holder (E-5) Generic product
Manufacturer: Iwata Denko Co., Ltd
12 Penlight Generic product
For replacing take-up flange
13 C ring pliers Generic product
assemblies
368 AP-74111 - Revision 1.4

8.5 Lubrication/Bonding
This section covers the lubrication/bonding information.
After disassembling/assembling this printer, always perform necessary lubrication/bonding
according to Table 1-6 Lubricant List.
Caution
 Only use specified lubricants and greases. The use of unauthorized lubricants
and greases may damage the components and shorten the printer life.
8
Table 8-5 Lubricant List
Parts Item Manufacturer Type

Up/down
gear on Kanto Kasei
Apply to gear FLOIL G-MK-1
pressure Co., Ltd.
lever
PF motor
bracket / Apply to middle
Kanto Kasei
Middle gear gear inner FLOIL G-MK-1
PF drive Co., Ltd.
inner diameter
section diameter
Speed
Apply to drive Kanto Kasei
reduction FLOIL G-MK-1
pulley Co., Ltd.
pulley
Medium tray Apply to the areas

Kanto Kasei
slide, Grit the plates contact FLOIL G-MK-1
Co., Ltd.
medium tray each other.
AP-74111 - Revision 1.4 369

Table 8-5 Lubricant List (Continued)

Apply to the hole
Kanto Kasei
securing Y drive FLOIL G-MK-1
Co., Ltd.
Y rail base.
machining Apply to the hole
diagram securing the Kanto Kasei
FLOIL G-MK-1
return pulley Co., Ltd.
bracket.
While inserting
Y rail and roller guide, apply Kanto Kasei
FLOIL G-MK-1
roller guide to the downside of Co., Ltd.
the roller guide.
CR drive
section Apply to the
Pressure upside and the Kanto Kasei
FLOIL G-MK-1
shaft bearing shaft insertion Co., Ltd.
part.
Pressure Kanto Kasei

Apply to cam part. FLOIL G-MK-1
cam Co., Ltd.
Apply to the front

Super multi-dia
Roller guide surface of roller Mitsubishi
tetrat N°32
guide.
Apply to drive Kanto Kasei

Drive pulley FLOIL G-MK-1
pulley. Co., Ltd.
Head U/D Apply to head U/D Kanto Kasei

FLOIL G-MK-1
collar collar. Co., Ltd.
Head U/D Apply to head U/D Kanto Kasei

Cursor section FLOIL G-MK-1
cam cam. Co., Ltd.
Kanto Kasei
Slide gear Apply to gear. FLOIL G-MK-1
Co., Ltd.
Apply to the
position of the
Kanto Kasei
Head bracket screw hole FLOIL G-MK-1
Co., Ltd.
Head base securing shoulder
section screw.
Apply to the part

Head slide Kanto Kasei
contacting with FLOIL G-MK-1
base Co., Ltd.
the CR cursor.
370 AP-74111 - Revision 1.4

Table 8-6 Adhesive List

Apply
screw-locking
Three Bond Co.,
PF drive section Set screw agent to the 1401
Ltd.
coupling set
screw.
CR driven After adjusting

8
pulley steel belt, apply Three Bond Co.,
CR drive section 1401
adjusting screw-locking Ltd.
screw agent.
Apply to the area

Three Bond Co.,
Others Screw screw-locking 1401
Ltd.
agent is applied.
Table 8-7 Tape List

Attach acetate
tapes to the tape
The areas
wires or
sharpened
Others harnesses where Not specified
edge is likely
sharpened edge
to emerge
is likely to
emerge.
AP-74111 - Revision 1.4 371

8.6 Transportation of Printer

This section describes how to transport the printer.
Before transporting the printer, you must package it in the same manner as it was delivered
using protective materials and packaging materials so that the printer will not be subject to
excessive impact and vibrations during the transportation.
Follow the steps below to package the printer.
Task Before Transportation
Step 1: Start the Self-Diagnosis Mode.

Starting Up
Step 2: Start the Head Cleaning Menu 2.
HeadWash Menu
Step 3: Discharge ink of all heads.
Step 4: Remove all ink cartridges.
Step 5: Install the cleaning jigs.
Step 6: Fill shipping liquid.
Step 7: Remove the cleaning jigs.
Step 8: Turn the printer power off.
Step 9: Remove all cables including the power cable.
Step 10: Treat the waste fluid.
Step 11: Fit the printer with protective materials.
Step 12: Package the printer.
Refer to Operation manual
Task After Transportation
Step 1: Unpack, assemble, and install the printer.

Step 2: Make the printer ready for operation.
372 AP-74111 - Revision 1.4

Chapter 9 Troubleshooting
Introduction. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 374
Troubleshooting with Error Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 374

 Operation Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 375
9
 Errors with Message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 378
 Errors Requiring Reboot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 384
 CPU system serious error . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 385
 Mechanical Serious Errors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 388
 Error Messages During File Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 398
Troubleshooting Without Error Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 403

 Initial Operation Problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 403
 Media Feed Problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 413
 Printing Problems. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 415
 Noise Problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 434
 Online Function Problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 436
 Other Problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 438
 Problems in Using Mutoh Service Assistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 441
AP-74111 - Revision 1.4 373

9.1 Introduction
This chapter provides information on possible causes of machine errors/damage and
recovery actions.
If the printer malfunctions and displays an error message, refer to Troubleshooting with Error
Messages. If the printer malfunctions but does not display an error messages, refer to
Troubleshooting Without Error Messages.
If cause of errors/damage and recovery actions are not found in this chapter, or the machine
cannot restore to normal status, please contact the distributor your purchased the product
from or our customer support centre.
9.2 Troubleshooting with Error Messages

This section describes the messages displayed in normal operation and upon an error
occurrence as well as how to correct the error.
The available messages are as follows.
Table 9-1 Error Message Type
Priority Message type Contents Reference

1 Operation Displayed when the machine is operating Operation
status normally. Status
2 Error with Displayed when an abnormal condition Errors with
message occurs during normal operation. Message
3 Errors
Error requiring Displayed when a serious error critical to the
Requiring
reboot machine operation occurs.
Reboot
374 AP-74111 - Revision 1.4

9.2.1 Operation Status
This section describes the message contents, check items, and recovery actions for normal
operation.
N° Message Event/ Check item Action Reference

symptom
Is cover sensor Replacing
9

Tighten cover
Front cover assembly loose? Front
1 Cover open sensor assembly
is open. Cover
screws.
Sensor
 Are front cover R Correctly connect
sensor assembly front cover R sensor
cable and front assembly cable to
cover L sensor MAIN board
Replacing
assembly cable assembly connector
MAIN
connected J38, and front cover
Board
securely? L sensor assembly
cable MAIN board
assembly connector
J40.
 Does pressure
Lubricate pressure Lubricatio
lever move
cam. n/Bonding
smoothly?
Media  Is lever sensor Replacing
holding Adjust lever sensor
assembly fitted Lever Up
2 Set media lever is assembly position.
correctly? Sensor
turned
 Is sensor of lever Replacing
backward. Clean sensor face
sensor assembly Lever Up
using a swab.
contaminated? Sensor
 Is lever sensor Correctly connect
cable connected lever sensor
Replacing
securely? assembly cable to
Lever Up
MAIN board
Sensor
assembly connector
J30.
 Panel unit
Replace panel unit Replacing
assembly may
assembly. Panel Unit
be damaged.
 Panel cable may Replace panel Replacing
be damaged. cable. Panel Unit
AP-74111 - Revision 1.4 375


symptom
 Check cover
sensor assembly Replacing
operation from Replace cover Front
"Sen 5: Cover" sensor assembly. Cover
of self-diagnosis Sensor
function.
 Check lever
2 sensor operation
Replacing
from "Sen 7: Replace lever
Lever Up
Lever" of sensor assembly.
Sensor
self-diagnosis
function.
 Main board Replacing
Replace MAIN
assembly may MAIN
board assembly.
be damaged. Board
376 AP-74111 - Revision 1.4


symptom
 Is P_EDGE
sensor assembly Securely connect it
Replacing
cable at the to CR board
CR Board
head section assembly connector
Assembly
connected J208.
correctly?
 Is P_REAR
sensor assembly Securely connect it
9
Replacing
under media to MAIN board
MAIN
guide R assembly connector
Board
connected J42.
correctly?
Displayed in
 Check sensor Adjust with MAIN
the following P_EDGE
sensitivity from board assembly
cases: Sensor
No media "Sen 8:EdgeAD" volume (R361,
When Sensitivity
 of self-diagnosis R365).
3 media is Adjustmen
function. Replace P_EDGE
not set t
sensor assembly.
 CR board Replacing
Replace CR board
assembly may CR Board
assembly.
be damaged. Assembly
 Check presence
When displaying
of media from Replacing
"No media" even if
"Sen 9: P_REAR
media is set,
RearAD" of Sensor
replace P_REAR
self-diagnosis Assembly
sensor assembly.
function.
 CR cable may Replacing
Replace CR cable.
be broken. CR_FFC
Replace MAIN
assembly may MAIN
board assembly.
be damaged. Board
AP-74111 - Revision 1.4 377

9.2.2 Errors with Message
This section describes the contents of errors with messages as well as the check items and
recovery actions.
These messages are displayed when an abnormal condition occurs while the printer is
running.
Upon an occurrence of an error with message, the machine stops its operation at the same
time.
The error can be cancelled by removing the error causes. After that, the machine will restart
its operation.

symptom
 Is P_EDGE
Securely connect it
to CR board
1 cable at head CR Board
assembly connector
connected Assembly
J208.
correctly?
 Is P_REAR
Securely connect it
sensor under Replacing
to MAIN board
media guide R MAIN
assembly connector
connected Board
J42.
correctly?
 Check sensor  Adjust with
sensitivity from MAIN board
"Sen 8:EdgeAD" assembly P_EDGE
Media Media of self-diagnosis volume (R361, Sensor
detection detection function. R365). Sensitivity
error failed Adjustmen
 Replace t
P_EDGE sensor
assembly.
 Is CR cable Reconnect following
inserted connectors. Replacing
obliquely? MAIN
 Main board
Board
assembly: J9 -
Replacing
J11
CR Board
 CR board: J201 - Assembly
J205
 CR cable
Replace CR cable Replacing
assembly may
assembly. CR_FFC
be broken.
378 AP-74111 - Revision 1.4


symptom
CR board Replacing
1

Replace CR board
assembly may CR Board
assembly.
be damaged. Assembly
 Check presence When displaying
Replacing
of media from "No media" even if
P_REAR
"Sen 7:RearAD" media is set,
of self-diagnosis
function.
replace P_REAR
sensor.
Sensor
Assembly 9
Replace MAIN
assembly may MAIN
board assembly.
be damaged. Board
 Set media again If this error is
and check caused by user's
reappearance. inappropriate media
-
setting, instruct
correct media
setting procedure.
 Is suction fan - Check connection
judged as of following MAIN
normal when board assembly
checked through connectors.
"Test 6: Fan" -  Suction fan 1
"Fan 1: Suction cable: J25
fan" of
self-diagnosis  Suction fan 2
function? cable: J26
Replacing
 Suction fan 3
Media is Suction
Media skew cable: J28
2 running Fan
error  Suction fan 4
obliquely.
cable: J29
 Replace suction
fan assembly.
 Replace cable of
suction fan that
does not operate
normally.
 Is shielding
material secured Remount it at
-
at specified specified position.
position?
 Check pressure Apply grease
lever operation. (G501) to pressure Lubricatio
cam and make n/Bonding
adjustment.
AP-74111 - Revision 1.4 379


symptom
 Check which Remove all
cartridge has no cartridges and
ink from "Ctrl2: lightly push the
Sensor" -> black resin lever of
Sensor
Ink is "Sen.3: etc" -> ink sensor
Menu
running "12: Ink END" of assembly (K, C, M,
short. self-diagnosis Y) to check that the
[C] Printing is function. display of "[KCYM]
Ink Near possible. INK END" changes.
3 End Ink has run  Check contact of Reconnect following
[KCMY] out. Any the ink sensor connectors.
Ink End printing assembly. MAIN board: J43
operation HEATER
stops JUNCTION board: Replacing
immediately. MAIN
 Connector J5(K)
Board
 Connector J6(C)
 Connector J7(M)
 Connector J8(Y)
 For the ink  If ink colour
colour that is display changes
displayed as "Ink after replacing
Near End" or connector:
"Ink End", switch Ink sensor
ink sensor assembly is Replacing
assembly damaged. Ink
connector with Replace ink Cartridge
that of normally sensor Control
displayed ink assembly. Cable
colour.  If ink colour
display does not
change after Replacing
replacing MAIN
connector: Board
Main board
assembly may
be damaged.
Replace MAIN
board assembly.
380 AP-74111 - Revision 1.4


symptom
 Turn machine
OFF. Turn it ON If message
again and check appears: Refer to
-
if the same action in check item
message N° 2.
appears.
 Check presence
of ink cartridge
Remove all
cartridges and
9
from "Ctrl lightly push the
2:Sensor" -> switch of ink NOT
"Sen.3: etc" -> sensor assembly
"11:Ink NOT" of (K, C, M, Y) with Sensor
self-diagnosis something with a Menu
function. flat tip such as
ballpoint pen to
check that the
display of "[KCYM]
INK NOT" changes.
 Check contact of Reconnect following
ink NOT sensor connectors.
assembly MAIN board: J43
connector. HEATER
JUNCTION board: Replacing
MAIN
[KCMY]  Connector J5(K)
Cartridge is Board
4 No
not installed.  Connector J6(C)
Cartridge
 Connector J7(M)
 Connector J8(Y)
 For the ink If ink colour
colour that is displayed as "Ink
displayed as "Ink End" changes after
Replacing
Near End" or replacing
Ink
"Ink End", switch connector:
Cartridge
ink NOT sensor Ink sensor
Control
assembly assembly is
Cable
connector with damaged. Replace
that of normally ink sensor
displayed ink assembly.
colour. If ink colour
displayed as "Ink
End" does not
change after
replacing Replacing
connector: MAIN
Main board Board
assembly may be
damaged. Replace
MAIN board
assembly.
AP-74111 - Revision 1.4 381

symptom
 Check if the
same message If the message
appear if turning appears: Refer to
-
machine OFF the action in check
and turn it ON item N° 2.
again.
 Check if
Replace ink
specified ink Operation
cartridge with
cartridge is Manual
specified one.
used.
 Check if ink If detection does not
cartridge status operate normally,
Replacing
detection replace following
Ink
operates parts.
Cartridge
normally from  Ink sensor Control
"Ctrl 2: Sensor" assembly
[KCMY] Cable
Specified ink -> "Sen.3:etc" ->
Insert "7-10:[KCMY]  Main board Replacing
5 cartridge is MAIN
specified Ink ID" of assembly
not installed. Board
cartridge self-diagnosis  Ink ID sensor
function. assembly
 Check contact of Reconnect following
ink ID sensor MAIN board
assembly assembly
connector. connectors.
MAIN board: J43
HEATER
JUNCTION board: Replacing
MAIN
 Connector J5(K)
Board
 Connector J6(C)
 Connector J7(M)
 Connector J8(Y)
If no change occurs,
proceed to step (5).
382 AP-74111 - Revision 1.4


symptom
 For cartridge  If cartridge
that is displayed displayed as NG
as NG in "Ctrl 2: changes:
Sensor" -> Ink ID sensor Replacing
"Sen.3: etc" -> assembly Ink
"7-10:[KCMY] displayed as NG Cartridge
Ink ID"
self-diagnosis
of is
Replace
damaged. Control
Cable
9
function, replace defective ink ID
ink ID sensor sensor
[KCMY] assembly assembly.
Insert connector with
5  If cartridge
specified that of normally
cartridge displayed as NG
displayed does not
cartridge. change, or all
units are
Replacing
displayed as
MAIN
NG:
Board
Main board
assembly may
be damaged.
Replace MAIN
board assembly.
6  Check the Replacing
The part life Replace the head
condition of the Print Head
Check Life of the head as necessary. Clear
head. Counter
[Head] is almost the counter after
Initialization
expended. replacement.
Menu
condition of the Maintenan
The part life Replace the pump
pump. ce
Check Life of the pump as necessary. Clear
Assembly
[Pump] is almost the counter after
Counter
expended. replacement.
Initialization
Menu
The part life
condition of the Replace the CR CR Motor
of the CR
Check Life CR motor. motor as necessary. Assembly
motor is
[CR Motor] Clear the counter Counter
almost
after replacement. Initialization
expended.
Menu
The part life
condition of the Replace the PF PF Motor
of the PF
Check Life PF motor. motor as necessary. Assembly
motor is
[PF Motor] Clear the counter Counter
almost
after replacement. Initialization
expended.
Menu
AP-74111 - Revision 1.4 383

Note
 The square bracket pair in an error message contains the applicable ink colour.
 If no ink and no cartridge occur at the same time, no cartridge message has
priority to be displayed.
9.2.3 Errors Requiring Reboot
This section describes the contents of reboot-requiring errors as well as the check items and
recovery actions.
These errors are issued when any of the following critical problems occurs.
 Obstacle that prevents the machine's operation
 Damage of electric circuits (boards, motors, sensors)
 Abnormal operation of control programs
When any of the above conditions occurs, the machine follows the steps shown below before
stopping its operation.
Step 1: Switch off the driving system power automatically.
Step 2: Flash all lamps and generate intermittent audible alarm.
Step 3: Display the applicable error message on the LCD.
The error can be cancelled by removing the error causes and restarting the machine.
384 AP-74111 - Revision 1.4

CPU system serious error
N° Message Event/ Check item Action Referenc

symptom e
Interruption  Check AC power
exception supply and
E 016 error error: printer
1 Interrupt Abnormal surrounding
[00] condition in
interruption
equipment. 9
 Check
process. reappearance by
Command turning ON/OFF
border the machine
exception/ power several
TLB times. Make sure Contact our
exception to perform this customer support Operation
(load or check repeatedly centre. Manual
command even if no
E 016 error fetch) error: problems seem
2 TLB Modif Abnormal to be present.
[01] condition in (Make the same
command condition as
border. user's.)
Or TLB
exception in
data load or
command
fetch.
AP-74111 - Revision 1.4 385


symptom e
Data border  Check serial  Contact our
E 016 error exception/ number of the customer support
3 TLB-L/I TLB printer. centre.
[02] exception  Main board  Replace MAIN
error assembly may be board assembly.
Data border defective.
exception/
TLB
exception
E 016 error (store) error:
4 TLB-S Abnormal
[03] condition in
data border.
Or TLB
exception in
data storing. Replacing
MAIN
Address Board
exception
error (load or
E 016 error command
5 AddErr-L/I fetch):
[04] Address
error in
command
load or fetch.
Address
exception
E 016 error error (store):
6 AddErr-S Address
[05] error in
saving
process.
Pass  Check serial  Contact our
exception number of the customer support
error printer. centre.
(command Main board Replace MAIN Replacing
E 016 error  
fetch): assembly may be board assembly. MAIN
7 BusErr-I
Address defective.
[06] Board
error in
command
loading or
storing
386 AP-74111 - Revision 1.4


symptom e
Bus  Check serial  Contact our
exception number of the customer support
error (load or printer. centre.
E 016 error
store): Main board
8 BusErr-L 
Bus error in assembly may be Replace MAIN
[07] 
command defective. board assembly.
loading or
storing
9
System call
exception
E 016 error error:
9 SystemCall Abnormal
[08] condition in
system call
Break point
exception
E 016 error Replacin
error:
10 BreakPoint g MAIN
Abnormal
[09] Board
condition in
break point
Reserved
command
exception
E 016 error
error:
11 Reserved
Abnormal
[10]
condition in
reserved
command
Coprocessor
disabled
E 016 error exception
12 Copro error:
[11] Abnormal
condition in
coprocessor
AP-74111 - Revision 1.4 387


symptom e
Arithmetic  Check AC power  Contact our
overflow supply and customer support
E 016 error
exception printer centre.
13 Overflow
error: surrounding
[12]
Overflow equipment.
occurs  Check
Trap reappearance by Contact our
E 016 error 
exception turning ON/OFF customer support
14 Trap
error: the machine centre.
[13]
Trap occurs power several
times. Make sure  Replace MAIN
Floating board assembly.
point to perform this
exception check repeatedly Replacin
E 016 error even if no
error: g MAIN
15 Floating problems seem
Abnormal Board
[15] to be present.
condition in
floating point (Make the same
process condition as
user's.)
Watchdog
time-out  Check serial
E 016 error number of the
exception
16 Watchdog printer.
error:
[32]
Time-out in  Main board
watchdog assembly may be
E 016 error Abort error: defective.
17 Abort Err Process
[33] aborted
Note
 For the PC settings, refer to your PC's operation manual.
Mechanical Serious Errors
388 AP-74111 - Revision 1.4


symptom
 Check error
history from -
"Test 7: Record"
of self-diagnosis
function.
Set the number History
9

of endurance Menu
running cycles to
Abnormal
50 or more from Replacing
condition in
"Life 2: PF MAIN
PF motor
Motor" of Board
(X-axis) Check connection
self-diagnosis
during of following MAIN
function, and
printer board assembly
check if "X motor
operation. connectors.
error" occurs.
Displayed if
Check "Encoder:  PF motor cable
E 065 error the 
1 PF" from "Check assembly
PF motor difference
2: Test" -> "Test connector: J20
between
motor 5: Encoder" of  PF_ENC
command self-diagnosis assembly
value and function. connector: J12
Replacing
feedback  Check if Main  If NG, check PF Motor
from Power Board connection of Assembly
encoder is normally MAIN board
large. supplies DC24V. assembly Replacing
 PF motor connector: J12. MAIN
assembly may  Replace PF Board
be defective. motor assembly.
 Main board  Replace MAIN

assembly may board assembly.
be defective.
AP-74111 - Revision 1.4 389


symptom
 Check error
history from
"Test 7: Record" -
of self-diagnosis
function.
 Set the number History
of endurance Menu
running cycles to Check connection
50 or more from of following MAIN Replacing
"Life 2:PF Motor" board assembly MAIN
Abnormal
of self-diagnosis connectors. Board
condition in
function, and PF motor cable
media feed 
check if "X motor assembly
amount
error" occurs. connector: J20
(X-axis)
during  Check "Encoder:  PF_ENC
E 067 error PF" from "Check
2 printer assembly
PF encoder 2: Test" -> "Test
operation. connector: J12
Displayed if 5: Encoder" of
self-diagnosis  If NG, check
there is no
function. connection of
feedback
MAIN board Replacing
from  Check if Main assembly PF Motor
encoder. Power Board connector: J12. Assembly
normally
supplies DC24V. Replacing
 PF motor  Replace PF MAIN
assembly may motor assembly. Board
be defective.
 Replace MAIN
 Main board board assembly.
assembly may
be defective.
390 AP-74111 - Revision 1.4


symptom
 Check error -
history from
"Test 7: Record"
of self-diagnosis History
function. Menu
Set the number Check connection

9

of endurance of following MAIN Replacing
Time-out running cycles to board assembly MAIN
condition in 50 or more from connectors. Board
media feed "Life 2:PF Motor"  PF motor cable
amount of self-diagnosis assembly
(X-axis) function, and connector: J20
during check if "X motor
 PF_ENC
E069 error printer error" occurs.
3 assembly
PF time-out operation.
 Check "Encoder: connector: J12
Displayed if
PF" from "Check
pressure  If NG, check
2: Test" -> "Test
roller does connection of
5: Encoder" of
not reach MAIN board
self-diagnosis Replacing
the defined assembly
function. PF Motor
position. connector: J12.
 PF motor Assembly
assembly may
be defective.  Replace PF Replacing
motor assembly. MAIN
Board
Main board
assembly may be  Replace MAIN
defective. board assembly.
AP-74111 - Revision 1.4 391


symptom
 Check error
history from - History
"Test 7: Record" Menu
of self-diagnosis
function.
 Set the number Check connection
of endurance Replacing
of following MAIN
running cycles to MAIN
board assembly
50 or more from Board
connectors.
"Life 2: PF
Motor" of  PF motor cable
Overload self-diagnosis assembly
condition in function, and connector: J20
E071 error PF motor check if "X motor  PF_ENC
4 PF (X-axis) error" occurs. assembly
overcurrent during connector: J12
 Check "Encoder:
printer
PF" from "Check  If NG, check
operation.
2: Test" -> "Test connection of
5: Encoder" of MAIN board
self-diagnosis assembly
Replacing
function. connector: J12.
PF Motor
 PF motor Assembly
assembly may  Replace PF
be defective. motor assembly.
Replacing
 Main board MAIN
 Replace MAIN
assembly may Board
board assembly.
be defective.
392 AP-74111 - Revision 1.4


symptom
Abnormal  Check error
condition in history from
CR motor "Test 7: Record"
(Y-axis) of self-diagnosis
-
during function.
printer Move carriage in
9

operation. both directions
Displayed if while the printer
E 066 error the  Clean and
5 is turned off, and
CR motor difference lubricate CR rail
check if there is
between roller guide.
any position History
motor where carriage  Check
command Menu
does not move connection of
value and smoothly. following
feedback connectors.
from  Set the number Lubricatio
encoder is of endurance Main board: n/Bonding
large. running cycles to  CR motor
50 or more from assembly Replacing
Abnormal "Life 1: CR MAIN
connector: J21
condition in Motor" of Board
head travel  CR cable
self-diagnosis
distance connector: J9 -
function, and
(Y-axis) J11
check if "Y motor
during error" occurs. CR board:
E 068 error
6 printer
CR encoder  CR cable
operation.
connector: J201
Displayed if
- J205
there is no
feedback
from
encoder.
AP-74111 - Revision 1.4 393


symptom
Time-out Check if T fence is  If grease or dust
condition in contaminated or collect: Wipe
head travel worn out. fence with a dry
distance cloth.
(Y-axis)  If ink deposit Replacing
during presents: Wipe it T Fence
E 070 error printer off with cloth
7
CR time-out operation. dampened with
Displayed if neutral
carriage detergent.
does not
reach the  If contamination
defined Check "Encoder: or deposit is too Replacing
position. CR" from "Check 2: heavy: Replace T Fence
Test" -> "Test 5: T fence.
E 072 error Encoder" of
8 CR a) If NG:
self-diagnosis Check following Replacing
overcurrent function. T Fence4
cable connection.
Replacing
 CR board CR Motor
assembly Assembly
Overload connector J207 Replacing
condition in b) Replace following CR Board
CR motor parts. Assembly
(Y-axis) Replacing
E074 error during  T fence
9 CR2 CR_FFC
printer  CR motor Replacing
overcurrent operation. assembly MAIN
 CR board Board
Main board assembly
assembly may be
damaged.  CR cable
 Replace MAIN
board assembly.
 Check CR_HP  Check
sensor from connection of
"Sen 1: CR CR_HP sensor Sensor
Origin" of cable assembly Menu
self-diagnosis connector.
function.
CR_HP
E 081 error  CR_HP sensor  Replace CR_HP Replacing
10 detection is
CR origin may be sensor. CR_HP
not possible.
damaged. Sensor,
Lever
Sensor
 Main board  Replace MAIN Replacing
assembly may board assembly MAIN
be damaged. Board
394 AP-74111 - Revision 1.4


symptom
Abnormal  Wiper sensor  Check
E 082 error
condition in assembly may connection of Replacing
wiper
wiper be faulty. wiper sensor Cleaner
sensor
sensor.  Main board connector. Head
11
assembly may  Replace wiper Replacing
be faulty. sensor. MAIN
 Replace MAIN Board 9
board assembly.
 Check
connection of
head cable
connectors on
CR board Replacing
assembly side Reconnect head Print Head
and head side. Replacing
cable.
CR Board
Abnormal  Is head cable
Assembly
condition in inserted
E 075 error obliquely?
12 head cable
head cable
or head  Is it locked
thermistor. securely?
 Is head cable Replacing
broken? Print Head
Replace head
Replacing
cable.
CR Board
Assembly
 Head thermistor Replace Print head Replacing
may be faulty. assembly. Print Head
Abnormal  Disconnection of  Reconnect
condition in connector, connector of Replacing
E 076 error
pre-heater wrong wiring, or thermistor and Heater,
pre-heater
system heater heater. Thermistor
13 system
(thermistor, malfunction of  Check Replacing
heater). thermistor and connection of MAIN
heater may be board section. Board
occurred.
 Replace heater.
AP-74111 - Revision 1.4 395


symptom
Abnormal Disconnection of  Reconnect
condition in connector, wrong connector of
E 077 error wiring, or heater thermistor and
platen
14 platen malfunction of heater. Replacing
heater
heater thermistor and Heater,
system  Check
system heater may be
(thermistor, connection of Thermistor
heater). occurred. board section. Replacing
Board
Abnormal  Replace heater. Base (X
condition in Rail
E 078 error
after-heater Section)
15 after-heater
system
system
(thermistor,
heater).
 Communication  Check
cable may be connection
Abnormal faulty. between MAIN
condition in board to
 F/W on
serial controller board.
controller board
communicati
E 079 error may be faulty.  Check
16 on between
communica- Main board connection
MAIN board 
tion error assembly may between junction
to controller
be faulty. board to Replacing
board during
controller board. MAIN
printing  Controller board
operation. assembly may  Check Main Board
be faulty. firmware version Version
and install the Menu
latest version. Updating
Abnormal
Main
condition in  Replace
Firmware
serial controller board
communicati or MAIN board.
E 080 error on between
17 junction junction
error board to
controller
board during
printing
operation.
E 084 error Installed Installed head is not
Replacing
18 head head is manufactured by Replace head.
Print Head
identification incorrect. other vendor.
E 085 error Abnormal Main board Replacing
Replace MAIN
19 head condition in assembly may be MAIN
board assembly.
overheat head driver. damaged. Board
396 AP-74111 - Revision 1.4


symptom
 Check
Abnormal connection of Replacing
E 086 error Head or head cable
20 condition in head cable. Cursor
head OVP may be damaged.
head Section
 Replace head.
Temperature  Replace
Replacing
E 087 error
head
Abnormal
condition in
abnormality of head
transistor on MAIN 
thermistor.
Replace
Heater,
MAIN Thermistor
9
21 board or sensor board.
transistor head Replacing
abnormality of
thermistor transistor MAIN
thermistor may be
Board
occurred.
Abnormal  Replace MAIN Replacing
E 097 error
22 condition in - board assembly. MAIN
NVRAM
NVRAM Board
 Replace sub Replacing
tank Lo sensor. Waste
 Replace Fluid
two-way valve. Bottle
Abnormal
E 118- E Sub tank Lo sensor, Replacing
condition in  Replace junction Two-Way
121 error two-way valve or
23 error sub board.
sub tank Lo junction board may Valve
tank Lo
[KCMY] be defective. Replacing
sensor
Heater
Junction
Board
Assembly
AP-74111 - Revision 1.4 397

9.2.4 Error Messages During File Transmission
This section describes the error messages displayed when sending backup parameters and
firmware using dedicated online software, as well as their recovery actions.

symptom
Firmware
Transfer
data format Check if transferred After confirming it, Updating
failed
1 is firmware is an install firmware Main
Data format
inappropriat appropriate file. again. Firmware
error
e.
Transfer Cancel on
failed PC has Transfer firmware
2 -
Aborted by been again.
the HOST pressed.
Transfer
Communicat Check connection After resolving
failed
3 ion time-out between printer and problem, transfer
Data
occurred. PC. firmware again.
timeout
 Transfer
firmware again.
Transfer  If error message
File
failed is still displayed,
4 checksum -
Check-sum check if
error.
error transferred
firmware is an
appropriate file.
Transfer
Received
failed Check if program After confirming it,
5 wrong size
Wrong size file is appropriate. transfer data again.
data.
xxxxxxxx
Transfer
After confirming it, Updating
failed Incompatibl Check if program
6 install firmware Main
Incompatibl e firmware. file is appropriate.
again. Firmware
e F/W
398 AP-74111 - Revision 1.4


symptom
Transfer
failed ROM erase
7
Flash erase error.
error
Transfer
failed ROM writing
8
Flash write
error
error.
Board may be
defective. 9
Replacing
Transfer Replace MAIN
MAIN
failed ROM board.
Board
9 Flash comparing
compare error.
error
FROM
Transfer
written in Normally not
failed
10 unknown detected. FROM
Unknown
method is may be defective.
Flash size
detected.
Internal  Replace
No memory Normally not SODIMM. Replacing
Error
11 area is occurred. SODIMM MAIN
Memory  Replace MAIN Board
available. may be defective.
Exhausted board.
“Block reply  Reconnect
Transfer timeout” control board
failed occurred and MAIN board.
12
Block replay during  Replace the
timeout system code cable connecting
transfer. control board
Invalid value and MAIN board.
Transfer
is received Replace control Replacing
failed 
13 during board.
Block replay HEATER
system code Check connection
error xx  Replace MAIN CONT
transfer. between control
board. Board
“Final reply board and MAIN Replacing
Transfer timeout“ board.
MAIN
failed occurred Board
14
Final reply during
timeout system code
transfer.
Invalid value
Transfer
is received
failed
15 during final
Final reply
system code
error xx
transfer.
AP-74111 - Revision 1.4 399


symptom
 Check  Reconnect
connection control board
between control and MAIN board.
board and MAIN Otherwise,
board. replace cable
 Check if the connecting
green LED on controlboard and
control board is MAIN board.
lit.  If green LED on
 Check if the red control board is
LED on control off after
board is blinking. powering ON,
replace the
controlboard.
 If the red LED
blinks and there
is no problem
between
controlboard and Replacing
MAINboard,reins HEATER
tall firmware. CONT
If red LED is off, Board
Boot Opening
perform the Replacing
Transfer sequence of
following MAIN
16 failed boot code
procedures. Board
Opening transfer
Working
seq. failed failed.  Power offr, then
with
switch the DIP
MUTOH
switches as
Service
follows:
Assistance
1: ON
2: ON
3: ON
4: OFF
 Start the board
manager mode.
 Reinstall
firmware.
 Power off, switch
the DIP switches
as follows:
1: ON
2: OFF
3: ON
4: OFF
Power ON, then
check if red LED
blinks.
400 AP-74111 - Revision 1.4


symptom
Boot AA did not  Reconnect
Transfer replied to control board
17 failed Step 55 of and MAIN board.
55-AA boot code  Replace the
Timeout transfer. cable connecting
Boot control board
18
Transfer
failed
xx replied to
Step 55 of
and MAIN board. 9
boot code  Replace control
55-AA reply board.
transfer.
error xx
 Replace MAIN Replacing
An error (xx) board.
Boot HEATER
replied to Check connection
Transfer CONT
19 transfer end between control
failed Board
of boot board and MAIN
End code xx Replacing
code. board.
MAIN
Boot Transfer Board
Transfer sequence
20 failed echo of boot
Echo code did not
timeout reply.
Invalid
Boot
transfer
Transfer
sequence
21 failed
echo of boot
Echo error
code did not
xx
reply.
AP-74111 - Revision 1.4 401


symptom
Internal
Failed in Normally not
error Replace MAIN
22 writing occurred. FROM
Parameter board.
parameter. may be defective.
save error
Transfer  Replace
Invalid year
failed SODIMM.
23 data (xxxx)
Wrong year Replace MAIN
received. 
xxxx board.
Transfer
Invalid
failed
month data
24 Wrong
(xx)
month Replacing
received.
xx MAIN
SODIMM or MAIN Board
Transfer
Invalid day board may be
failed
25 data (xx) defective.
Wrong date
received.
xx
Transfer
Invalid hour
failed
26 data (xx)
Wrong hour
received.
xx
Transfer Invalid
failed minute data
27
Wrong min (xx)
xx received.
Press any button on
Check if LED Working
operation panel to
Transfer is display on operation with
Transfer not make the panel
28 not panel is in waiting MUTOH
ready display waiting
available. status of board Service
state. Then, reinstall
manager mode. Assistance
the software.
402 AP-74111 - Revision 1.4

9.3 Troubleshooting Without Error Messages

This section describes the symptoms of errors without an error message as well as the check
items and recovery actions.
9.3.1 Initial Operation Problems
9
Table 9-2 Symptoms, Check Items and Actions for Initial Operation Problems
N° Symptom Check item Action Reference

Is operation panel
Replacing
unit assembly cable Replace panel cable.
Panel Unit
broken or shorted?
Panel unit assembly Replace panel unit Replacing

may be damaged. assembly. Panel Unit
Machine power
1 cannot be turned Inlet assembly may Replacing
Replace inlet
ON be defective. Inlet
assembly.
Assembly
Power board Replacing

assembly may be Replace power board Power
defective. assembly. Board
Assembly
AP-74111 - Revision 1.4 403

Table 9-2 Symptoms, Check Items and Actions for Initial Operation Problems (Continued)

 Check panel cable
for proper
connection at
operation panel Reconnect following
unit assembly side connectors.
and MAIN board Replacing
 Main board
assembly side. MAIN
assembly: J5
Board
 Is the panel cable  Operation panel
inserted unit assembly
obliquely?
 Is the connector
Abnormal LCD securely locked?
operation (no
2 Panel cable may be Replacing
displays/garbled Replace panel cable.
characters) damaged. Panel Unit
Is operation panel
Replace panel board Replacing
unit assembly LCD
damaged?
Main board assembly Replacing

Replace MAIN board
may be damaged. MAIN
assembly.
Board

damaged. assembly. Board
Assembly
 Is "Sen: Cover  Check connection

open" displayed of cover sensor Replacing
Initial ink charge on LCD with front assembly Front
3 cover closed? connector.
not available Cover
 Replace cover Sensor
sensor assembly.
Check panel cable for

proper connection at
operation panel unit
Reconnect following
assembly side and
connectors.
MAIN board Replacing
assembly side.  Main board
MAIN
assembly: J5
 Is the panel cable Board
inserted  Operation panel
obliquely? unit assembly
 Is the connector
securely locked?
404 AP-74111 - Revision 1.4


Is "Sen: Lever up"
displayed on LCD Replacing
Adjust lever sensor.
with media set lever T Fence
lowered?
9
Check MAIN board  Reconnect the
assembly connectors connector. Replacing
J30 for proper MAIN
 Replace lever Board
connection. sensor assembly.
Main board assembly  Replace the main

may be damaged. board assembly.
 After replacement,
execute initial Parameter
charge from "Check Update
8: Parameter" - Menu
"Parameter 2:
Update" - "Update
1: Head Rank"
Are the following  After adjustment/

self-diagnosis replacement,
functions judged as execute initial ink
normal when charge from
3 checked with "Update 1: Head
specified cartridge Rank" of
securely inserted? self-diagnosis
function. Replacing
 Detection of
MAIN
presence of ink
Board
from "Ctrl 2:
Head Rank
Sensor" ->
"Sen.3: etc" ->
"12: Ink END".
 Detection of
presence of
cartridge from "Ink
Not"
Is specified cartridge  After adjustment/

status judged as replacement,
normal when execute initial ink
checked through "Ctrl charge from
Replacing
2: Sensor" -> "Sen.3: "Update 1: Head
MAIN
etc" -> "11: Ink NOT Rank" of
Board
KCMY" of self-diagnosis
Head Rank
self-diagnosis function.
function with
specified cartridge
securely inserted?
AP-74111 - Revision 1.4 405


Main board assembly  Replace MAIN
may be damaged. board assembly.
 After replacement, Replacing
3 execute initial ink MAIN
charge from "Adj: Board
Input Rank" of
self-diagnosis
function.
 If the part is
detached, remount
Though initial Is spring of ink it. Replacing
charge has system assembly Maintenan
4  If the part is
started, ink does detached or ce
not reach head. damaged? damaged, replace Assembly
ink system
assembly.
Though ink  If ink inflow is

reaches head, ink Is capping position confirmed, execute Operation
5
is not discharged appropriate? initial ink charge. Manual
from head.
406 AP-74111 - Revision 1.4


Step 1: Are valve  Remove head cover
Removing
head and check valve
Side
assembly, head assembly.
Maintenan
ink tube Remove side cover
 ce Cover R
and SUS (L, R) and cartridge Removing
pipe joint
screws (K,
cover, and check
ink tube and SUS
Side
Maintenan
9
Y, M, C) pipe joint screws. ce Cover L
securely
Removing
tightened?
Cartridge
Is O-ring
Cover
properly
(Lower)
installed?
Ink is not Does shield part of  Replace valve head
discharged though valve head assembly assembly and
6
ink charge is have air leak? check if cleaning
finished. operation causes Replacing
ink inflow. Print Head
 If ink inflow is
confirmed, execute
initial ink charge.
Is ink tube in ink  Replace ink system

system assembly assembly and
bent? check if cleaning Replacing
operation causes Maintenan
ink inflow. ce
 If ink inflow is Assembly
confirmed, execute
initial ink charge.
AP-74111 - Revision 1.4 407


6 Does pump motor  Reconnect MAIN
rotate during cleaning board assembly Replacing
operation? connector J22. MAIN
Board
 Replace pump
Removing
motor.
Maintenan
 Replace MAIN ce Cover
board assembly.
When cleaning
Replacing
operation is
Replace maintenance Maintenan
performed, are gears
base assembly. ce
damaged or poorly
Assembly
engaged?
When cleaning
Replacing
operation is
Replace maintenance Maintenan
performed, is
base assembly. ce
transmission gear
Assembly
shaft damaged?
Does ink tube have  Replace damaged

bend, scratch, or ink tube and check
leak? if cleaning operation
causes ink inflow
after each Replacing
replacement. Ink Tube
 If ink inflow is
confirmed, execute
initial ink charge.
Check connection of
head cable
connectors on CR
board assembly side Replacing
and head side. Print Head
Reconnect head cable. Replacing
 Is head cable
CR Board
inserted
Assembly
obliquely?
 Is it locked
securely?
408 AP-74111 - Revision 1.4


6 Is head cable Replacing
broken? Print Head
Replace head cable. Replacing
CR Board
Assembly
Is print head
assembly damaged?
Replace print head
assembly.
Replacing
Print Head
9
Is CR board Replacing
Replace CR board
assembly damaged? CR Board
assembly.
Assembly
Check connection of
CR cable connectors
Reconnect following
on CR board
connectors. Replacing
assembly side and
MAIN board  CR board assembly CR Board
assembly side. connector: J201 - Assembly.
J205 Replacing
 Is head cable
Main board MAIN
inserted 
assembly Board
obliquely?
connector: J9 - J11
 Is it locked
securely?
Is CR cable broken? Replacing

Replace CR cable.
CR_FFC

Replace MAIN board
may be defective. MAIN
assembly.
Board
 Is "Sen: Cover  Check MAIN board

open" displayed assembly connector
on LCD with J38, J40.
printer cover  Replace cover Replacing
closed? sensor assembly. MAIN
Machine makes Or, is cover Board
7 no operations after sensor assembly Replacing
turned ON. function detected Maintenan
as normal when ce Cover
checked through Sensor
"Test 4: Sensor" of
self-diagnosis
function?
AP-74111 - Revision 1.4 409


Check panel cable
connectors at
Reconnect following
operation panel unit
connectors.
After turned ON, assembly and MAIN
board assembly.  Main board Replacing
machine displays
8 assembly: J5 MAIN
"Initializing" and  Is panel cable
Operation panel Board
resets itself. inserted 
obliquely? unit assembly:

J1
 Is it locked
securely?
Is "Set Paper"  Check MAIN board Replacing

Machine does not displayed on LCD assembly connector MAIN
perform with pressure arm J30. Board
9
initialization even lowered?  Replace lever Replacing
if media is set. sensor assembly. Lever Up
Sensor-70
Is P_REAR sensor  Check MAIN board Replacing

assembly judged as assembly connector MAIN
Machine does not
normal when J42. Board
start operation
10 checked through Replace P_REAR Replacing
even if front cover 
"Test 4: Sensor" of sensor Assembly. P_REAR
is closed.
self-diagnosis Sensor
function? Assembly
Is DC cable assembly  Reconnect DC

Replacing
Machine does not connected correctly cable assembly.
Power
11 stop even if front between power board Replace DC cable
 Board
cover is opened. assembly and MAIN assembly. Assembly
board assembly?

Replace MAIN board
may be defective. MAIN
assembly.
Board
11 Power board Replacing
assembly may be Replace the power Power
defective. board assembly. Board
Assembly
410 AP-74111 - Revision 1.4


 Are the following  Follow the steps for
self-diagnosis the message
functions detected "[KCMY] No
as normal when Cartridge".
checked with  After adjustment/
specified cartridge
securely inserted?
replacement,
execute initial ink
9
 Detection of charge from
presence of ink "Update 1: Head
from "Ctrl 2: Rank" of
Head Rank
Sensor" -> self-diagnosis
"Sen.3: etc" -> function.
"12: Ink END"
 Detection of
Ink cartridge presence of
cannot be cartridge from
12
detected even if "Ctrl 2: Sensor" ->
installed. "Sen.3: etc" ->
"11: Ink NOT
KCMY"
Is specified cartridge  Follow the steps for

status detected as the message "Insert
normal when specified cartridge".
checked through "Ctrl  After adjustment/
2: Sensor" -> "Sen.3: replacement,
etc" -> "7-10: execute initial ink Head Rank
[KCMY]Ink ID" of charge from
self-diagnosis "Update 1: Head
function with Rank" of
specified cartridge self-diagnosis
securely inserted? function.
AP-74111 - Revision 1.4 411


 Is operation panel
Replace operation
cover broken or -
panel cover.
contaminated?
Check panel cable

connectors at
operation panel unit Reconnect following
assembly side and connectors.
MAIN board  Main board Replacing
assembly side. assembly: J5 MAIN
Operation panel  Is panel cable  Operation panel Board
13 inserted
accepts no inputs. unit assembly:
obliquely? J1
 Is it locked
securely?
Operation panel unit

Replace panel unit Replacing
assembly may be
damaged.

Replace MAIN board
may be MAIN
assembly.
malfunctioning. Board
Machine prints  Refer to Online Online

14 nothing though it Function - Function
receives data. Problem". Problems
412 AP-74111 - Revision 1.4

9.3.2 Media Feed Problems
Table 9-3 Symptoms, Check Items and Actions for Media Feed Problems

 Are P_REAR  Check following Replacing
sensor assembly
and P_EDGE
connectors.
 Main board
MAIN
Board 9
sensor assembly assembly: J42, Replacing
detected as J9 - J11 CR Board
Media comes off normal when Assembly
during media set checked through  CR board Replacing
1 assembly: J208,
initialization or "Test 4: Sensor" of P_REAR
printing. self-diagnosis J201 - J203 Sensor
function?  Replace P_REAR Assembly
and P_EDGE P_EDGE
sensor assembly. Sensor
Assembly
Media runs Is suction fan run as  Check connection

obliquely or normal when of following MAIN
meanders during checked through board assembly
2
media set "Test 6: Fan" of connectors.
initialization or self-diagnosis  Suction fan relay
printing. function? assembly: J25 - Replacing
J29 Suction
 Replace suction fan Fan
Media crinkles assembly.
during media set
3  Replace cable of
initialization or
printing. suction fan that
does not operate
normally.
When pressure lever

is moved backward
Media jams during
and forward, does
media set Lubricate pressure Lubrication
4 pressure assembly
initialization or cam. /Bonding
move smoothly in
printing.
synchronization with
it?
Media is torn Does pressure roller If pressure roller

during media set drag when pressure collects media dust on Operation
5
initialization or lever is raised? itself, wipe dust away Manual
printing. using a wet soft cloth.
AP-74111 - Revision 1.4 413

Table 9-3 Symptoms, Check Items and Actions for Media Feed Problems (Continued)

Does media guide  If media guide Removing
have large distortion collects media dust Media
or foreign objects? or other foreign Guide R
objects on it, (Upper)
5
remove them. Removing
 Replace media Media
guide. Guide R
(Lower)
When using roll Insert flanges correctly

Operation
media, are flanges into core pipe of media
Manual
attached correctly? roll.
Set recommended
media and check
Machine registers
printout again. With
wrong media size Is media in use a Operation
6 non-authorized media,
after media set recommended one? Manual
media sensor may fail
initialization.
to detect media
correctly.
414 AP-74111 - Revision 1.4

9.3.3 Printing Problems

Program ROM may Updating
Machine cannot print sequentially.

1 be defective. Update Main firmware. Main
Firmware
Main board assembly
may be damaged.
Replace MAIN board
assembly.
Replacing
MAIN Board 9
 Is P_REAR sensor  Reconnect MAIN
Replacing
assembly judged board assembly
MAIN Board
as normal when connector J42.
Replacing
2 checked through  Replace P_REAR P_REAR
"Test 4: Sensor" of sensor assembly.
Media feed after Sensor
self-diagnosis
printing is Assembly
function?
excessive.
Program ROM may be Updating
defective. Update Main firmware. Main
Firmware
Main board assembly Replace MAIN board Replacing
may be damaged. assembly. MAIN Board
 Is cleaning Perform cleaning twice Operation
adequate? consecutively. Manual
Is ink tube filled with Perform drop ink Operation
ink? charge. Manual
Perform "Check 4: If the nozzle check
Adjustment" -> "Adj 1: patterns are printed Test
NozzleChk" of printer correctly, refer to the Printing
self-diagnosis or "Test action in check item N° Menu
Print". 4.
Does pump motor  Reconnect MAIN
Missing dots in
3 rotate during cleaning board assembly Replacing
printing.
operation? connector J22. MAIN Board
 Replace Pump motor Replacing
assembly. Maintenanc
 Replace MAIN board e Assembly
assembly.
Are gears and
transmission gear Replacing
Replace maintenance
shaft damaged or Maintenanc
base assembly.
poorly engaged during e Assembly
cleaning operation?
AP-74111 - Revision 1.4 415


Step 1: Is spring of  If the part is
ink system detached, remount it.
assembly  If the part is Replacing
detached or damaged, replace Maintenanc
damaged? ink system e Assembly
assembly.
Nozzle plugging or Check cleaning wiper  Wipe cleaning wiper

ink splash is not condition. surface with Operation
4
eliminated even accessory polyknit Manual
after cleaning. wiper. After wiping
cleaning wiper,
perform cleaning
twice consecutively.
 If cleaning wiper is Replacing
sticky with ink, Cleaner
replace it with a new Head
one.
416 AP-74111 - Revision 1.4


Is nozzle face wiped/ Check wiper installation Replacing
rubbed correctly? condition and secure it Cleaner
correctly. Head
Is registered head
rank different from Enter correct head rank. Head Rank
actual head rank?
Does residual ink
collect on print head
Clean head as follows.
Refer to 1. Clean head
9
assembly or in
from "Adj 9:
nozzles?
HeadWash" of printer
self-diagnosis. HeadWash
Refer to 2. Perform Menu
initial ink charge from Head Rank
"Update 1: Head
Rank".
Refer to 3. Check
Nozzle plugging or printouts again.
ink splash is not Check if CR_ENC  If they contact with
4 eliminated even assembly and each other, adjust
after cleaning. T fence contact with CR_ENC assembly
(Continued) each other. and T fence
positions.
Replacing
 If problem remains CR Board
even after position Assembly
adjustment, replace Replacing T
CR board assembly Fence
and T fence.
system assembly assembly and check
bent? if cleaning operation Replacing
causes ink inflow. Maintenanc
 If ink inflow is e Assembly
confirmed, execute
initial ink charge.
Is print head Replace damaged print Replacing
damaged? head. Print Head
AP-74111 - Revision 1.4 417


No printing.  Check power Replacing
supply voltage Replace power board Power
5
Particular colour is (DC24V, DC42V). assembly. Board
missing. Assembly
Is spring of ink system  If the part is
assembly detached or detached, remount it.
damaged? Replacing
 If the part is Ink ID Board
damaged, replace Assembly
ink system
assembly.
Is CR cable inserted Reconnect MAIN board Replacing
obliquely? assembly connectors J9 MAIN Board
- J11 and CR board Replacing
assembly connectors CR Board
J201 - J205. Assembly
CR cable may be Replace CR cable Replacing
damaged. assembly. CR_FFC
Are valve head  Remove head cover
assembly, ink tube and check valve
and SUS pipe joint head assembly.
screws (K, C, M, Y)  Remove side cover
securely tightened? (L, R) and I/H cover, Removing
Is O-ring properly and check ink tube Covers
installed? and SUS pipe joint
screws.
Does shield part of  Replace valve head
valve head have air assembly and check
leak? if cleaning operation Replacing
causes ink inflow. Valve Head
confirmed, execute
initial ink charge.
confirmed, execute
initial ink charge.
418 AP-74111 - Revision 1.4


Does ink tube have  Replace damaged
bend, scratch, or ink tube and check if
leak? cleaning operation
causes ink inflow Replacing
5 after each Maintenanc
replacement. e Assembly
If ink inflow is
9

confirmed, execute
initial ink charge.
Are the following  Follow the steps for
self-diagnosis the message
functions detected as "[KCMY] No
normal when checked Cartridge".
with specified  After adjustment/
cartridge securely replacement,
inserted? execute initial ink
 Detection of charge from "Update
presence of ink 1: Head Rank" of
from "Ctrl 2: self-diagnosis Head Rank
Sensor" -> "Sen.3: function.
etc" -> "12: Ink
END"
 Detection of
presence of
cartridge from "Ctrl
2: Sensor" ->
"Sen.3: etc" -> "11:
Ink NOT"
causes ink inflow. Ink ID Board
confirmed, execute
initial ink charge.
operation? connector J22, J23. MAIN Board
 Replace Pump motor Replacing
assembly. Maintenanc
assembly.
AP-74111 - Revision 1.4 419


When cleaning
operation is Replacing
Replace maintenance
performed, does Maintenanc
base assembly.
transmission gear e Assembly
rotate properly?
When cleaning
Replace maintenance
5 performed, is Maintenanc
base assembly.
transmission gear e
shaft damaged?
Check head cable
connectors at CR
board assembly side Replacing
and print head Print Head
assembly side. Reconnect head cable. Replacing
 Is head cable CR Board
inserted obliquely? Assembly
 Is it locked
securely?
CR board assembly Replacing
Replace CR board
may be defective. CR Board
assembly.
Assembly
420 AP-74111 - Revision 1.4


 Check connection
of head cable
connectors on CR
board assembly Replacing
side and print head Print Head
side. Reconnect head cable. Replacing
CR Board
Is head cable
9

Assembly
inserted obliquely?
 Is it locked
securely?
Is CR cable inserted Reconnect MAIN board Replacing
Machine outputs all obliquely? assembly connectors J9 MAIN Board
6 - J11 and CR board Replacing
black printing.
assembly connectors CR Board
J201 - J205. Assembly
CR cable assembly Replace CR cable Replacing
may be damaged. assembly. CR_FFC
damaged? head assembly. Print Head
Replace CR board
may be CR Board
assembly.
malfunctioning. Assembly
Blocky printing  Is working
7 quality. environment
Blocky image appropriate?
Choosing a
8 printing. Use machine under
Place for
CR line seems specified environment.
9 the Printer
dotted.
10 White or black lines
appear in printing.
AP-74111 - Revision 1.4 421


Have you started Printing just after initial
printing immediately charge may cause
after initial charge? following symptoms.
 Printed line blurs.
 White lines
appear.
Blocky printing In such cases, perform
quality. cleaning two or three
7 Blocky image times and check printout
8 printing. again. Operation
9 CR line seems If symptoms remain Manual
10 dotted. even after cleaning,
White or black lines leave machine unused
appear in printing. for 1 hour or more. Then
perform cleaning again
and check printout.
If symptoms still
remains, refer to
Operation Manual to
contact the technical
support.
Is suction fan run as  Check connection of
normal when checked following MAIN
through "Test: Fan" of board assembly
self-diagnosis connectors.
function?  Suction fan relay
1 - 4 assembly: Replacing
J25 - 29 Suction Fan
 Replace suction fan
assembly.
suction fan that does
not operate normally.
422 AP-74111 - Revision 1.4


Is shielding material
Remount it at specified Replacing
secured at specified
position. Suction Fan
position?
If the media in Replacing
problem is roll media, Roll Media
does scroller rotate Holder
evenly? Assembly
Adjust roll receiver
on the
VJ16_L Side
9
assembly position.
Replacing
Replace roll receiver
Roll Media
assembly.
Holder
Assembly
on the
VJ16_R
Side
Is PF belt tension PF Speed
adjusted to Reduction
Adjust PF reduction belt
specification? Belt
tension.
Tension
Blocky printing Adjustment
117
quality. Check cleaning wiper  Wipe cleaning wiper
8
Blocky image condition. surface with
9
printing. accessory polyknit
10 CR line seems dotted.
White or black lines appear in printing.

wiper. After wiping
cleaning wiper,
perform cleaning Operation
twice consecutively. Manual
 If cleaning wiper is
sticky with ink,
replace it with a new
one.
rubbed correctly? condition and secure it Cleaner
correctly. Head
Is T fence  Clean T fence.
contaminated?  If T fence is still
contaminated or Replacing T
damaged, replace T Fence
fence.
Does pressure roller If pressure roller collects
rotate harder when media dust on itself, Operation
pressure arm is wipe dust away using a Manual
raised? wet soft cloth.
AP-74111 - Revision 1.4 423


Replacing
 Replace pump motor
Maintenanc
assembly.
e Assembly
Replacing
 Replace MAIN board MAIN Board
assembly.
When cleaning
Replace maintenance
performed, does Maintenanc
base assembly.
transmission gear e Assembly
rotate properly?
Blocky printing When cleaning
quality. operation is Replacing
Replace maintenance
7 Blocky image performed, are gears Maintenanc
base assembly.
8 printing. and transmission gear e Assembly
9 CR line seems shaft damaged?
10 dotted. Is spring of ink system  If the part is
White or black lines assembly detached or detached, remount it.
appear in printing. damaged? Replacing
 If the part is Ink ID Board
damaged, replace Assembly
ink system
assembly.
causes ink inflow. Ink ID Board
confirmed, execute
initial ink charge.
Is registered head
Enter correct head
voltage different from Head Rank
voltage.
actual head voltage?
424 AP-74111 - Revision 1.4


Does residual ink Clean head as follows.
7
collect on head
9
Refer to 1. Clean head

10
assembly or in
through "Adj 9:
nozzles?
HeadWash" of
self-diagnosis
function. HeadWash
Menu
Refer to 2. Perform
initial charge through
9
"Update 1: Head ead Rank
Rank".
Refer to 3. Check
plotouts again.
Blocky printing
quality. Are the following  Follow the steps for
Blocky image self-diagnosis the message
printing. functions judged as "[KCMY] No
CR line seems normal when checked Cartridge".
dotted. with specified  After adjustment/
White or black lines cartridge securely replacement,
appear in printing. inserted? execute initial ink
- Detection of charge from "Update
presence of ink from 1: Head Rank" of Head Rank
"Ctrl 2: Sensor" -> self-diagnosis
"Sen.3: etc" -> "11: Ink function.
NOT"
- Detection of
presence of cartridge
from "Ctrl 2: Sensor"
-> "Sen.3: etc" -> "12:
Ink END"
Replace CR board
may be CR Board
assembly.
malfunctioning. Assembly
AP-74111 - Revision 1.4 425


 Does purge correct Perform purge twice Operation
symptom? consecutively. Manual
Is media in use a Set recommended
recommended one? media and check
printout again. With Operation
non-authorized media, Manual
media sensor may fail to
detect media correctly.
Printout borders CR cable assembly Replace CR cable Replacing
12
blur. may be damaged. assembly wire. CR_FFC
Replace CR board
may be CR Board
assembly.
malfunctioning. Assembly0
 Is working Choosing a
Use machine under
environment Place for
specified environment.
appropriate? the Printer
Is the ink level Replace ink cartridge Operation
remained sufficient? with new one. Manual
Perform purge three Operation
Plot out drawing again.
times consecutively. Manual
Many satellites Perform test printing. If nozzle check patterns

(unnecessary dots) are plotted correctly,
refer to step (6)
13 Shaggy plotout Have you started Be sure to wait 6 hours
plotouting immediately or more after initial ink
Uneven lines after initial charge? charge. Plotouting
Operation
(plotted with stains) before ink charge
Manual
stabilization will not
provide adequate
plotting quality.
Is CR belt tension CR Speed
specification? Adjust CR belt tension. Belt
Tension
Adjustment
426 AP-74111 - Revision 1.4


Check if PF_ENC  If they contact with
assembly and T fence each other, adjust
contact with each CR_ENC assembly
other. and T fence
positions.
Replacing
 If problem remains CR Board
even after position
adjustment, replace
CR board assembly
Assembly
Replacing T 9
Fence
and T fence.
Check cleaning wiper  Wipe cleaning wiper
condition. surface with
accessory cleaning Operation
wiper cleaning cloth Manual
dampened with small
amount of purified
water. After wiping
cleaning wiper,
perform cleaning
twice consecutively.
Replacing
 If cleaning wiper is Cleaner
sticky with ink, Head
replace it with a new
one.
12 rubbed correctly? condition and secure it Cleaner
correctly. Head
Is registered head
actual head rank?
AP-74111 - Revision 1.4 427


 Replace pump motor
Replacing
assembly.
Maintenanc
assembly.
When cleaning
Replace maintenance
performed, are gears Maintenanc
base assembly.
and transmission gear e Assembly
shaft damaged?
Is spring of ink system  If the part is
assembly detached or detached, remount it.
damaged? Replacing
 If the part is Maintenanc
damaged, replace e Assembly
ink system
assembly.
confirmed, execute
initial ink charge.
Does residual ink Clean head as follows.
collect on print head
Refer to 1) Clean head
assembly or in
from "Adj 9:
nozzles? HeadWash
HeadWash" of printer
self-diagnosis. Menu
2) Perform initial ink
charge from "Update Head Rank
1:Head Rank".
3) Check printouts
again.
Is print head assembly Replace damaged print Replacing
damaged? head assembly. Print Head
12
428 AP-74111 - Revision 1.4


 Is CR belt tension CR Speed
Tension
Adjustment
Is registered head
actual head rank? 9
Is head slant CR Speed
Mixed colour lines
14 inappropriate? Reduction
are not overlaid.
Adjust head slant. Belt
Tension
Adjustment
Are bi-directional Uni-D/Bi-D
Align bi-directional
printing positions Low/High
printing positions.
aligned correctly? Adjustment
Is CW adjustment Uni-D/Bi-D
Perform CW
inappropriate? Low/High
adjustment.
Adjustment
 Check if CR_ENC  If they contact with
assembly and T each other, adjust
fence contact with CR_ENC assembly
each other. and T fence
Black and other positions. Replacing
15 colours do not
align.  If problem remains CR Board
even after position Assembly
adjustment, replace Replacing T
CR board assembly Fence
and T fence.
AP-74111 - Revision 1.4 429


Use machine under
Tension
Poor accuracy of Adjustment
segment length in
Is T fence  Clean T fence.
16 head travel
contaminated? If T fence is still
direction (main 
scan direction). contaminated or Replacing T

damaged, replace T Fence
fence.
Internal process of Initialize parameters
MAIN board assembly and reenter or modify Parameter
may be abnormal. them. Then, check Initialization
machine operation Menu
again.
 Is suction fan run  Check connection of
as normal when following MAIN
checked through board assembly
"Test 6: Fan" of connectors.
self-diagnosis  Suction fan relay
Poor linearity in function? 1 - 4 assembly: Replacing
17 head scan direction J25 - J29 Suction Fan
(straightness)
assembly.
Is PF driving pulley Replacing
Replace PF motor
loose? PF Motor
assembly.
Assembly
Is PF speed reduction PF Speed
belt tension adjusted Reduction
Adjust PF speed
to specification? Belt
Tension
Adjustment
430 AP-74111 - Revision 1.4


If the media in  Adjust roll receiver Replacing
problem is roll media, assembly position. Roll Media
does scroller rotate  Replace roll receiver Holder
evenly? assembly. Assembly
on the
VJ16_L Side
Replacing
16
Roll Media
Holder
9
Assembly
on the
VJ16_R
Side
rotate harder when media dust on itself, Operation
pressure arm is wipe dust away using a Manual
raised? wet soft cloth.
AP-74111 - Revision 1.4 431


Use machine under
Is PF driving pulley Replacing
Replace PF motor
loose? PF Motor
assembly.
Assembly
Is PF belt tension PF Speed
Adjust PF speed
specification? Belt
Tension
Adjustment
drag when pressure media dust on itself, Operation
lever is raised? wipe dust away using a Manual
wet soft cloth.
Poor accuracy of
segment length in Is rough surface of
18 media feed grid roller partially If grid roller is
direction (sub scan worn out? contaminated with Operation
direction) Is grid roller rotation media dust, clean roller Manual
heavy? Does rattling with a nylon brush.
occur when it rotates?
If the media in Replacing
problem is roll media, Roll Media
does scroller rotate Holder
evenly? Assembly
Adjust roll receiver
on the
assembly position.
VJ16_L Side
Replace roll receiver
Replacing
assembly.
Roll Media
Change media to be
Holder
used.
Assembly
on the
VJ16_R
Side
 Is registered head
actual head rank?
Adjust head slant. CR Speed
Reduction
Poor linearity in
Adjust head slant. Belt
media feed
19 Tension
direction (media
Adjustment
splicing accuracy)
Tension
Adjustment
432 AP-74111 - Revision 1.4


Are bi-directional Uni-D/Bi-D
Align two-way printing
printing positions Low/High
positions.
aligned correctly? Adjustment
Is T fence Clean T fence.
contaminated? If T fence is still
Replacing T
contaminated or
Fence"
damaged, replace T
fence. 9
Check if vertical lines
plotted from "Adj 3:
HeadSlant" are not
connected even
Replace steel bearer Replacing
though nozzle check
assembly. CR_FFC
pattern from "Adj 1:
NozzleChk" of
self-diagnosis function
is adjusted properly.
Is carriage assembly Replace carriage
-
loose? assembly.
 Is suction fan  Check connection of
judged as normal following
when checked maintenance board
through "Test 6: assembly
Fan" of connectors.
self-diagnosis  Suction fan relay
Poor right angle function? 1 - 4 assembly: Replacing
20
accuracy J25 - J29 Suction Fan

assembly.
19
drag when pressure media dust on itself, Operation

lever is raised? wipe dust away using a Manual
wet soft cloth.
Is rough surface of
grid roller partially If grid roller is
worn out? contaminated with Operation
Is grid roller rotation media dust, clean roller Manual
AP-74111 - Revision 1.4 433

9.3.4 Noise Problems

 Are there any
foreign objects or
obstacles around Remove obstacles and Replacing
rotating fin of foreign objects. Suction Fan
suction fan
assembly?
Check damage of
If damaged, replace
cables and connection -
Abnormal noise is damaged part.
of connectors.
1 heard when media
Suction fan assembly Replace suction fan Replacing
is suctioned.
may be defective. assembly. Suction Fan
Main board assembly
Replace MAIN board Replacing
may be
assembly. Suction Fan
malfunctioning.
defective. assembly. Board
Assembly
 Are there any
foreign objects or
Remove obstacles and
obstacles at -
foreign objects.
noise-generating
position?
Is abnormal noise Replace applicable one
heard from board? of the following board Replacing
Abnormal noise in
2 assemblies. Power
waiting mode
 Power board Board
assembly Assembly
Replacing
 Main board
MAIN Board
assembly
Replacing
 CR board assembly Print Head
 Print head assembly
434 AP-74111 - Revision 1.4


 Does customer
recognize ink Explain machine
-
discharge noise as operations.
abnormal noise?
Is abnormal noise
Additionally tighten Removing
caused by loose
screws. Covers
screw in covers?
Is rattling noise heard  Remove dust from 9
when moving carriage carriage bearing and
laterally? roller strip.
Abnormal noise is  After cleaning roller

3 heard while head is strip, always apply -
moving laterally. thin lubricant film
over its surface
using a
grease-sprayed
cloth.
Is abnormal noise  Remove twists from
heard from CR cable? CR cable.
 If abnormal noise Replacing
sounds from CR_FFC
between steel bearer
and tube guide,
replace tube guide.
Does the cable  If they contact with
connected to CR each other, adjust
board assembly on the cable position.
carriage contact with Replacing
 If problem remains CR_FFC
CR cover? even after position
adjustment, replace
the cable.
Is abnormal noise Replacing
heard from CR driven Replace it. CR Driven
3
pulley bearing? Pulley
Tension
Adjustment
Replace CR motor
heard from CR motor CR Motor
assembly.
assembly? Assembly
AP-74111 - Revision 1.4 435


 Is PF speed
reduction belt Replacing
Replace PF speed
slipping between PF Motor
reduction belt.
PF speed Assembly
reduction pulleys?
Abnormal noise is Replace PF motor
heard from PF motor PF Motor
4 heard during media assembly.
assembly? Assembly
feeding.
Is rough surface of
grid roller partially If grid roller is
worn out? contaminated with Operation
Is grid roller rotation media dust, clean roller Manual
9.3.5 Online Function Problems
N° Event/symptom Check item Action Reference

Scaling does not  Printer driver may Operation
1 Update printer driver.
work correctly. be defective. Manual
Mirror function
defective. Main
2 does not work Update Main firmware.
Firmware"
correctly.
p.1-26
Other functions do may be damaged. Replace MAIN board MAIN
3
not work correctly. assembly. Board"
p.1-50
 Is CW adjustment Uni-D/Bi-D
inappropriate? Perform adjustment. Low/High
Adjustment
Is adjustment of P_EDGE
P_EDGE sensor Sensor
Perform adjustment.
inappropriate? Sensitivity
Printing position is Adjustment
4
incorrect. Printer driver may be Operation
Update printer driver.
defective. Manual
Firmware
436 AP-74111 - Revision 1.4


Some data are not  Printer driver may Operation
printed (missing). be defective. Manual
defective. Update firmware. Main
Firmware
Is T fence  If grease or dust
contaminated or worn
out?
collect: Wipe fence
with a dry cloth. 9
 If ink deposit
presents: Wipe it off
Replacing T
with cloth dampened
Fence
with neutral
detergent.
 If contamination or
deposit is too heavy:
5 Replace T fence.
Check "Encoder CR"  If NG, check Replacing
from "Check 2: Test" connection of MAIN MAIN Board
Some data change
-> "Test 5: Encoder" of board assembly
to garbage.
6 self-diagnosis connector J12. Replacing T
function.  Replace T fence. Fence
 Replace CR motor
assembly. Replacing
CR Motor
Assembly
 Replace CR board Replacing
assembly. CR Board
Assembly
 Replace CR cable.
Replacing
CR_FFC
Main board assembly
may be
assembly. MAIN Board
malfunctioning.
AP-74111 - Revision 1.4 437


 Are print start
position and layout Operation
method set Manual
properly?
Printer driver setting Modify the value to an
Media feed after Operation
may be unsuitable. appropriate value
7 printout is Manual
(Media size).
excessive.
Firmware
9.3.6 Other Problems
N° Event/ Check item Action Reference

symptom
 Internal
process of
MAIN board Initialize parameters and Parameter
assembly reenter or modify them. Backup
Machine hangs may be
1
up. abnormal.
Main board
assembly may
assembly. MAIN Board
be damaged.
 Is power
cable Check by a circuit tester. -
shorted?
Is there any Check for short to chassis
electric ground due to damaged -
leakage? cable insulation.
Machine power Check power Replacing
Replace power board
2 is shut off during supply voltage Power Board
assembly.
printing. (DC5V). Assembly
Check power Replacing
Replace power board
supply voltage Power Board
assembly.
(DC24V). Assembly
Replace power board
assembly may Power Board
assembly.
be defective. Assembly
438 AP-74111 - Revision 1.4


symptom
 Is pointer of
Replacing
ink sensor
Replace ink sensor Cartridge
assembly
assembly. Holder
deformed or
Assembly
damaged?
Ink cartridge
Is ink NOT
3 cannot be
inserted. sensor (black
resin lever
Replacing 9
Replace ink sensor Cartridge
switch) of ink
assembly. Holder
sensor
Assembly
assembly
damaged?
 Check inside
Replace waste ink absorber
of waste fluid -
sheet.
box.
Check presence
Remove all cartridges and
of ink cartridge
lightly push the switch of ink
from "Ctrl 2:
NOT sensor (BK, C, M, Y)
Sensor" ->
Ink spills out of with something with a flat tip Sensor Menu
4 "Sen.3: etc" ->
waste fluid box. such as ballpoint pen to
"12: Ink END" of
check that the display of
self-diagnosis
"12: Ink END" changes.
function.
Is waste fluid
Replacing
tube coming out
Reinstall it. Flushing Box
of flushing box
Assembly
bent?
 Is flushing  Remove dust. Replacing
box clogged  Replace flushing box Flushing Box
with dust? assembly. Assembly
Is waste fluid
Replacing
tube coming out
Ink spills out of Reinstall waste fluid tube. Flushing Box
5 of flushing box
flushing box. Assembly
bent?
Does ink
accumulate in Replacing
Replace flushing box
ink absorber Flushing Box
assembly.
sheet in flushing Assembly
box?
AP-74111 - Revision 1.4 439


symptom
 Extension  Remove maintenance
tube may be base assembly and
Replacing
disconnected check if extension tube is
Maintenance
under ink connected.
Assembly
system  Replace pump motor
assembly. assembly. Replacing Ink
ID Board
Assembly
 Replace ink system
Ink spills around assembly.
6
X rail.
Ink tube may be Replacing Ink
Replace ink tube.
cut. Tube
Print head, Replacing
MAIN board MAIN Board
assembly and After removing ink cartridge, Replacing Print
CR board check if each board Head
assembly may operates properly. Replacing CR
be defective. Board
Assembly
440 AP-74111 - Revision 1.4

9.3.7 Problems in Using Mutoh Service Assistance
N° Symptom Check Item Action Reference

Re-install the software Required
Mutoh MEA tool does
1 - and configure initial Environmen
not executed.
settings. t
 Is printer
connected to PC 9
with LAN cable
"Packet properly? (Use
Yes: Go to item (2). Required
communication error" crossing cable for
2 No: Connect printer to Environmen
is displayed while direct connection
PC properly. t
transferring data. to PC. Use straight
cable for
connection routing
HUB.)
Is IP address of PC Yes: Go to item (3).
correct? No: Set TCP/IP
property in the local
area settings of
network configuration
Required
on PC. PC and
Environmen
printer's sub net
t
address should be
specified the same
address, such as
192.168.1.1/24 and
192.168.1.253.
Is any device which
has a same IP Yes: Disconnect
address as PC or corresponding
printer connected to device(s) from the -
HUB? LAN.
No: Go to item (4).
Is printer power on Yes: Go to item (5).

using board manager No: Switch ON the
mode and only Power printer using board
LED is ON? manager mode. If no
string is displayed on
Replacing
the LCD panel, the
MAIN Board
Engine board
Updating
assembly is damaged
Main
or the firmware may
Firmware
not be installed
(including black out
while installing
firmware).
AP-74111 - Revision 1.4 441

N° Symptom Check Item Action Reference

Is IP address of printer
Yes: Go to item (6).
correct? (Follow the
No: Engine board Replacing
procedures in 6.3 to
assembly may be MAIN Board
confirm the
damaged.
information).
Can PC communicate Yes: Connect PC to
with other LAN other device(s) with
"Packet device(s) through the LAN cable and type
communication error" network? ping command to
2 -
is displayed while confirm the
transferring data. connection is linked.
No: PC may be
damaged.
Short-period buzzer
sounds repeatedly
and LCD panel
displays the following
messages while LEDs
for Roll Paper / Cut
Paper, Colour /
Monochrome flashes
at the same time.
Firmware file size is
"Error is received
too large. Confirm that Updating
(???): Buffer
3 the transferred Refer to Transfer Main
overflow.." is
firmware is a correct failed Firmware
displayed.
one. Data format error
Press any key other
than Power to stop
the buzzer sound.
Press any key other
than Power again to
set the printer for
firmware installation
status.
442 AP-74111 - Revision 1.4

Chapter 10 Appendix
10.1 Introduction
This chapter provides the maintenance information and the development view as a reference. 10
10.2 Electric Wiring Diagram
For the wiring diagram, see the information below.
Note
Refer to Separate sheet “Wiring Diagram” p.1
The tables below shows the list of the maintenance parts for the take-up unit assembly.
The part numbers (Part N°) are the same as the ones for the exploded view.
*This section conform to the DE-37024 Rev.00.
10.3 Exploded View

For exploded views and the maintenance parts, see information below.
AP-74111 - Revision 1.4 443

444 AP-74111 - Revision 1.4

ValueJet 1614 SM Rev 1.4

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

ValueJet 1614 SM Rev 1.4

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Description:

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

ValueJet 1614 SM Rev 1.4

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Service manual

 No part of this product or publication may be reproduced, copied, or

AP-74111 - Revision 1.4 3

About this Manual

Use the built-in self-diagnostic program to locate a defective part and

4 AP-74111 - Revision 1.4

DANGER Must be followed carefully to avoid death or serious bodily injury

Must be observed to avoid slight or moderate bodily injury or

Contains important information and useful tips on the operation of 1

TIP Indicates useful tips for operating or understanding the equipment

Indicates reference pages in this manual

 Establishment Date of This Document

AP-74111 - Revision 1.4 5

6 AP-74111 - Revision 1.4

1.2 Warnings, Cautions and Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18

1.3 Important Safety Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19

1.4 Warning Labels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24

Chapter 2 Product Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29

2.3 Part Names and Functions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31

2.4 Printer Status. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38

AP-74111 - Revision 1.4 - 22/2/11 7

3.2 Product Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42

3.3 Interface Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44

3.4 Choosing a Place for the Printer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45

Chapter 4 Parts Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47

4.2 Removing Covers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52

4.3 Replacing Covers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80

AP-74111 - Revision 1.4 - 22/2/11 8

 Replacing Panel Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80

4.4 Replacing Board Base (X Rail Section). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88

4.5 Replacing Board Base Section (Y Rail Section). . . . . . . . . . 107

4.6 Replacing X Rail Section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109

AP-74111 - Revision 1.4 - 22/2/11 9

4.7 Replacing Y Rail Section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130

4.8 Replacing Cursor Section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150

4.9 Replacing Maintenance Section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171

4.10 Replacing IH Section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181

10 AP-74111 - Revision 1.4 - 22/2/11

 Replacing Ink Cartridge Control Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190

4.11 Replacing Leg Section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197

4.12 Replacing Roll Media Holder Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199

Chapter 5 Self-Diagnosis Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201

5.1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204

5.2 Preparation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204

5.3 Operations in Self-Diagnosis Mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206

5.4 Platen Adjustment Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210

5.5 Inspection Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211

5.6 Ink Charging Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222

AP-74111 - Revision 1.4 - 22/2/11 11

5.7 Adjustment Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223

5.8 Cleaning Menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250

5.9 Sample Printing Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251

5.10 Time Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255

5.11 Parameter Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256

5.12 Servo Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270

5.13 Endurance Running Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273

5.14 Media Feed Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280

5.15 ExControl Menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281

12 AP-74111 - Revision 1.4 - 22/2/11